CO2 Engineering Manual-ANSUL

CARBON DIOXIDE SYSTEMS

ANSUL

®

COMPONENTS, DESIGN, INSTALLATION, RECHARGE AND MAINTENANCE

AutoPulse

®

REVISION RECORD 2-22-01 Page 1 REV. 1 DATE

PAGE

REV. NO.

DATE

PAGE

REV. NO.

6-19-98

1-1.1

New Page

6-19-98

7-14

1

6-19-98

1-5.1

New Page

6-19-98

7-15

1

6-19-98

1-8

1

6-19-98

7-16

1

6-19-98

1-8.1

New Page

6-19-98

7-17

1

6-19-98

1-11

1

6-19-98

7-18

1

6-19-98

1-11.1

New Page

6-19-98

7-19

1

6-19-98

1-12

1

6-19-98

7-20

1

6-19-98

1-14

1

6-19-98

7-21

1

6-19-98

1-15

1

6-19-98

7-22

1

6-19-98

1-16

2

6-19-98

7-23

1

6-19-98

1-17

1

6-19-98

7-24

1

6-19-98

1-18

1

6-19-98

7-25

1

6-19-98

1-19

2

6-19-98

7-26

1

6-19-98

1-44

1

6-19-98

7-28

1

6-19-98

1-54

1

6-19-98

7-29

2

6-19-98

1-55

1

6-19-98

8-2

1

6-19-98

2-14

New Page

6-19-98

8-3

1

6-19-98

4-1

1

6-19-98

8-4

1

6-19-98

4-2

1

6-19-98

8-5

1

6-19-98

7-4

1

6-19-98

9-2

1

6-19-98

7-5

1

6-19-98

9-4

2

6-19-98

7-8

2

6-19-98

9-5

2

6-19-98

7-9

1

6-19-98

9-6

1

6-19-98

7-10

1

6-19-98

9-7

1

6-19-98

7-11

1

6-19-98

9-8

1

6-19-98

7-12

1

6-19-98

9-9

1

6-19-98

7-13

1

6-19-98

9-10

1

Indicates revised information.

REVISION RECORD 2-22-01 Page 2 REV. 1 DATE

PAGE

REV. NO.

6-19-98

9-11

1

6-19-98

9-12

1

6-19-98

9-13

New Page

6-19-98

11-1

1

6-19-98

11-3

1

6-19-98

F-91122

2

2-22-01

1-6

1

2-22-01

1-33.1

New Page

2-22-01

7-7

2

2-22-01

7-27

2

Indicates revised information.

DATE

PAGE

REV. NO.

Table of Contents

ANSUL



FORM NO.

PAGE NO.

COMPONENTS CV90 Valve Cylinder Shipping Assembly CV98 Valve Cylinder Shipping Assembly MAX Valve Cylinder Shipping Assembly AP-8 Valve Cylinder Shipping Assembly AUTOPULSE Control System HF Electric Actuator CV98 Electric Actuator CV98/CV90/AP-8 Valve Flexible Discharge Bend MAX Valve Flexible Discharge Bend CV90/MAX Valve Stackable/Lever Actuator CV98 Lever Release Actuator CV90/MAX Valve Manual/Pneumatic Actuator CV90/MAX Valve Pneumatic Actuator

F-90110 F-9880 F-90137 F-90136 F-90228-1 F-90182-1 F-9881 F-90132-1 F-90135 F-90134-1 F-9882 F-90131 F-90133-1

1-1 1-1.1 1-2 1-3 1-4 1-5 1-5.1 1-6 1-7 1-8 1-8.1 1-9 1-10

Discharge Nozzle – Type “D” Discharge Nozzle – Type “D” – Corrosion Resistant Sealed Nozzle With Strainer Bulkhead Mounting Flange Discharge Nozzle – Type “A” Discharge Nozzle – Cone Type

F-90216-1 F-96156 F-90217-1 F-90218 F-90219-1 F-90220-1

1-11 1-11.1 1-12 1-13 1-14 1-15

Discharge Nozzle – Discharge Nozzle – Discharge Nozzle – Discharge Nozzle – Cylinder Bracketing

F-90221-2 F-90222-1 F-90223-1 F-90224-2 F-90183-1

1-16 1-17 1-18 1-19 1-20

Nameplate – MAIN Nameplate – RESERVE Nameplate – Maintenance Warning Plate – Outside Room Without Alarm Pressure Bleeder Plug – 1/4 In.

F-90191 F-90190 F-90189 F-90194 F-90196

1-21 1-22 1-23 1-24 1-25

Warning Plate – Outside Room With Alarm Warning Plate – Inside Room With Alarm Connecting Link Lever Release Actuator AP-8 Valve/Selector Valve Selector Valves With Pressure Actuator Selector Valves With Electric Solenoid Actuator

F-90193 F-90192 F-90225 F-90226-1 F-90208 F-91139-1

1-26 1-27 1-28 1-29 1-30 1-30.1

SECTION 1.

4 In. Multi-Discharge Type 6 In. Multi-Discharge Type Regular Type Baffle Type

2-22-01

ANSUL



FORM NO.

PAGE NO.

Selector Valves With Lever Actuator Direction/Stop Valves Lock Handle Stop Valve Manual Pull Box Corner Pulley Check Valves Cable With Swaged End Fitting Dual/Triple Control Boxes Remote Cable Pull Equalizer Quartzoid Bulb Actuator

F-90210-1 F-90211-1 F-2001045 F-90213 F-90214 F-90215 F-90204 F-90206 F-90205 F-90203

1-32 1-33 1-33.1 1-34 1-35 1-36 1-37 1-38 1-39 1-40

Pneumatic Time Delay AP-8 Valve Enclosed Release Attachment With Flexible Connector Hose Reels Pressure Trip Header Safety

F-90207 F-90227 F-90195 F-90212-1 F-90187

1-41 1-42 1-43 1-44 1-45

Header Vent Plug Pressure Operated Siren Discharge Indicator Odorizer Pressure Switch – DPST

F-90188 F-90186-1 F-90185 F-90184 F-90202

1-46 1-47 1-48 1-49 1-50

Pressure Switch – 3PST Pressure Switch – SPDT Pressure Switch – DPDT – Explosion-Proof Marine Actuation Station – Two Step Marine Actuation Station – One Step

F-90199 F-90201 F-90200-1 F-90197-1 F-90198-1

1-51 1-52 1-53 1-54 1-55

APPLICATIONS Electronic Data Processing – Computer Room and Subfloor Electronic Data Processing – Subfloor Recirculating Turbine Generators Non-Recirculating Turbine Generators Control Rooms Record Storage Rooms Battery Storage Open Top Lube Oil Pits

F-90171 F-90164 F-90106 F-90162 F-90177 F-90175 F-90174 F-90176

2-1 2-2 2-3 2-4 2-5 2-6 2-7 2-8

SECTION 1.

2.

Table of Contents

COMPONENTS (Continued)

2-22-01

ANSUL



FORM NO.

PAGE NO.

APPLICATIONS (Continued) Electrical Cabinets Transformers

F-90166 F-90173

2-9 2-10

Wave Solder Machines

F-90165

2-11

Industrial Fryers Dip Tanks Open Face Wet Bench and Processing Tool Protection Guide

F-90172 F-90163 F-97137

2-12 2-13 2-14

SPECIFICATIONS CSI SPEC-DATA SHEET – Carbon Dioxide Extinguishing Systems CSI MANU-SPEC SHEET – Carbon Dioxide Extinguishing Systems

F-90181 F-90230

– –

SECTION 2.

3.

Table of Contents

4.

GENERAL INFORMATION Carbon Dioxide Personnel Safety Types of Systems Total Flooding Local Application Types of Actuation Pneumatic Mechanical Electrical Rate of Rise (H.A.D.) Types of Detection H.A.D. (Rate of Rise) Electric Mechanical (Fusible Link)

4-1 – 4-2 4-1 4-1 4-1 4-1 4-1 4-1 4-1 4-1 4-2 4-2 4-2 4-2 4-2 4-2

5.

PLANNING Application Methods Total Flooding Local Application Hazard Analysis Hazard Type Hazard Dimensions Unclosable Openings Types of Fires Hazard Atmosphere Hazardous Material Ventilation Considerations Electrical Considerations Temperature Range Other Factors That Influence System Planning

5-1 – 5-4 5-1 5-1 5-1 5-1 – 5-3 5-1 5-1 5-1 – 5-2 5-2 5-2 5-2 5-2 5-2 5-3 5-3 6-19-98

ANSUL



SECTION

Table of Contents

FORM NO.

PAGE NO.

6.

DESIGN Application Method Total Flooding Local Application Hand Hose Lines Detection System Requirements Mechanical Detectors (Fusible Links) Actuation Requirements Manual Actuation Pneumatic Actuation Electric Actuation Accessories Electric or Mechanical Manual Pull Station Selector Valves Direction/Stop Valves Pressure Operated Siren Pressure Switch Pressure Trip Pneumatic Time Delay Alarms Reserve System Develop Bill of Materials Sample Problem

6-1 – 6-18 6-1 – 6-13 6-1 – 6-5 6-5 – 6-13 6-13 6-13 – 6-14 6-13 – 6-14 6-14 – 6-15 6-14 6-14 6-15 6-15 – 6-18 6-15 6-15 – 6-16 6-16 6-17 6-17 6-17 6-17 – 6-18 6-18 6-18 6-18 6-18

7.

INSTALLATION Mounting Components Cylinder/Bracket Assembly Releasing Devices Installing Actuation Piping General Piping Requirements Actuation Piping Installation Installing Distribution Piping Hanger Applications General Piping Requirements Distribution Manifold and Piping Installation Main/Reserve System Installing Detection/Actuation System AUTOPULSE Control System with HF Electric Actuator AUTOPULSE Control System with ANSUL AUTOMAN II-C with Pneumatic Actuation ANSUL AUTOMAN II-C Release with Pneumatic Actuation H.A.D. Detection with Mechanical Actuation Mechanical ANSUL AUTOMAN Release with Fusible Link Quartzoid Bulb Actuator (QBA-5) Installing Actuators Pneumatic Manual Electric

7-1 – 7-30 7-1 – 7-4 7-1 – 7-4 7-4 7-4 – 7-5 7-4 7-5 7-5 – 7-7 7-5 – 7-6 7-6 7-7 7-7 7-8 – 7-17 7-8 7-8 – 7-9 7-9 7-9 – 7-10 7-10 – 7-17 7-17 7-17 – 7-19 7-17 – 7-18 7-18 7-19 6-19-98

ANSUL



FORM NO.

SECTION 7.

8.

PAGE NO.

INSTALLATION (Continued) Stacking Actuators Installing Accessories Manual Pull Station Alarms Selector Valves Lock Handle Stop Valve Direction/Stop Valves Pressure Trip Pressure Switch Time Delay Pressure Operated Siren

7-19 7-20 7-20 7-25 7-25 7-27 7-27 7-29 7-29 7-29 7-29

TESTING AND PLACING IN SERVICE

8-1 – 8-6

Testing Testing Testing Testing Testing Testing 9.

Table of Contents

H.A.D. System Pull Station Electric Detection System – AUTOPULSE Control System Electric Detection System – ANSUL AUTOMAN II-C Release Mechanical – ANSUL AUTOMAN Release with Fusible Link 60 Second Time Delay

RESETTING AND RECHARGE Clear Electrical Equipment Check Electrical and Mechanical Equipment Piping and Nozzles Mechanical Detection System Electric Detection System H.A.D. Detection System Pressure Switch Place System Back in Service Recharge CO2 Cylinder Pneumatic Valve Actuator Electric Valve Actuator Manual Valve Actuator Manual Pull Station Replace ANSUL AUTOMAN Cartridge

10. INSPECTION Manual Pull Station Detectors Control System ANSUL AUTOMAN Releasing Device Cylinders Cylinder Actuator Distribution Piping and Nozzles Alarms and Sirens Miscellaneous

– 7-29 – 7-25 – 7-27 – 7-28

8-1 8-1 – 8-2 8-2 8-2 8-2 – 8-3 8-4 – 8-5 9-1 – 9-14 9-1 9-1 – 9-1 9-1 – 9-2 9-2 9-2 9-2 – 9-2 – 9-12 9-13 9-13 9-13 9-13

9-2 9-2

9-13 9-11

10-1 – 10-2 10-1 10-1 10-1 10-1 10-1 10-1 10-1 10-1 10-1 2-22-01

ANSUL



SECTION

Table of Contents

FORM NO.

11. MAINTENANCE

PAGE NO. 11-1 – 11-6

Semi-Annual Maintenance Examination General Information – Weigh Cylinders Fusible Link Detection/Mechanical ANSUL AUTOMAN Release Thermal Detection/Electric ANSUL AUTOMAN II-C Release H.A.D. Detection/Mechanical Control Head Electric Detection/AUTOPULSE Control System

11-1 11-1 11-2 11-4 11-5 11-6

12. TYPICAL APPLICATIONS

– – – –

11-6 11-2 11-3 11-5

12-1 – 12-272

Design Examples Example No. 1 – Dip Tanks Example No. 2 – Computer Room and Subfloor Example No. 3 – Wave Solder Machines Example No. 4 – Electrical Cabinets Example No. 5 – Transformers Example No. 6 – Subfloor Example No. 7 – Battery Storage Vaults Example No. 8 – Document Storage Example No. 9 – Control Rooms Example No. 10 – Lube Oil Pits Example No. 11 – Generators (Recirculating and Non-Recirculating Type) Example No. 12 – Industrial Fryer

12-1 – 12-271 12-2 – 12-13 12-14 – 12-36 12-37 – 12-60 12-61 – 12-71 12- 72 – 12-102 12-103 – 12-117 12-118 – 12-126 12-127 – 12-138 12-139 – 12-150.1 12-151 – 12-185 12-186 – 12-213 12-214 – 12-272

13. APPENDIX Proposal Information Parts List for Single Row Cylinder Bracketing With Weigh Rail Parts List for Double Row Cylinder Bracketing With Weigh Rail Parts List for Back to Back Cylinder Bracketing With Weigh Rail Parts List for CV90 Cylinder Valve

F-94148 F-9127-1 F-9128-1 F-9129-1 F-91122-2

6-19-98

ANSUL

Carbon Dioxide System Components



CV90 Cylinder Shipping Assembly

Description The CV90 cylinder is factory filled with carbon dioxide. A single cylinder may be used or multiple cylinders can be manifolded together to obtain the required quantity of agent for total flooding or local application methods. The CV90 cylinder can be actuated electrically, pneumatically, and/or manually with approved valve actuation components.

The cylinders are shipped with a maintenance record card and protective shipping cap attached to the threaded neck of each cylinder. This cap entirely encloses and protects the valve while in shipment. The 25, 35, and 50 lb. (11.3, 15.9, and 22.7 kg) cylinders are manufactured with a bent siphon tube which allows for either horizontal or vertical mounting.

Component

Material

Thread Size/Type

Approvals

Cylinder

Steel

1-11 1/2 NPT, Female

Meets DOT 3A1800 or 3AA1800

CV90 Valve

Brass

1-11 1/2 NPT, Male x 1 5/16-12UN-3A Outlet Thread – Male 1.25-18 UNEF-3A Male Filling Port Thread

Safety Relief Valve

Brass

.6250-18UNF-3B, Male

Valve/Tank Assembly

Shipping Cap

Shipping Assembly Part No.

In Accordance with Bureau of Explosives UL (EX-2968), FM Approved, Complies with Regulations of the U.S. Coast Guard (162.038/7/0) and meets requirements of NFPA 12.

Steel

3.125-11 NS1, Female

Weight Of CO2 lb. (kg)

Approximate Weight lb. (kg)

Dimension A* in. (cm)

Dimension B in. (cm)

(11.3) (15.9) (22.7) (34.0) (45.4)

98 121 165 200 300

(44.5) (54.9) (75) (91) (136)

26 1/2 35 3/4 52 3/4 57 3/4 59 3/4

(67) (90.8) (128.9) (146.7) (151.8)

8 1/2 8 1/2 8 1/2 9 1/4 10 3/4

(21.6) (21.6) (21.6) (23.5) (27.3)

(11.3) (15.9) (22.7) (34.0) (45.4)

98 121 165 200 300

(44.5) (55) (75) (91) (136)

26 1/2 35 3/4 52 3/4 57 3/4 59 3/4

(67) (90.8) (133.9) (146.7) (151.8)

8 1/2 8 1/2 8 1/2 9 1/4 10 3/4

(21.6) (21.6) (21.6) (23.5) (27.3)

Finish: Red Enamel Paint 79814 79816 79818 79820 79822

25 35 50 75 100

Finish: Red Epoxy Paint 79815 79817 79819 79821 79823

25 35 50 75 100

*Tolerance ± 1/2 in. (12.7 mm)

1-1

CYLINDER SHIPPING CAP VALVE SHIPPING CAP CV90 VALVE RECORD TAG SIPHON TUBE ADAPTOR SIPHON TUBE SAFETY DISC NUT A HEIGHT TO OUTLET

B 001416

001816

THREADED FOR RELEASE ATTACHMENT OR SHIPPING CAP

ACTUATION INSERT SET SCREW

PLUNGER ACTUATION ISOLATOR PLUNGER SPRING VALVE OUTLET

SPRING STOP MAIN SEAL SPRING

BACK PRESSURE CHECK VALVE

RECOIL SEAT

6 IN. (15.2 cm)

MAIN STEM

RECOIL VALVE

SAFETY DISC AND WASHER

DISCHARGE BEND OUTLET

SAFETY DISC NUT SEAL BODY

FILL CHECK

1 IN. STANDARD PIPE THREAD MAIN SEAL

THREADED FOR SIPHON TUBE 2 13/16 IN. (7.14 cm)

001417

NOTE: Use Flexible Discharge Bend, Part No. 42424, when attaching valve to supply pipe or manifold.

ANSUL is a registered trademark.

ANSUL INCORPORATED, ONE STANTON STREET, MARINETTE, WI 54143-2542

715-735-7411

Form No. F-90110

©1997 Ansul Incorporated

Litho in U.S.A.

ANSUL




CV-98 Cylinder Shipping Assembly

Description The CV-98 cylinder is factory filled with carbon dioxide. A single cylinder may be used or multiple cylinders can be manifolded together to obtain the required quantity of agent for total flooding or local application methods. The CV-98 cylinder can be actuated electrically, pneumatically, and/or manually with approved valve actuation components.

The cylinders are shipped with a maintenance record card and protective shipping cap attached to the threaded neck of each cylinder. This cap entirely encloses and protects the valve while in shipment. The 35 and 50 lb. (15.9 and 22.7 kg) cylinders are manufactured with a bent siphon tube which allows for either horizontal or vertical mounting.

Component

Material

Thread Size/Type

Approvals

Cylinder

Steel



CV-98 Valve

Brass

1-11 1/2 NPT, Male x 1 5/16-12UN-3A Outlet Thread – Male

Safety Relief Valve

Brass


Valve/Tank Assembly

Shipping Cap



Steel




Dimension A in. (cm)


(15.9) (22.7) (34.0) (45.4)

121 165 200 300

(54.9) (75) (91) (136)

35 3/4 52 3/4 57 3/4 59 3/4

(90.8) (128.9) (146.7) (151.8)

8 1/2 8 1/2 9 1/4 10 3/4

(21.6) (21.6) (23.5) (27.3)

(15.9) (22.7) (34.0) (45.4)

121 165 200 300

(55) (75) (91) (136)

35 3/4 52 3/4 57 3/4 59 3/4

(90.8) (133.9) (146.7) (151.8)

8 1/2 8 1/2 9 1/4 10 3/4

(21.6) (21.6) (23.5) (27.3)

Finish: Red Enamel Paint 426242 426244 426246 426248

35 50 75 100

Finish: Red Epoxy Paint 426243 426245 426247 426249

35 50 75 100

1-1.1

CYLINDER SHIPPING CAP VALVE SHIPPING CAP CV-98 VALVE RECORD TAG SIPHON TUBE ADAPTOR SIPHON TUBE SAFETY DISC NUT A HEIGHT TO OUTLET

B 001416

001816


CV-98 CO2 VALVE The CV-98 valve has a ten (10) year warranty. The valve requires no internal maintenance. The valve is sealed closed and must never be disassembled. If there is ever a malfunction of the CV-98 valve, the complete valve must be sent back to Ansul for warranty replacement. If the external seal is broken, the warranty is voided.



715-735-7411

Form No. F-9880


Litho in U.S.A.

ANSUL




MAX Valve Cylinder Shipping Assembly

Description The MAX valve cylinder is factory filled with carbon dioxide. A single cylinder may be used or multiple cylinders can be manifolded together to obtain the required quantity of agent for total flooding or local application methods. The MAX valve cylinder can be actuated electrically, pneumatically, and/or manually with approved valve actuation components.

The cylinders are shipped with a maintenance record card and protective cap attached to the threaded collar on the neck of each cylinder. This cap entirely encloses and protects the valve while in shipment.

Component

Material

Thread Size/Type

Approvals

Cylinder

Steel



MAX Valve

Brass

1-11 1/2 NPT, Male 3/4-14 NPSM Outlet Thread, Female

Safety Relief Valve

Brass


Valve/Tank Assembly

Shipping Cap



Steel






(22.7) (34) (45.4)

165 200 300

(75) (91) (136)

54 3/4 59 3/4 61 3/4

(139.0) (151.8) (156.8)

8 1/2 9 1/4 10 3/4

(21.6) (23.5) (27.3)

(22.7) (34) (45.4)

165 200 300

(75) (91) (136)

54 3/4 59 3/4 61 3/4

(139.0) (151.8) (156.8)

8 1/2 9 1/4 10 3/4

(21.6) (23.5) (27.3)

Finish: Red Enamel Paint 70760 70761 70762

50 75 100

Finish: Red Epoxy Paint 76921 76922 76923

50 75 100


1-2

CYLINDER SHIPPING CAP SHIPPING PLUG

VALVE SHIPPING CAP

STANDARD BACK-PRESSURE ACTUATOR

MAX VALVE

RECORD TAG BACK-PRESSURE ACTUATOR – REPLACE WITH STACKABLE BACK-PRESSURE ACTUATOR FOR OTHER ACTUATION MEANS

SAFETY DISC NUT

SIPHON TUBE ADAPTOR SIPHON TUBE

A HEIGHT TO OUTLET

CYLINDER COLLAR (THREADED FOR ATTACHMENT OF SHIPPING CAP)

MAX CYLINDER VALVE

B DIAMETER 001818

001819

STANDARD BACKPRESSURE ADAPTOR

VALVE OUTLET

PASSAGE FOR PRESSURE OPERATION CHECK VALVE INSERT

PISTON ACTUATOR SEAL

SAFETY DISC AND WASHER VENT PORT VALVE CORE

4 1/2 IN. (11.4 cm) BALL CHECK

PISTON

SAFETY RELIEF DEVICE

MAIN SEAL VALVE BODY 1 IN. STANDARD PIPE THREAD

THREADED FOR SIPHON TUBE ADAPTOR

4 1/16 IN. (10.3 cm)

001820




715-735-7411

Form No. F-90137


Litho in U.S.A.

ANSUL




AP-8 Cylinder Shipping Assembly

Description The AP-8 cylinder is factory filled with carbon dioxide. A single cylinder may be used or multiple cylinders can be manifolded together to obtain the required quantity of agent for total flooding or local application methods. The AP-8 cylinder can be actuated electrically, pneumatically, and/or manually with approved valve actuation components.



The cylinders are shipped with a maintenance record card and protective cap attached to the threaded collar on the neck of each cylinder. This cap entirely encloses and protects the valve while in shipment.




(22.7) (34) (45.4)

165 200 300

(75) (91) (136)

52 1/4 (132.7) 57 1/4 (145.4) 59 1/4 (150.5)

8 1/2 9 1/4 10 3/4

(21.6) (23.5) (27.3)

(22.7) (34) (45.4)

165 200 300

(75) (91) (136)

52 1/4 (132.7) 57 1/4 (145.4) 5 1/4 (150.5)

8 1/2 9 1/4 10 3/4

(21.6) (23.5) (27.3)

Finish: Red Enamel Paint 46240 46242 46244

50 75 100

Finish: Red Epoxy Paint 76924 76925 76926

50 75 100


CYLINDER SHIPPING CAP BONNET CAP

AP-8 VALVE

BONNET PRESSURE VENT SAFETY DISC NUT RECOIL PREVENTOR

CYLINDER COLLAR (THREADED FOR ATTACHMENT OF PROTECTION COVER)

RECORD TAG MAIN OUTLET

A

1 IN. STANDARD PIPE THREAD

HEIGHT TO OUTLET

CYLINDER

B

001821

001822

1-3

Component

Material

Thread Size/Type

Approvals

Cylinder

Steel



AP-8 Valve

Brass

1-11 1/2 NPT, Male 1 5/16-12UN-3A Outlet Thread, Male

Safety Relief Valve

Brass


In Accordance with Bureau of Explosives

Valve/Tank Assembly

UL (EX-2968), FM Approved, Complies with Regulations of the U.S. Coast Guard (162.038/7/0) and meets requirements of NFPA 12.

Shipping Cap

Steel


VALVE IN CLOSED POSITION

VALVE IN OPEN POSITION THREADED FOR RELEASE ATTACHMENT OR BONNET CAP PASSAGE FOR PRESSURE OPERATION

PRESSURE RELEASE PLUG

SAFETY PLUG CHECK SAFETY DISC AND WASHER OUTLET CHECK

BONNET CAP CHAIN

MINIMUM AREA OF OUTLET PASSAGE 0.2485 SQ. IN.

DISCHARGE BEND OUTLET

THREADED FOR SYPHON TUBE

1 IN. STANDARD PIPE THREAD

001823




715-735-7411

Form No. F-90136


Litho in U.S.A.

ANSUL




AUTOPULSE Control System

Description The AUTOPULSE Control System consists of a microprocessor based panel field programmable for crosszone, counting-zone, independent or priority-zone (counting) detection circuit applications. Several models of the AUTOPULSE Control System are available depending on the type of hazard being protected. The AUTOPULSE Control System is ideal for industrial, commercial and institutional facilities where an automatic electronic control system is required to actuate a fixed suppression system. The control system is listed by UL and ULC, approved by FM, and has been tested to the applicable FCC Rules and Regulations for Class “A” computing devices. The design meets the National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 72 “National Fire Alarm Code.” Component

Approvals

AUTOPULSE Control System

UL (S-2374) ULC FM Approved FCC

001824

See Price List and Installation Maintenance Manual for details and part numbers of individual shipping assemblies.

ANSUL and AUTOPULSE are registered trademarks.

1-4


715-735-7411

Form No. F-90228-1


Litho in U.S.A.

ANSUL




HF Electric Actuator

Description Electrical actuation of an agent cylinder is accomplished by an HF electric actuator interfaced through an AUTOPULSE Control System. This actuator can be used in hazardous environments where the ambient temperature range is between 0 °F to 130 °F (–18 °C to 54 °C). The HF electric actuator meets the requirements of N.E.C. Class I, Div. 1, Groups B, C, D and Class II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G. A maximum of two HF electric actuators can be used on a single AUTOPULSE release circuit. When utilizing only one HF electric actuator, an in-line resistor, Part No. 73606, is required in the supervised release circuit.

4 1/2 IN. (11.4 cm)

The actuator specifications are: Nominal Voltage

Rated Voltage Minimum Maximum

12 VDC @ 0.57 amps

10.4 VDC*

14.0 VDC

In auxiliary or override applications, a manual-local override valve actuator or a manual cable pull actuator can be installed on top of the HF electric actuator by removing the safety cap.

2 1/4 IN. (5.7 cm)

001395

An arming tool is required to reset the actuator after operation. The actuator contains a standard 1/2 in. threaded female straight connector for electrical conduit hookup. Shipping Assembly Part No.

Description

73327

HF electric actuator

Component

Material

Thread Size/Type

Approvals

HF Electric Actuator

Body: Brass Plunger Stainless Steel

1/2 in. Straight Female

UL (EX-2968) FM Approved

*Minimum operating voltage is 9.0 VDC.


1-5 ANSUL INCORPORATED, ONE STANTON STREET, MARINETTE, WI 54143-2542

715-735-7411

Form No. F-90182-1


Litho in U.S.A.

ANSUL




CV-98 Electric Actuator

Description Electrical actuation of a CV-98 CO2 cylinder valve is accomplished by a CV-98 electric actuator interfaced through an AUTOPULSE Control System. This actuator can be used in hazardous environments where the ambient temperature range is between 0 °F to 130 °F (–18 °C to 54 °C). The CV-98 electric actuator meets the requirements of N.E.C. Class I, Div. 1, Groups B, C, D and Class II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G. A maximum of two CV-98 electric actuators can be used on a single AUTOPULSE release circuit. When using either one or two CV-98 electric actuators, an in-line resistor, Part No. 426001, must always be used. The actuator specifications are: Nominal Voltage 24 VDC @ 1.5 amps In auxiliary or override applications, a manual cable pull actuator can be installed on top of the CF-98 electric actuator by removing the safety cap. The actuator contains a standard 1/2 in. threaded female straight connector for electrical conduit hookup. Shipping Assembly Part No. 423684 423958

Description CV-98 Electric Actuator Replaceable METRON PROTRACTOR

001395

The CV-98 electric actuator uses a replaceable METRON PROTRACTOR which is a device designed to produce a high force mechanical output. The actuator is electrically actuated and will operate within milliseconds. The METRON PROTRACTOR must be replaced after discharge of the CO2 system.

Component

Material

Thread Size/Type

Approvals

CV-98 Electric Actuator

Body: Brass Plunger Stainless Steel

1/2 in. Straight Female

UL (E91021) FM Approved


1-5.1 ANSUL INCORPORATED, ONE STANTON STREET, MARINETTE, WI 54143-2542

715-735-7411

Form No. F-9881


Litho in U.S.A.

ANSUL




CV98/CV90/AP-8 Valve Flexible Discharge Bend

Description The CV98/CV90/AP-8 valve Flexible Discharge Bend (Part No. 427082) is a 5/8 in. (1.59 cm) I.D. extra-heavy flexible hose which connects the valve discharge outlet to the fixed piping or header manifold. The discharge bend has a female 1.3-12-UN-3B thread for connecting to the valve outlet and a male 1/2 in. NPT thread for connecting to the fixed piping or manifold. The discharge bend will withstand a pressure of 9000 psi (621 bar). Its flexible connection allows for easy alignment of multiple cylinder banks to fixed piping. Each bend has a built-in check valve that prevents loss of agent should the system discharge while any cylinder is removed.


Description

427082 842430

Flexible discharge bend Washer

Thread Size/Type Component

Material

Valve End

Manifold End

Approvals

5/8 in. Flexible Discharge Bend

SAE 100 R2 Type AT

1 5/16-12-UN-3B Female

1/2 NPT Male

U.S. Coast Guard (162.038/7/0) UL (EX-2968) FM Approved

18 7/8 IN. (47.9 cm) FEMALE ADAPTOR (THREAD 1 5/16 IN.-12N-3) (BRONZE)

1/2 IN. NPT MALE COUPLING

CHECK SWAGE ON

MANIFOLD/END

VALVE END

000658


1-6 REV. 1 ANSUL INCORPORATED, ONE STANTON STREET, MARINETTE, WI 54143-2542

715-735-7411

Form No. F-90132-1


Litho in U.S.A.

ANSUL




MAX Valve Flexible DIscharge Bend

Description The MAX valve Flexible Discharge Bend (Part No. 68714) is a 5/8 in. (1.59 cm) I.D. extra-heavy flexible hose which connects the valve discharge outlet to the fixed piping or header manifold. The discharge bend has a male 3/4-14 NPSM thread for connecting to the valve outlet and a male 1/2 in. NPT thread for connecting to the fixed piping or manifold. The discharge bend will withstand a pressure of 6000 psi (41370 kPa). Its flexible connection allows for easy alignment of multiple cylinder banks to fixed piping. Each bend has a built-in check valve that prevents loss of agent should the system discharge while any cylinder is removed.


Description

68714

Flexible discharge bend

Thread Size/Type Component

Material

Valve End

Manifold End

Approvals

5/8 in. Flexible Discharge Bend – MAX

Double Wire Braided (Perforated) Rubber Covered Hose Bronze Couplings

3/4–14 NPSM, Male

1/2 NPT Male


O-RING (PART NO. 24235) CHECK 3/4 IN. MALE ADAPTOR

1/2 IN. NPT MALE COUPLING (BRONZE)

SWAGE ON

MANIFOLD/ PIPE END VALVE END

18 7/8 IN. (47.9 cm)

001827



715-735-7411

Form No. F-90135


Litho in U.S.A.

ANSUL




CV90/MAX Valve Stackable/Lever Actuator

Description Stackable Actuator – MAX Valve Only: The stackable actuator is required to attach a valve actuation component to the MAX valve. The slave back-pressure actuator, which comes installed as part of the MAX valve, must be removed in order to attach the stackable back-pressure actuator. In one and two-cylinder systems, one stackable back-pressure actuator is required to attach a valve actuation component. In a two cylinder system, the remaining cylinder is actuated by the pressure generated within the distribution manifold.

Manual actuation is accomplished by pulling the valve hand lever. The lever design contains a forged mechanical detent which secures the lever in the open position when actuated. Cable-pull actuation is accomplished by using a remote manual pull station. The remote manual pull station system must contain the components necessary to meet the actuator lever traveling requirements of 7 in. (17.8 cm). Component

Material

Approvals

In three or more cylinder systems, two stackable backpressure actuators are required to attach valve actuation components. The remaining cylinder(s) is actuated by the pressure generated within the distribution manifold.

Stackable Back-Pressure Actuator

Brass

Lever Release Actuator – CV90/MAX Valve: The manual lever release actuator provides a manual means of agent cylinder actuation by direct manual actuation of its pull lever or cable actuation when used in conjunction with a remote manual pull station.


All Manual Cable-Pull Actuators

Brass with Stainless Steel Pin

U.S. Coast Guard (162.038/7/0) U.L. (EX-2968) FM Approved

In three or more cylinder systems, a connecting link is required to provide simultaneous actuation of both manual cable-pull actuators. Shipping Assembly Part No. Description 70326 70846 70847 32098

Stackable back-pressure actuator Manual cable-pull actuator (handle and pin; for local control) Manual-cable pull actuator (handle, no pin; for remote control) Manual-cable pull actuator (no handle, no pin; for use with three or more cylinders)

1-8

HANDLE

ON AL N H OR LY. O E SE LV ON 0475 R U VA ES O. 7 FO MAX ALV EL N V LAB 90 CV

3 7/8 IN. (9.8 cm)

PIN

3 7/8 IN. (9.8 cm) DEPTH: 3 IN. (7.6 cm)

Part No. 70326

Part No. 70846

000897

001828

HANDLE

HANDLE



3 7/8 IN. (9.8 cm)

3 7/8 IN. (9.8 cm)

3 7/8 IN. (9.8 cm)

3 7/8 IN. (9.8 cm) DEPTH: 2 13/16 IN. (7.1 cm)

DEPTH: 2 13/16 IN. (7.1 cm)

Part No. 70847

001393b

Part No. 32098

001393b



715-735-7411

Form No. F-90134-1


Litho in U.S.A.

ANSUL




CV-98 Lever Release Actuator

Description The manual lever release actuator provides a manual means of CV-98 CO2 agent cylinder actuation by direct manual actuation of its pull lever or cable actuation when used in conjunction with a remote manual pull station. Manual actuation is accomplished by pulling the actuator hand lever. The lever design contains a forged mechanical detent which secures the lever in the open position when actuated. Cable-pull actuation is accomplished by using a remote manual pull station. The remote manual pull station system must contain the components necessary to meet the actuator lever traveling requirements of 7 in. (17.8 cm).

Component

Material

Approvals

All Manual Cable-pull Actuators

Brass with Stainless Steel Pin

FMRC Approved UL Listed (EX-2968)

These lever actuators can also be attached to the top of a CV-98 electric actuator. Each type actuator has its Part No. stamped on the lever.


Description

423309 423310 423311

Manual cable-pull actuator (handle and pin; for local control) Manual cable-pull actuator (handle, no pin; for remote control) Manual cable-pull actuator (no handle, no pin; for remote control)

HANDLE

3 7/8 IN.* (9.8 cm)

3 7/8 IN.* (9.8 cm) PIN

3 7/8 IN. (9.8 cm)

3 7/8 IN. (9.8 cm) 1 1/8 – 18 THREAD

000897

002553

1 1/8 – 18 THREAD

DEPTH: 3 7/8 IN. (7.6 cm)

Part No. 423309

DEPTH: 1 13/16 IN. (4.6 cm)

Part No. 423311

* Add 1 9/16 in. (3.9 cm) to height when handle is in the straight up position.

1-8.1

HANDLE

3 7/8 IN.* (9.8 cm)

3 7/8 IN. (9.8 cm) 1 1/8 – 18 THREAD

001420

DEPTH: 2 13/16 IN. (7.1 cm)

Part No. 423310 * Add 1 9/16 in. (3.9 cm) to height when handle is in the straight up position.



715-735-7411

Form No. F-9882-1

© 1999 Ansul Incorporated

Litho in U.S.A.

ANSUL




CV90/MAX Valve Manual/Pneumatic Actuator

Description The CV90/MAX valve manual/pneumatic actuator (Part No. 32094) is used where a system design requires manuallocal override at the cylinder. The manual actuator can be mounted directly to the release attachment port of the CV90 valve or to the release attachment port on the MAX valve by incorporating the use of a stackable actuator. When either valve uses an electric actuator, the manual/pneumatic actuator can be mounted directly to the top of the electric actuator, giving the system the capability of manual, pneumatic, and electric actuation.

3 3/4 IN. (9.5 cm)

Operation is accomplished by either removing the ring pin and depressing the red palm button or by supplying a minimum of 30 psi (207 kPa) to the inlet port. A swivel connection is provided to facilitate orientation of the inlet port.

Component

Material

Approvals

Manual/Pneumatic Actuator

Brass


INLET PORT 1/4 IN. NPT FEMALE PIPE

1 7/8 IN. (4.8 cm) 001394

Shipping Assembly Part No. Description 32094

Manual/pneumatic actuator



715-735-7411

Form No. F-90131


Litho in U.S.A.

ANSUL




CV90/MAX Valve Pneumatic Actuator

Description INLET PORT 1/4 IN. NPT FEMALE PIPE

The CV90/MAX valve pneumatic actuator (Part No. 32096) is used where a system design requires pneumatic actuation at the cylinder. The pneumatic actuator can be mounted directly to the release attachment port of the CV90 valve or to the release attachment port on the MAX valve by incorporating the use of a stackable actuator. When either valve uses an electric actuator, the pneumatic actuator can be mounted directly to the top of the electric actuator, giving the system the capability of both pneumatic and electric actuation.

1 5/8 IN. (4.1 cm)

Operation is accomplished by supplying a minimum of 30 psi (207 kPa) for MAX valve and a minimum of 100 psi (690 kPa) for CV90 valve, to the inlet port of the actuator. A swivel fitting is provided for orientation of piping and to allow for disassembly without breaking the pneumatic connections. Component

Material

Approvals

Pneumatic Actuator

Brass


1 7/8 IN. (4.8 cm)

001391


Pneumatic Actuator



715-735-7411

Form No. F-90133-1


Litho in U.S.A.

ANSUL




Discharge Nozzle – Type “D”

Description The type ‘‘D’’ nozzle is used primarily for local application and is also listed and approved for use as a total flooding nozzle. The nozzle shell is drawn sheet steel and the insert is brass. The ‘‘D’’ type nozzle is available in orifice sizes ranging from 1 through 7. The discharge rate of the nozzle depends on the orifice size and nozzle pressure. The area covered in local application is dependent upon

the discharge rate and the height of the nozzle above the surface being protected. Height range: 15 to 91 1/2 in. (38 to 232 cm). Discharge rate: 11 to 48.5 lbs. per minute (5 to 22 kg per minute). See carbon dioxide design manual for UL and FM listed area coverage and required flow rates. The nozzle is painted red with chrome or nickel plating available as an option.

Component

Material

Thread Size/Type

Orifice Size

Approvals

Type ‘‘D’’ nozzle

Shell: Steel Insert: Brass Strainer: Monel

1/2 in. NPT Female

1 through 7



Description

Orifice Code

426100 426101 426301

Type ‘‘D’’ nozzle with strainer Type ‘‘D’’ nozzle Type ‘‘D’’ nozzle, Chrome Plated

1–3 3.5 – 7 3.5 – 7

NOTE: When ordering, specify orifice code required: Example – Part No. 426100 – 2.5.

1-11

Carbon Dioxide Type ‘‘D’’ Discharge Nozzle

1/2 IN. NPT

NOZZLE CODE STAMPED HERE

BRASS NOZZLE INSERT

ORIFICE

DRAWN STEEL

2 IN. (5 cm) DIAMETER

3 15/32 IN. (8.8 cm)

2 1/2 IN. (6.3 cm) DIAMETER

4 IN. (10.1 cm)

000672a

000672b

Carbon Dioxide Type ‘‘D’’ Discharge Nozzle with Strainer

1/2 IN. NPT NOZZLE CODE STAMPED HERE

STRAINER

DRAWN STEEL

BRASS NOZZLE INSERT

ORIFICE

2 IN. (5 cm) DIAMETER


3 15/32 IN. (8.8 cm)

4 IN. (10.1 cm)

000671a

000671b



715-735-7411

Form No. F-90216-1


Litho in U.S.A.

ANSUL




Discharge Nozzle – Type “D” (Corrosion Resistant) Description The corrosion resistant (CR) type “D” nozzle is used primarily for local application wet bench protection but is also approved for use as a total flooding nozzle. The nozzle shell is drawn sheet steel and the insert is stainless steel. The entire nozzle is coated with a corrosion resistant material which is not effected by the acid type environment of a typical wet bench hazard. The CR “D” type nozzle is available in orifice sizes ranging from 1 through 7. Nozzle shipping assembly includes a blow off cap. Cap should be installed using special tool, Part No. 426206.

tubing can be attached to this to cover the discharge piping within the corrosive environment. The discharge rate of the nozzle depends on the orifice size and nozzle pressure. The area covered in local application is dependent upon the discharge rate and the height of the nozzle above the surface being protected. Height range: 24 to 33 in. (61 to 84 cm). Discharge rate: 16.4 to 21.8 lbs. per minute (7.4 to 9.9 kg per minute). See carbon dioxide design manual for FM listed area coverage and required flow rates

Also available is a plastic nozzle tube adaptor which can be threaded on the external nozzle threads and plastic Component

Material

Thread Size/Type

Orifice Size

Approvals

Type “D” nozzle

Shell: Steel

1/2 in. NPT Female

1 through 7

FM Approved*

Insert: Stainless Steel Strainer: Monel Assembly coated with acid resistant material (Halar® ECTFE) Blow Off Cap

Teflon® (TFE)


Description

Orifice Code

422647 422648 422649 422650 422651

Type “D” nozzle with strainer Type “D” nozzle with strainer Type “D” nozzle with strainer Type “D” nozzle with strainer Type “D” nozzle with strainer

1 1+ 2 2+ 3

422652 422653 422654 422655 422656 422657 422658 422659

Type “D” nozzle Type “D” nozzle Type “D” nozzle Type “D” nozzle Type “D” nozzle Type “D” nozzle Type “D” nozzle Type “D” nozzle

3+ 4 4+ 5 5+ 6 6+ 7

422780 423256 426206

Nozzle Tube Adaptor Spare Blow Off Cap (1) Cap Installation Tool

1-16 UN 2A EXTERNAL THREAD

1/2 IN. FEMALE NPT

4 IN. (10.2 cm)

LOCATION OF ORIFICE SIZE STAMPING

BLOW OFF CAP

2 1/2 IN. DIA. (6.3 cm) 001538

NOTE: For non-typical wet bench environments, contact Ansul Technical Services Department. *FM APPROVAL limited to non-corrosive environments.

ANSUL is a registered trademark, Halar is a registered trademark of Ausimont, Teflon is a registered trademark of DuPont. 1-11.1 ANSUL INCORPORATED, ONE STANTON STREET, MARINETTE, WI 54143-2542

715-735-7411

Form No. F-96156


Litho in U.S.A.

ANSUL




Sealed Nozzle With Strainer

Description The sealed nozzle is used primarily in ducts and enclosed machinery spaces. The seal portion of the nozzle is a combination line seal and strainer unit. It is used to prevent dirt or vapors from entering the system piping and also to function as a strainer for the system piping. On operation of the carbon dioxide system, the high pressure of the gas released from the cylinders ruptures the thin

sealing disc, allowing an unobstructed flow of gas to the internal discharge nozzle. The advantage of the sealed nozzle is that it does not require disassembly of the system piping to clean the strainer or replace a ruptured sealing disc. This is accomplished by removing the hex cap on the nozzle.

Component

Material

Thread Size/Type

Orifice Size

Approvals

Sealed Nozzle

Body: Brass Strainer: Monel

1/2 in. NPT Female

2 through 7



Description

426102

Sealed nozzle with strainer

Orifice Code 2– 7


CELERON WASHER

3 1/4 IN. (8.3 cm)

NOZZLE

JAM NUT TO BE USED IF DUCT IS TOO THIN TO BE THREADED SEALING DISC

HEX CAP 2 IN. (5.1 cm)

SPARE SEALING DISCS BODY 1/2 IN. NPT INLET

KNURLED MONEL SCREEN – RING STRAINER SEALING DISC RETAINER

1/2 IN. STRAIGHT PIPE THREAD

000673



715-735-7411

Form No. F-90217-1


Litho in U.S.A.

ANSUL




Bulkhead Mounting Flange

Description The bulkhead mounting flange, Part No. 42806, is used on the multi-discharge type nozzles. The flange allows the nozzle to be rigidly fastened against a wall or bulkhead of a hazard area, keeping the nozzle outside of the area. This is an advantage on hazard areas where the nozzle cannot be mounted inside the area because of space limitations or interference with moving parts. A typical application is a large exhaust duct where access into the duct is limited.

Component

Material

Approvals

Mounting Flange

Steel


Also available is a sealing plug, Part No. 42293, which is shipped as a separate unit. Should a seal be required between the flange and the mounting surface, the fiber seal, Part No. 36550, is available.

CLAMPING SCREW

000670a

NOZZLE CLAMPING RING MOUNTING SCREWS (1/4 IN. – 20 x 5/8 IN. LONG)

BULKHEAD MOUNTING HOLE 4 1/2 IN. DIAMETER

LOCKWASHER AND NUT

PLUG SEAL (OPTIONAL) PART NO. 42293

RETAINING RING

ASSEMBLY OF MULTI-DISCHARGE NOZZLE WITH MOUNTING RINGS (BULKHEAD NOT SHOWN)

000670b

NOTE: When using mounting flange with a fiber seal, use retaining ring, Part No. 46793. ANSUL is a registered trademark. 1-13 ANSUL INCORPORATED, ONE STANTON STREET, MARINETTE, WI 54143-2542

715-735-7411

Form No. F-90218


Litho in U.S.A.

ANSUL




Discharge Nozzle – Type “A”

Description The type ‘‘A’’ nozzle is used primarily for local application and is also listed and approved for use as a total flooding nozzle. The nozzle shell is drawn sheet steel and the insert is brass. The ‘‘A’’ type nozzle is available in orifice sizes ranging from 1 through 7. The discharge rate of the nozzle depends on the orifice size and nozzle pressure. The area covered in local application is dependent on the discharge rate of the height of the nozzle above the

surface being protected. Height range: 18 to 72 in. (46 to 183 cm). Discharge rate: 14 to 48.5 lbs. per minute (6 to 22 kg per minute). See carbon dioxide design manual for area coverage and required flow rates. The nozzle is painted red with chrome or nickel plating available as an option.

Component

Material

Thread Size/Type

Orifice Size

Approvals

Type ‘‘A’’ Nozzle

Shell: Steel Insert: Brass Strainer: Monel

1/2 in. NPT Female

1 through 7



Description

426103 426104

Type ‘‘A’’ nozzle with strainer Type ‘‘A’’ nozzle

Orifice Code 1–3 3.5 – 7


1-14

Carbon Dioxide Type ‘‘A’’ Discharge Nozzle with Strainer

NOZZLE CODE STAMPED HERE

STRAINER

1/2 IN. NPT

DRAWN STEEL

BRASS NOZZLE INSERT

ORIFICE



4 23/32 IN. (11.9 cm)

4 1/2 IN. (11.4 cm)

001829a

001829b

Carbon Dioxide Type ‘‘A’’ Discharge Nozzle

DRAWN STEEL NOZZLE CODE STAMPED HERE

1/2 IN. NPT

BRASS NOZZLE INSERT

ORIFICE



4 23/32 IN. (11.9 cm)

4 1/2 IN. (11.4 cm)

001830a

001830b



715-735-7411

Form No. F-90219-1


Litho in U.S.A.

ANSUL




Discharge Nozzle – Cone Type

Description The cone nozzle is used primarily for local application and also listed and approved for use as a total flooding nozzle. The nozzle insert is stainless steel and the body is sheet steel. The nozzle is available in orifice sizes ranging from 3 through 11. The discharge rate of the nozzle depends on the orifice size and nozzle pressure. The area covered in local application is dependent upon the discharge rate and the height above the surface being protected.

Height range: 42 to 108 in. (107 to 274 cm). Discharge rate: 21 to 132 lbs. per minute (10 to 60 kg per minute). See carbon dioxide design manual for area coverage and required flow rates. The nozzle is painted red with chrome or nickel plating available as an option.

Component

Material

Thread Size/Type

Orifice Size

Approvals

Cone nozzle

Shell: Steel Insert: Stainless Steel

1/2 in. NPT Female

3 through 11


Shipping Assembly Part No. Description

Orifice Code

426105

3 – 11

Cone nozzle

NOTE: When ordering, specify orifice code required: Example – Part No.426105 – 3.5.

9 1/4 IN. (23.4 cm)

4 13/16 IN. (12.2 cm) 001834



715-735-7411

Form No. F-90220-1


Litho in U.S.A.

ANSUL




Discharge Nozzle – 4 in. Multi-Discharge Type

Description The 4 in. multi-discharge nozzle is used only for total flooding applications. The nozzle insert is brass and the remainder of the nozzle is steel. The nozzle is available in orifice sizes ranging from 2 through 18. The dischargerate of the

nozzle depends on the orifice size and the nozzle pressure. The nozzle is painted red with chrome or nickel plating available as an option.

Component

Material

Thread Size/Type

Orifice Size

Approvals

4 in. MD Nozzle w/Strainer

Nozzle: Steel Insert: Brass

1/2 in. NPT Female

2 through 4.5


4 in. MD Nozzle


1/2 in. NPT Female

5 through 10


4 in. MDL Nozzle


3/4 in. NPT Female

8 through 18



Description

426106 426107 426108

4 in MD nozzle with strainer 4 in MD nozzle 4 in MD nozzle

Orifice Code 2 – 4.5 5 – 10 8 – 18


1-16

Multi-Discharge Nozzle – 4 MD with Strainer BRASS NOZZLE INSERT CODE NO. OF ORIFICE STAMPED ON CONNECTOR

METAL HORN

1/2 IN. NPT

STRAINER 3 1/2 IN. (8.8 cm)

5 13/16 (13.1 cm) 001831a

001831b

Multi-Discharge Nozzle – 4 MD and 4 MDL BRASS NOZZLE INSERT CODE NO. OF ORIFICE STAMPED ON CONNECTOR

METAL HORN

1/2 IN. OR 3/4 IN. NPT (SEE TABLE)

3 1/2 IN. (8.8 cm)

5 13/16 (13.1 cm) 001835a

001835b



715-735-7411

Form No. F-90221-2


Litho in U.S.A.

ANSUL




Discharge Nozzle – 6 in. Multi-Discharge Type

Description The 6 in. multi-discharge nozzle is used primarily for local application and it is also listed and approved for use as a total flooding nozzle. The nozzle insert is brass and the remainder of the nozzle is steel. The nozzle is available in orifice sizes ranging from 2 through 18. The discharge rate of the nozzle depends on the orifice size and the nozzle pressure. The area covered in local application is dependent upon the discharge rate and the height above

the surface being protected. Height range: 36 to 144 in. (91 to 366 cm). Discharge rate: 28.5 to 108 lbs. per minute (13 to 49 kg per minute). See carbon dioxide design manual for area coverage and required flow rates. The nozzle is painted red with chrome and nickel plating available as an option.

Component

Material

Thread Size/Type

Orifice Size

Approvals

6 in. MD Nozzle w/Strainer


1/2 in. NPT Female

2 through 4.5


6 in. MD Nozzle


1/2 in. NPT Female

5 through 10


6 in. MDL Nozzle


3/4 in. NPT Female

8 through 18



Description

426109 426110 426111

6 in MD nozzle with strainer 6 in MD nozzle 6 in MDL nozzle

Orifice Code 2 – 4.5 5 – 10 8 – 18


1-17

Multi-Discharge Nozzle – 6 MD with Strainer BRASS NOZZLE INSERT

DRAWN STEEL HORN

CODE NO. OF ORIFICE STAMPED ON CONNECTOR 1/2 IN. NPT

STRAINER 3 1/2 IN. (8.8 cm)

7 3/4 IN. (19.6 cm)

000737b

000737a

Multi-Discharge Nozzle – 6 MD and 6 MDL DRAWN STEEL HORN

BRASS NOZZLE INSERT CODE NO. OF ORIFICE STAMPED ON CONNECTOR 1/2 IN. OR 3/4 IN. NPT (SEE TABLE)

3 1/2 IN. (8.8 cm)

7 3/4 IN. (19.6 cm)

000669b

000669a



715-735-7411

Form No. F-90222-1


Litho in U.S.A.

ANSUL




Discharge Nozzle – Regular Type

Description The regular type nozzle is used for total flooding applications only. The nozzle is available in seven different configurations: regular (1/2 in.), regular RL (3/4 in.), regular sealed with strainer, regular sealed, regular sealed with flange and strainer, regular sealed with flange, and regular RSFL sealed with flange. The sealed type has a sealing disc retaining ring and a frangible seal to prevent foreign matter from entering and plugging the nozzle orifice. The discharge rate of the regular nozzle depends on nozzle

pressure and orifice size. The regular type nozzle provides orifice sizes of 1 through 18. The nozzle is available with 1/2 in. NPT threads for orifice sizes 1 through 12 and 3/4 in. NPT threads for orifice sized 8 through 18. Nozzles with orifices of 1 through 2+ are supplied with a strainer. The nozzle is supplied in natural brass with chrome or nickel plating available. Stainless steel nozzles are also available.

Component

Material

Thread Size/Type

Orifice Size

Approvals

Regular Type

Brass

1/2 in. NPT Male

3 through 12


Regular RL Type

Brass

3/4 in. NPT Male

8 through 18


Regular Sealed with Strainer

Nozzle: Brass Strainer: Monel

1/2 in. NPT Male

1 through 2.5


Regular Sealed

Brass

1/2 in. NPT Male

3 through 12


Regular Sealed with Nozzle: Flange and Strainer Brass Strainer: Monel Flange: Steel

1/2 in. NPT Male

1 through 2.5


Regular Sealed with Flange

Nozzle: Brass Flange: Steel

1/2 in. NPT Male

3 through 12


Regular RSFL Nozzle: Sealed with Flange Brass Flange: Steel

3/4 in. NPT Male

8 through 18


1-18


Description

426112 426113 426114 426115 426116 426117 426118 426299 426300

Regular type nozzle Regular RL type nozzle Regular sealed with strainer nozzle Regular sealed nozzle Regular sealed with flange and strainer nozzle Regular sealed with flange nozzle Regular RSFL sealed with flange nozzle Regular sealed with flange and strainer nozzle (stainless steel) Regular sealed with flange nozzle (stainless steel)

Orifice Code 3 – 12 8 – 18 1 – 2.5 3 – 12 1 – 2.5 3 – 12 8 – 18 1 – 2.5 3 – 12


Regular Type Nozzle – Brass

Regular Nozzle – Type RL

29/32 IN. (2.3 cm)

1 IN. (2.5 cm)

7/8 IN. HEX

1 1/8 IN. HEX

5/8 IN. (1.5 cm)

7/16 IN. (1.1 cm)

ORIFICE CODE NO. STAMPED ON HEX

1/2 IN. STANDARD PIPE THREAD

001836a

3/4 IN. STANDARD PIPE THREAD


001837b

001837a

001836b

Regular Type Sealed Nozzle With or Without Strainer

Regular Sealed Flanged Type Nozzle With or Without Strainer 3 IN. (7.6 cm)

1 1/2 IN. (3.8 cm)

1 1/8 IN. (2.8 cm)

FRANGIBLE SEALING DISC

1 5/8 IN. (4.1 cm)

2 1/2 IN. (6.3 cm)

STRAINER

1/2 IN. NPT

2 1/2 IN. (6.3 cm)

STRAINER

3 IN. (7.6 cm)

1 IN. CLEARANCE HOLE


7/16 IN. (1.1 cm) 1/2 IN. STANDARD PIPE THREAD

SELFTAPPING SCREW

SEAL

3/16 IN. MOUNTING HOLE 000667a

000666b

000666a

000667b

Regular Sealed Flanged Type Nozzle – Type RSFL 3 IN. (7.6 cm) 2 1/2 IN. (6.3 cm)

1 7/8 IN. (4.7 cm)

SELFTAPPING SCREW

3/4 IN. NPT

2 1/2 IN. (6.3 cm) 3 IN. (7.6 cm)

1 IN. CLEARANCE HOLE

SEAL

3/16 IN. MOUNTING HOLE 000668a

000668b

ANSUL is a registered trademark. ANSUL INCORPORATED, ONE STANTON STREET, MARINETTE, WI 54143-2542

715-735-7411

Form No. F-90223-1


Litho in U.S.A.

ANSUL




Discharge Nozzle – Baffle Type

Description The baffle type nozzle is used in total flood applications only. Placed around the outside edge or placed near the ceiling approximately 15 to 20 ft. (4.6 to 6.1 m) on centers in a room or any enclosed space, each nozzle provides a 180° fan spray of CO2, spreading the extinguishing gas quickly and efficiently throughout the protected

space. Discharge rate depends upon nozzle pressure and orifice size. Baffle type nozzles are available in orifice sizes 1 through 16. This nozzle is supplied in natural brass with chrome or nickel plating available as an option.

Component

Material

Thread Size/Type

Orifice Size

Approvals

Baffle Type with Strainer

Nozzle: Brass Strainer Monel

1/2 in. NPT Male

1 through 3


Baffle Type

Brass

1/2 in. NPT Male

3.5 through 14


Baffle Type BL

Brass

3/4 in. NPT Male

9 through 16



Description

426119 426120 426121

Baffle type with strainer nozzle Baffle type nozzle Baffle type BL nozzle

Orifice Code 1–3 3.5 – 14 9 – 16


1-19

Baffle Type Nozzle With or Without Strainer STRAINER (BAFFLE TYPE WITH STRAINER ONLY) FORGED BRASS BODY

1/2 IN. NPT

DISCHARGE ORIFICE ORIFICE SIZE STAMPED ON THIS SURFACE 2 5/8 IN. (6.6 cm)

1 3/4 IN. (4.4 cm)

000662a

000662b

Baffle Type BL Nozzle

3/4 IN. NPT

3 5/16 IN. (84 cm) 3 1/4 IN. (8.2 cm)

DISCHARGE ORIFICE

FORGED BRASS BODY

STAMPED NOZZLE CODE

2 1/4 IN. (5.7 cm)

000664a

000664b



715-735-7411

Form No. F-90224-2


Litho in U.S.A.

ANSUL




Cylinder Bracketing

Description The cylinder bracketing is designed to rigidly support the installed carbon dioxide cylinders. The bracketing components are constructed of heavy structual steel. Bracket assemblies are available in modules for two to six cylinders and can also be mated together for any combination over six. Bracketing can be assembled to support single row, double row or back-to-back rows of cylinders. Bracketing uprights and weigh rail supports are also available for weighing cylinders in place. Bracketing components are painted with a red enamel coating. Uprights and back frame assemblies can be bolted or welded together, which ever makes the installation more convenient. For weighing cylinders, a scale and lifting yoke is also available.

Component

Material

Approvals

Bracketing

Steel



Description

45120 45244 45121 45261 45122 45245 79638 79639 79640 79641 79642 73257 73553 73554 73555 73556 73256 79413 73250 73251 73252 73253 73254 73255 73266 73267 73268 73269 73270 73091 73092

50 lb. (22.7 kg) cylinder strap (single cylinder) 50 lb. (22.7 kg) cylinder channel with nuts and bolts (single cylinder) 75 lb. (34 kg) cylinder strap (single cylinder) 75 lb. (34 kg) cylinder channel with nuts and bolts (single cylinder) 100 lb. (45.4 kg) cylinder strap (single cylinder) 100 lb. (45.4 kg) cylinder channel with nuts and bolts (single cylinder) Back frame assembly (2 cylinder) Back frame assembly (3 cylinder) Back frame assembly (4 cylinder) Back frame assembly (5 cylinder) Back frame assembly (6 cylinder) Upright (used either for right or left side) Single row or back-to-back row bracket foot (left side) Single row or back-to-back row bracket foot (right side) Double row bracket foot (left side) Double row bracket foot (right side) Center upright (required when weighing seven or more cylinders in a row) Connector (required to hook together back frames for seven or more cylinders) 10 in. (25.4 cm) carriage bolt with nut (for single row 50 lb. (22.7 kg) cylinders) 10.5 in (26.7 cm) carriage bolt with nut (for single row 75 lb. (34 kg) cylinders) 12 in. (30.5 cm) carriage bolt with nut (for single row 100 lb. (45.4 kg) cylinders) 20 in. (50.8 cm) carriage bolt with nut (for double row 50 lb. (22.7 kg) cylinders) 20.5 in. (52.1 cm) carriage bolt with nut (for double row 75 lb. (34 kg) cylinders) 25 in. (63.5 cm) carriage bolt with nut (for double row 100 lb. (45.4 kg) cylinders) Weigh rail (two cylinder) Weigh rail (three cylinder) Weigh rail (four cylinder) Weigh rail (five cylinder) Weigh rail (six cylinder) Cylinder clamp (2 cylinders) Cylinder clamp (3 cylinders 1-20


Description

71683 71682 71684 74241 69877

Weigh rail support (single row) Weigh rail support (double row) Weigh rail support (back-to-back) Scale Lifting yoke

WEIGH RAIL SUPPORT

UPRIGHT WEIGH RAIL

BACK FRAME

CYLINDER CLAMP

CARRIAGE BOLT WITH NUT

RIGHT BRACKET FOOT

LEFT BRACKET FOOT

0001838



715-735-7411

Form No. F-90183-1


Litho in U.S.A.

ANSUL




Nameplate – MAIN

Description The ‘‘MAIN’’ nameplate is available for labeling components and/or remote pull stations to distinguish them from reserve system components. The nameplate is furnished with four mounting holes for ease of installation.


Nameplate – MAIN

Component

Material

Mounting Hole Size

Approvals

Nameplate

Aluminum

13/64 in. (.52 cm)


5 1/2 IN. (13.9 cm) 5/16 IN. (.8 cm)

4 7/8 IN. (12.4 cm)

MAIN

2 1/2 IN. (6.4 cm) 1 7/8 IN. (4.7 cm)

PART NO. 41942

4 – 13/64 IN. (.5 cm) DIAMETER HOLES

000723



715-735-7411

Form No. F-90191


Litho in U.S.A.

ANSUL




Nameplate – RESERVE

Description The “RESERVE’’ nameplate is available for labeling components and/or remote pull stations to distinguish them from main system components. The nameplate is furnished with four mounting holes for ease of installation.


Nameplate – RESERVE

Component

Material

Mounting Hole Size

Approvals

Nameplate

Aluminum

13/64 in. (.52 cm)


5 1/2 IN. (13.9 cm) 5/16 IN. (.8 cm)

4 7/8 IN. (12.4 cm)

RESERVE

2 1/2 IN. (6.4 cm) 1 7/8 IN. (4.8 cm)

PART NO. 41943

4 – 13/64 IN. (.52 cm) DIAMETER HOLES

000723



715-735-7411

Form No. F-90190


Litho in U.S.A.

ANSUL




Nameplate – Maintenance

Description The maintenance nameplate is available for mounting near the system cylinders. This plate gives instructions for performing the semi-annual cylinder weighing requirements. The nameplate is furnished with four mounting holes for ease of installation.


Nameplate – maintenance

Component

Material

Mounting Hole Size

Approvals

Nameplate

Aluminum

5/32 in. (.40 cm)


5 3/4 IN. (14.6 cm) 3/16 IN. (.5 cm)

5 3/8 IN. (13.7 cm)

ANSUL CARBON DIOXIDE FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS WEIGH CYLINDERS EVERY SIX MONTHS AND RECORD ON CYLINDER RECORD TAG. IF WEIGHT OF CYLINDER IS LBS. ( kg) LESS THAN FULL WEIGHT STAMPED ON THE BODY OF CYLINDER VALVE OR ON NECK OF CYLINDER, RECHARGE. WHEN SHIPPING CYLINDER, BE SURE THAT OUTLET PLUG IS SCREWED INTO TOP OF CYLINDER VALVE AND SHIPPING CAP IS SCREWED ON TOP OF CYLINDER. BEFORE WEIGHING CYLINDERS, REMOVE RELEASE ATTACHMENTS FROM THE CONTROL CYLINDERS AND DISCONNECT THE FLEXIBLE DISCHARGE BEND FROM ALL CYLINDERS BEING WEIGHED. BE SURE THAT RELEASE ATTACHMENT IS IN SET POSITION WHEN REPLACING VALVE.

4 7/8 IN. (12.4 cm)

4 1/2 IN. (11.4 cm)

CARBON DIOXIDE GAS HMIS 1-0-0/VERY COLD DISCHARGE. CONTENTS UNDER HIGH PRESSURE. LISTED 295S

FOR DETAILS SEE INSTRUCTION BOOK.

ANSUL

®

ANSUL FIRE PROTECTION ONE STANTON STREET MARINETTE, WI 54143-2542 715-735-7411

®

Part No. 70449

000725



715-735-7411

Form No. F-90189


Litho in U.S.A.

ANSUL




Warning Plate – Outside Room Without Alarm

Description The warning plate is available for mounting outside the hazard area to warn personnel that the space is protected by a carbon dioxide system and no one should enter after a discharge without being properly protected. The warning plate is furnished with four mounting holes for ease of installation.


Warning plate – outside room without alarm

Component

Material

Mounting Hole Size

Approvals

Warning Plate

Stainless Steel

7/32 in. (.56 cm)


8 IN. (20.3 cm)

1/4 IN. (.63 cm)

7 1/2 IN. (19 cm)

WARNING THIS SPACE IS PROTECTED BY A CARBON DIOXIDE FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM. WHEN SYSTEM IS DISCHARGED, DO NOT ENTER WITHOUT APPROVED SELF-CONTAINED BREATHING APPARATUS OR UNTIL VENTILATION HAS BEEN OPERATED FOR AT LEAST 15 MINUTES.

5 IN. (12.7 cm)

4 1/2 IN. (11.4 cm)

Part No. 41905

000724



715-735-7411

Form No. F-90194


Litho in U.S.A.

ANSUL




Pressure Bleeder Plug – 1/4 in.

Description The pressure bleeder plug can be used to relieve the pressure in closed actuation lines. The plug relieves the pressure through a small 1/64 in. (0.4 mm) orifice. This slow relief of pressure does not affect the function of the actuation line.

1/64 IN. (0.4 mm) ORIFICE

Shipping Assembly Part No. Description 1/4 IN. NPT

42175

Pressure bleeder plug

001839b

Component

Material

Mounting Hole Size

Approvals

Bleeder Plug

Brass

1/4 in. NPT Male




715-735-7411

Form No. F-90196


Litho in U.S.A.

ANSUL




Warning Plate – Outside Room With Alarm

Description The warning plate is available for mounting outside the hazard area to warn personnel not to enter the room when the alarm is sounding. The warning plate is furnished with four mounting holes for ease of installation. The plate is constructed of BAKELITE engraving stock with a red finish.


Warning plate – outside room with alarm

Component

Material

Mounting Hole Size

Approvals

Warning Plate

BAKELITE Molded Plastic

7/32 in. (.56 cm)


8 IN. (2 cm)

WARNING DO NOT ENTER ROOM WHEN ALARM SOUNDS. CARBON DIOXIDE BEING RELEASED.

5 IN. (12.7 cm)

Part No. 41927

000727

ANSUL is a registered trademark and BAKELITE is a trademark of Union Carbide Corp.


715-735-7411

Form No. F-90193


Litho in U.S.A.

ANSUL




Warning Plate – Inside Room With Alarm

Description The warning plate is available for mounting inside the hazard area to warn the personnel to vacate the hazard area when the alarm sounds. The warning plate is furnished with four mounting holes for ease of installation. The plate is constructed of BAKELITE engraving stock with a red finish.


Warning plate – inside room with alarm

Component

Material

Mounting Hole Size

Approvals

Warning Plate

BAKELITE Molded Plastic

1/4 in. (.64 cm)


15 1/2 IN. (39.3 cm) 1/4 IN. (.63 cm)

15 IN. (38.1 cm)

WHEN ALARM SOUNDS VACATE AT ONCE CARBON DIOXIDE BEING RELEASED

5 IN. (12.7 cm) 4 1/2 IN. (11.4 cm)

Part No. 41925

000726



715-735-7411

Form No. F-90192


Litho in U.S.A.

ANSUL




Connecting Link

Description The connecting link is used to connect the lever releases located on the pilot cylinders together. When cable or manual actuation is required, all cylinders will actuate simultaneously. The connecting link can be used on CV90, MAX, or AP-8 Ansul carbon dioxide valves.


Connecting link

One size connecting link is available for all size cylinders. Component

Material

Approvals

Connecting Link

Steel

U.S. Coast Guard (162.038/7/0) UL (EX-2968)

000661a

PIVOT PIN

FLEXLOCK HEX NUT 15/16 IN. (24 mm)

14 1/4 IN. (36.2 cm)

3/4 IN. (19 mm)

000661c

001840



715-735-7411

Form No. F-90225


Litho in U.S.A.

ANSUL




Lever Release Actuator AP-8 Valve/Selector Valve

Description Lever Release Actuator: The manual lever release actuator can provide a manual means of agent cylinder actuation by direct manual actuation of its pull lever or cable actuation when used in conjunction with a remote manual pull station. In three or more cylinder systems, a connecting link is required to provide simultaneous actuation of both lever release actuators. Manual actuation is accomplished by pulling the valve hand lever. The lever design contains a forged mechanical detent which secures the lever in the open position when actuated.

system must provide the components necessary to meet the actuator lever traveling requirements of 7 in. (17.8 cm). Manual actuation for electric or pneumatic selector valves can be accomplished using these lever actuators.

Component

Material

Approvals

Lever Release Actuator

Brass With Stainless Steel Stem


Cable pull actuation is accomplished by using a remote manual pull station. The remote manual pull station


Description

42484 42485 42486

Lever release actuator (with handle and pin; for local control) Lever release actuator (with handle, no pin; for remote control) Lever release actuator (with no handle, no pin; for use with three or more cylinders)

HANDLE

HANDLE

ON R SE TO R U LEC LY476 O F /SE ON. 70 S NO -8 AP ALVEBEL V LA

PIN

ON R SE TO R U LEC LY 476 O N 70 E F /S S OL NO. -8 AP ALVE BE LA V

3 7/8 IN. (9.8 cm)

3 7/8 IN. (9.8 cm)

3 7/8 IN. (9.8 cm)

3 7/8 IN. (9.8 cm) DEPTH: 3 IN. (7.6 cm) 000897

DEPTH: 2 13/16 IN. (7.1 cm)

Part No. 42484

Part No. 42485

001393b

1-29

ON R SE TO R U EC LY 76 FO /SEL ON . 704 S L NO -8 AP ALVE BE LA V

3 7/8 IN. (9.8 cm)

3 7/8 IN. (9.8 cm) DEPTH: 1 13/16 IN. (4.6 cm)

Part No. 42486

001393b



715-735-7411

Form No. F-90226-1


Litho in U.S.A.

ANSUL




Selector Valves

Description Selector valves are used to direct the flow of carbon dioxide into a single hazard of a multiple hazard system. This series of valves comes equipped with a pressure actuator attached to the top of the valve. To this actuator, a 1/4 in. pressure line can be connected from a cartridge receiver in the detection panel which will supply the required pressure to operate the selector valve. Or, to this actuator, an adaptor, Part No. 426674, can be attached to accommodate a CV-98 electric actuator, Part No. 423684. The adaptor and electric actuator are part of the selector valve electric actuation kit, Part No. 426893.

The Selector Valve Electric Actuation Kit, Part No. 426893, must be purchased separately to provide electric actuation to the selector valve. The selector valve can also be operated manually, by the use of a hand lever attached to the top of the CV-98 electric actuator or by means of a remote manual pull which will operate the hand lever remotely. The valves are available in sizes ranging from 1/2 in. to 4 in. For manual actuation, three types of lever actuators are available.

NOTE: Pneumatic actuation cannot be used if the selector valve has an electric actuator attached. Component

Material Thread Size/Type

Approvals

Equivalent Length

Selector Valve (1/2 in.)

Brass

1/2 in. NPT Female


9.0 ft. (2.7 m) Sch. 40 5.0 ft. (1.5 m) Sch. 80


Brass

3/4 in. NPT Female


23.0 ft. (7.0 m) Sch. 40 14.0 ft. (4.3 m) Sch. 80

Selector Valve (1 in.)

Brass

1 in. NPT Female


18 ft. (5.5 m) Sch. 80

Selector Valve (1 1/4 in.)

Brass

1 1/4 in. NPT Female


27.0 ft. (8.3 m) Sch. 80


Brass



61.0 ft. (18.6 m) Sch. 80

Selector Valve (2 in., 2 1/2 in., 3 in.)

Ductile Iron

3 in. Flange – 600 lb. American Standard Raised Face


2 in. – 10 ft. (3.1 m) Sch. 80 2 1/2 in. – 25 ft. (7.6 m) Sch. 80 3 in. – 72 ft. (21.9 m) Sch. 80


Ductile Iron



111 ft. (33.8 m) Sch. 80

NOTE: These selector valves latch open upon actuation. They must be manually reset by pulling out the reset knob on the side of the pressure actuator. If the valve is not reset, it will not operate properly the next time it is used.

1-30

Shipping Assembly Part No. 57428 57429 57430 57431 57432 57433 57445 42484 42486 423309 423311 423310 426893 42402

Description 1/2 in. selector valve 3/4 in. selector valve 1 in. selector valve 1 1/4 in. selector valve 1 1/2 in. selector valve 2 in., 2 1/2 in., 3 in. selector valve 4 in. selector valve Lever release (with handle and pin for local control for attaching directly to selector valve) – order separately Lever release (no handle, no pin for remote control for attaching directly to selector valve) – order separately Manual cable-pull actuator (handle and pin; for local control on electric actuator) – order separately Manual cable-pull actuator (no handle, no pin; for remote control of electric actuator) – order separately Manual cable-pull actuator (handle, no pin; for remote control of electric actuator) – order separately Electric actuator kit Brass Cap

NOTE: A lever actuator, brass cap, or CV-98 electric actuator, must be used with each selector valve. Valve will not operate properly without one of these on top of pressure actuator assembly.

1 1/4 – 18 THREAD

PRESSURE ACTUATOR ASSEMBLY

D

C

003549

A

IF FLANGED A

B

A

B

C

D

Valve Size

Body

in.

(cm)

in.

(cm)

in.

(cm)

in.

(cm)

1/2 in. 3/4 in. 1 in. 1 1/4 in. 1 1/2 in. 2 in. 2 1/2 in. 3 in. 4 in.

Threaded Threaded Threaded Threaded Threaded Flanged Flanged Flanged Flanged

4 3/4 4 3/4 4 3/4 5 3/4 5 3/4 13 13 13 16

(12) (12) (12) (14.6) (14.6) (33) (33) (33) (40.6)

6 15/16 6 15/16 6 15/16 6 15/16 6 15/16 5 3/4 5 3/4 5 3/4 5 3/4

(17.6) (17.6) (17.6) (17.6) (17.6) (14.6) (14.6) (14.6) (14.6)

2 3/4 2 3/4 2 3/4 3 1/8 3 1/8 6 1/8 6 1/8 6 1/8 8 3/4

(6.9) (6.9) (6.9) (7.9) (7.9) (15.5) (15.5) (15.5) (22.2)

11.63 11.63 11.63 12.50 12.50 16.25 16.25 16.25 19.88

(29.5) (29.5) (29.5) (31.8) (31.8) (41.3) (41.3) (41.3) (50.5)


715-735-7411

Form No. F-90208-1


Litho in U.S.A.

ANSUL




Selector Valves with Electric Solenoid Actuator

Description Selector valves are used to direct the flow of carbon dioxide into a single hazard of a multiple hazard system. This series of valves come equipped with an electric solenoid actuator attached to the valve. Electrical actuation of the selector valve is accomplished by the electric solenoid valve interfaced through an AUTOPULSE Control System. The selector valve can also be operated manually, either by the use of the hand lever attached to the pressure actuator

located on top of the valve or by means of a remote manual pull box which will operate the hand lever remotely. The valves are available in sizes ranging from 1/2 in. to 4 in. For local manual actuation, lever release Part No. 42484, is available with a locking pin which must be disengaged prior to the valve being operated manually.

Component

Material

Thread Size/Type

Approvals


Brass

1/2 in. NPT Female

UL (EX-2968), FMRC


Brass

3/4 in. NPT Female

UL (EX-2968), FMRC


Brass

1 in. NPT Female

UL (EX-2968), FMRC


Brass


UL (EX-2968), FMRC


Brass


UL (EX-2968), FMRC


Ductile Iron


UL (EX-2968), FMRC


Ductile Iron


UL (EX-2968), FMRC

1-30.1


Description

415221 415222 415223 415224 415225 415226 415227 42484 42486

1/2 in. selector valve with electric solenoid actuator 3/4 in. selector valve with electric solenoid actuator 1 in. selector valve with electric solenoid actuator 1 1/4 in. selector valve with electric solenoid actuator 1 1/2 in. selector valve with electric solenoid actuator 2 in., 2 1/2 in., 3 in. selector valve with electric solenoid actuator 4 in. selector valve with electric solenoid actuator Lever release (with handle and pin for local control) Lever release (no handle, no pin for remote control)

CLOSED POSITION OPEN POSITION HAND LEVER

LOCKING PIN

ACTUATOR NAMEPLATE RESET KNOB E D

AIR VENT

SOLENOID VALVE

C

A A IF FLANGED B 001431

A

B

C

Valve Size Body

in.

(cm)

in.

(cm)

in.

1/2 in. 3/4 in. 1 in. 1 1/4 in. 1 1/2 in . 2 in. 2 1/2 in. 3 in. 4 in.

4 3/4 4 3/4 4 3/4 5 3/4 5 3/4 13 13 13 16

(12) (12) (12) (14.6) (14.6) (33) (33) (33) (40.6)

6 15/16 6 15/16 6 15/16 6 15/16 6 15/16 5 3/4 5 3/4 5 3/4 5 3/4

(17.6) (17.6) (17.6) (17.6) (17.6) (14.6) (14.6) (14 6) (14.6)

2 3/4 2 3/4 2 3/4 3 1/8 3 1/8 6 1/8 6 1/8 6 1/8 8 1/4


D (cm) (6.9) (6.9) (6.9) (7.9) (7.9) (15.5) (15.5) (15.5) (20.9)

E

in.

(cm)

in.

(cm)

15 15 15 15 7/8 15 7/8 19 5/8 19 5/8 19 5/8 22 5/8

(38.1) (38.1) (38.1) (40.3) (40.3) (49.8) (49.8) (49.8) (57.4)

16 9/16 16 9/16 16 9/16 17 7/16 17 7/16 21 1/4 21 1/4 21 1/4 24 1/4

(42) (42) (42) (44.2) (44.2) (53.9) (53.9) (53.9) (61.5)



715-735-7411

Form No. F-91139-1


Litho in U.S.A.

ANSUL




Selector Valves with Lever Actuator

Description Selector valves with manual lever actuators are used to direct the flow of carbon dioxide into a single hazard of a multiple hazard system. The valve can be operated manually, either by the use of the hand lever attached directly to the top of the valve or by means of a remote manual pull box which will operate the hand lever remotely. The valves

are available in sizes ranging from 1/2 in. to 4 in. Lever releases, Part Nos. 45650 and 45667, are the only actuators approved for use with these valves. For strictly local manual actuation, lever release Part No. 45650, is available with a locking pin which must be disengaged prior to valve operating.

Component

Material

Thread Size/Type

Approvals


Brass

1/2 in. NPT Female



Brass

3/4 in. NPT Female



Brass

1 in. NPT Female



Brass




Brass




Ductile Iron




Ductile Iron




Description

43348 46386 43349 43350 43351 46194 46201 45650 45667

1/2 in. selector valve 3/4 in. selector valve 1 in. selector valve 1 1/4 in. selector valve 1 1/2 in. selector valve 2 in., 2 1/2 in., 3 in. selector valve 4 in. selector valve Lever release (with handle and pin for local control) Lever release (no handle, no pin for remote control) 1-32

OPEN POSITION

CLOSED POSITION HAND LEVER PART NO. 45650 OR PART NO. 45667 LOCKING PIN CHAIN

E B

D

AIR VENT PIPE

C

A A IF FLANGED 001429

A

B

C

D

E

Valve Size Body

in.

(cm)

in.

(cm)

in.

(cm)

in.

(cm)

in.

(cm)

1/2 in. 3/4 in. 1 in. 1 1/4 in. 1 1/2 in . 2 in. 2 1/2 in. 3 in. 4 in.

4 3/4 4 3/4 4 3/4 5 3/4 5 3/4 13 13 13 16

(12) (12) (12) (14.6) (14.6) (33) (33) (33) (40.6)

6 11/16 6 11/16 6 11/16 6 15/16 6 15/16 5 3/4 5 3/4 5 3/4 5 3/4

(16.9) (16.9) (16.9) (17.6) (17.6) (14.6) (14.6) (14.6) (14.6)

2 3/4 2 3/4 2 3/4 3 1/8 3 1/8 6 1/8 6 1/8 6 1/8 8 1/4

(6.9) (6.9) (6.9) (7.9) (7.9) (15.5) (15.5) (15.5) (20.9)

12 11/16 12 11/16 12 11/16 13 11/16 13 11/16 19 5/8 19 5/8 19 5/8 22 5/8

(32.2) (32.2) (32.2) (34.7) (34.7) (49.8) (49.8) (49.8) (57.4)

14 11/16 14 11/16 14 11/16 15 1/16 15 1/16 21 1/4 21 1/4 21 1/4 24 1/4

(37.3) (37.3) (37.3) (38.2) (38.2) (53.9) (53.9) (53.9) (61.5)




715-735-7411

Form No. F-90210-1


Litho in U.S.A.

ANSUL




Direction/Stop Valves

Description Direction/stop valves are used to either manually control the flow of carbon dioxide into a hazard area or to manually control the flow into one of several hazards being protected by a common bank of carbon dioxide cylinders. These valves are operated manually, either by the use of a hand lever attached directly to the valve or by means of a remote manual pull box which will operate a sector

attached to the valve. Direction/stop valves can be used as a safety feature, keeping the flow of carbon dioxide from entering a hazard area, either because of a false discharge or to allow the occupants enough time to exit the area prior to the valve being manually opened. The valves are available in sizes ranging from 1/2 in. to 1 1/2 in. Each size can be used with a hand lever or a sector.

Component

Material

Thread Size/Type

Approvals

Direction/Stop Valve

Forged Brass

1/2 in. NPT Female



Forged Brass

3/4 in. NPT Female



Forged Brass

1 in. NPT Female



Forged Brass




Forged Brass




Description

41451 41102 41354 41338 41424 40248 40267 46393 40238 40239 40259 40276 40279 40281

1/2 in. direction/stop valve (valve only) 3/4 in. direction/stop valve (valve only) 1 in. direction/stop valve (valve only) 1 1/4 in. direction/stop valve (valve only) 1 1/2 in. direction/stop valve (valve only) Handle – normally open (for use with 1/2 in. valve) Handle – normally open (for use with 3/4 in. and 1 in. valves) Handle – normally open (for use with 1 1/4 in. and 1 1/2 in. valves) Handle – normally closed (for use with 1/2 in. valve) Handle – normally closed (for use with 3/4 in. and 1 in. valves) Handle – normally closed (for use with 1 1/4 in. and 1 1/2 in. valves) Sector (for use with 1/2 in. valve) Sector (for use with 3/4 in. and 1 in. valves) Sector (For use with 1 1/4 in. and 1 1/2 in. valves) 1-33

C D PIPE HANDLE IN NORMALLY CLOSED POSITION

HANDLE IN OPEN POSITION

B E

*THIS DIMENSION WITH VALVE IN OPEN POSITION

A 001427a

001427b

A

B

C

D

E

Valve Size

in.

(cm)

in.

(cm)

in.

(cm)

in.

(cm)

in.

(cm)

1/2 in. 3/4 in. 1 in. 1 1/4 in. 1 1/2 in.

10 14 14 17 17

(25.4) (35.5) (35.5) (43.1) (43.1)

9 3/8 12 3/4 12 3/4 15 5/8 15 5/8

(23.8) (32.3) (32.3) (39.6) (39.6)

4 3/4 5 5/8 6 3/8 7 7/8 8 1/4

(12) (14.2) (16.1) (20) (20.9)

7/8 1 1/8 1 7/16 1 11/16 1 7/8

(2.2) (2.8) (3.6) (4.2) (4.7)

2 15/16 3 5/8 4 1/8 5 5 1/2

(7.4) (9.2) (10.4) (12.7) (13.9)

4 3/4 IN. (12 cm)

1/2 IN. STAINLESS STEEL OR MONEL CABLE TO PULL BOX

A

3/4 IN. FLARED END FITTING CABLE TO HAVE A SLIGHT SLACK WHEN VALVE IS IN CLOSED POSITION B CABLE CLAMP

ATTACH CABLE IN “FIGURE 8 (LOOP)” BEFORE FASTENING CLAMP

C

3 3/8 IN. (8.5 cm) D

IN. 7 11/16 ) m (19.5 c

6 13/16 IN. (17.3 cm)

30°

PROVIDE A STOP FOR SECTOR AT THIS POINT 000674a

000674b

A Valve Size 1/2 in. 3/4 in. 1 in. 1 1/4 in. 1 1/2 in.

B

C

D

in.

(cm)

in.

(cm)

in.

(cm)

in.

(cm)

4 3/4 5 5/8 6 5/16 8 1/8 8 1/4

(12) (14.2) (16) (20.6) (20.9)

3 3 5/8 4 1/8 5 1/4 5 3/8

(7.6) (9.3) (10.4) (13.3) (13.6)

7/8 1 1/8 1 7/16 1 11/16 1 7/8

(2.2) (2.8) (3.6) (4.2) (4.7)

2 15/16 3 5/8 4 1/8 5 5 1/2

(7.4) (9.2) (10.4) (12.7) (13.9)



715-735-7411

Form No. F-90211-1


Litho in U.S.A.

ANSUL




Lock Handle Stop Valve The lock handle stop valve is a manually operated valve located in various locations of the piping system. The valve is used to inhibit the discharge of CO2 into an entire system or specific area of a system. The valve is equipped with a slide locking device to padlock the valve

in the closed position. Each valve is equipped with a monitoring switch to provide constant supervision of the valve at the control panel with contacts for the open and closed positions. Install warning sign, Part No. 428974, in easily visible location near valve.

C

B

E

D

000649

FLOW A

A Size 1/2” 3/4” 1” 1 1/4” 1 1/2” 2”

Part No. 428153 428154 428155 428156 428157 428158

in. 2.36 2.80 3.23 3.62 4.06 4.65

(mm) (60) (71) (82) (92) (103) (118)

in. 7.07 7.25 7.41 7.55 7.75 8.02

Dimensions B C (mm) in. (mm) (179) 6.56 (167) (184) 6.56 (167) (188) 6.56 (167) (192) 6.56 (167) (197) 6.56 (167) (204) 6.56 (167)

D in. 4.19 5.75 5.75 7.63 7.63 7.63

E (mm) (106) (146) (146) (194) (194) (194)

in. 2.3 2.3 2.3 2.3 2.3 2.3

(mm) (58) (58) (58) (58) (58) (58)

Weight lbs. (kg) 6 (2.7) 7 (3.2) 7 (3.2) 8 (3.6) 9 (4.1) 11 (5.0)

Depth: 6” (152 mm)

1-33.1

SWITCH 2 – OFF NORMAL INDICATES VALVE FULLY CLOSED

SWITCH 1 – OFF NORMAL INDICATES VALVE NOT FULLY OPENED

N.C.

RED N.C. N.O.

C.

C. N.O. WHITE

BLACK

SYSTEM CONTROL PANEL

(THIS CIRCUIT REQUIRED BY CODE)

RED SUPERVISORY RESISTOR

BLACK

(THIS CIRCUIT NOT REQUIRED BY CODE, BUT MAY BE REQUIRED BY CUSTOMER)

WHITE 004894

SWITCH 2

SWITCH 1

WHITE

RED

RED

BLACK

BLACK

WHITE BLACK

RED

BLACK

WHITE

TERMINAL BLOCK FACTORY WIRING FIELD WIRING

SUPERVISORY RESISTOR SUPERVISORY CIRCUIT

SUPERVISORY RESISTOR

{

CONNECTS TO SYSTEM CONTROL PANEL

004895

CARBON DIOXIDE SYSTEM LOCK-OUT VALVE VALVE MUST BE CLOSED AND LOCKED PRIOR TO ENTRY OF PROTECTED SPACE NOTIFY PROPER PERSONNEL PRIOR TO CLOSING VALVE (TROUBLE ALARM WILL SOUND) ALTERNATE FIRE PROTECTION MUST BE PROVIDED WHILE THIS VALVE IS CLOSED VALVE MUST BE RESET AFTER EXIT FROM PROTECTED SPACE TO RETURN PROTECTION AND ALARM SYSTEMS TO STAND-BY STATUS

WARNING CARBON DIOXIDE DOES NOT SUPPORT LIFE. FAILURE TO LOCK-OUT THE CARBON DIOXIDE SYSTEM BY CLOSING AND LOCKING THIS VALVE BEFORE ENTRY INTO THE PROTECTED SPACE MAY CAUSE INJURY OR DEATH IF THE SYSTEM ACTUATES. ANSUL INCORPORATED, ONE STANTON STREET, MARINETTE, WI 54143-2542

LABEL NO. 428974


715-735-7411

Form No. F-2001045


Litho in U.S.A.

ANSUL




Manual Pull Box

Description The pull box on a carbon dioxide system is used to provide mechanical release of the system or directional valve from a manually operated remote station. Two types of pull boxes are available. The latched door type has a solid cast brass door which must be opened to reach the pull handle. The second type has a break glass window and a spring mounted handle which rotates forward for use when the glass is broken. A 3/8 in. female NPT opening is provided at the back of each enclosure for connection of the cable housing. Both types are painted red. A pulley elbow may be attached directly to the back of the pull box, if necessary, to provide immediate changes in pull cable direction. With this option, the pull box can be extended an additional 3 1/2 in. from the mounting surface by using support legs attached to the back of the pull box (one set for latched door type, two sets for break-glass type).

Component

Material

Approvals

Latch door pull box

Brass


Break glass window pull box

Brass


Shipping Assembly Part No. Description 45062 41527 41542

Latch door type pull box Break-glass window pull box Support legs

Manual Pull Box Latched Door Type LEAD AND WIRE SEAL – BROKEN SIMULTANEOUSLY WHEN KNOB IS PULLED

KNOB TO OPEN PULL BOX DOOR 4 3/16 IN. (10.6 cm) HINGED DOOR (CAST BRONZE – PAINTED RED)

MOISTURE-PROOF JOINT 3/4 IN. NPT

PULL HANDLE (BRASS)

STAINLESS STEEL PULL CABLE

FOR FIRE

3/8 IN. PIPE FOR ENCLOSING PULL CABLE

OPEN DOOR

4 1/8 IN. (10.4 cm)

PULL HANDLE HARD

1 7/16 IN. (3.7 cm) BODY (CAST BRONZE – PAINTED RED) 000684a

1 15/16 IN. (4.9 cm)

000684b

1-34

Manual Pull Box Break Glass Type “A” 4 7/16 IN. (11.2 cm)

2 13/16 IN. (7.1 cm)

3 1/4 IN. (8.2 cm)

SPRING FORCES HANDLE OUT INTO OPERATING POSITION WHEN GLASS IS BROKEN

PROTECTED HAZARD ENGRAVED IN NAMEPLATE (SPECIFY) 4 – 3/16 IN. MOUNTING HOLES

MOISTURE PROOF JOINT

PULL HANDLE

3/8 IN. PIPE TO ENCLOSE PULL CABLE

4 7/8 IN. (12.3 cm) GLASS FRONT

3/8 IN. STAINLESS STEEL PULL CABLE

3 IN. (7.6 cm) IN CASE OF FIRE BREAK GLASS AND PULL HANDLE HARD UNTIL RED PAINT MARK ON CABLE SHOWS

CAST BRASS HINGED COVER (PAINTED RED)

STOWAGE SPACE FOR SPARE DISC AND WASHERS

BRASS HAMMER AND CHAIN SECURED TO BOX

CAST BRASS BODY (PAINTED RED)

000676a

000676b



715-735-7411

Form No. F-90213


Litho in U.S.A.

ANSUL




Corner Pulley

Description The corner pulley is required on a carbon dioxide system whenever a mechanical release pull cable run involves a change in direction. Corner pulleys are installed as part of the cable housing (pipe or conduit) and provide 90° direction changes with minimal force loss and no induced kinking. Two types of corner pulleys are available. One is made of die cast aluminum, has a ball bearing roller, and uses compression fittings for 1/2 in. EMT connections. The second

type is made of forged brass and is threaded for 3/8 in. NPT pipe. Two styles of forged brass corner pulleys are available: one with a brass wheel and one with a nylon wheel. Both styles of brass pulleys are watertight. The brass wheel corner pulley is designed for location inside or outside the protected space. The nylon wheel corner pulley is designed for location only outside the hazard space. Thread adaptors are available to simplify the installation.

Component

Material

Thread Size/Type

Approvals

Corner Pulley

Body: Aluminum Roller: Stainless Steel

1/2 in. EMT


Corner Pulley

Body: Brass Wheel: Brass

3/8 in. NPT


Corner Pulley

Body: Brass Wheel: Nylon

3/8 in. NPT



Description

45771 42678 45515 40696 40696

Aluminum corner pulley Brass corner pulley (nylon wheel) Brass corner pulley (brass wheel) Thread adaptor – Right/left hand (brass pulley only) Thread adaptor – Right/left hand (brass pulley only)

1-35

Corner Pulley For 1/2” EMT Aluminum, Part No. 45771

Forged Brass Watertight Corner Pulley, Sheave Type, Part No. 42678 and 45515 2 11/16 IN. (1.7 cm)

SELF TAPPING SCREW

1 5/32 IN. (2.9 cm)

COVER

1 1/8 IN. (2.8 cm)

3/8 IN. NPT

BALL BEARING SHEAVE 3/8 IN. PIPE REMOVABLE FACE FOR RUNNING CABLE

BODY

2 7/8 IN. (7.3 cm)

4 3/16 IN. (10.6 cm)

LEAD-CLAD COPPER GASKET

A

GLAND

A

2 7/8 IN. (7.3 cm)

RIGHT AND LEFT HAND ADAPTOR SUPPLIED WHEN REQUIRED

000690a

000690b

001815b

001815c

001815a



715-735-7411

Form No. F-90214


Litho in U.S.A.

ANSUL




Check Valves

Description Check valves are used in main/reserve systems and on systems protecting multiple hazards of different volumes using selector valves to control the direction of agent flow. On main/reserve systems the check valve prevents pressurization of the reserve system manifold by blocking the flow of carbon dioxide from the main system. The check valve allows gas flow from the reserve (if actuated) to pass through into the distribution piping. On selector valve systems, the check valve prevents the cylinders from the selected hazard from pressurizing the manifold of the

cylinders required for protecting a larger hazard. Only the cylinders needed for the particular hazard are activated. The check valves are available in sizes from 1/2 in. through 3 in. Three body styles are available: threaded, weld neck flange, and threaded flange. The weld neck flange style valves are supplied with two (2) 600 lb. weld neck, flat faced, forged steel flanges, complete with bolts, nuts and gaskets.

Component

Material

Thread Size/Type

Body Type

Approvals

Check Valve

Bronze

1/2 in. NPT Female

Threaded


Check Valve

Bronze

3/4 in. NPT Female

Threaded


Check Valve

Bronze

1 in. NPT Female

Threaded


Check Valve

Bronze


Threaded


Check Valve

Bronze


Threaded


Check Valve

Bronze

2 in. NPT Female

Threaded


Check Valve

Bronze


Threaded


1-36

Component

Material

Thread Size/Type

Body Type

Approvals

Check Valve

Body: Bronze Flange: Steel

N/A

2 in. Weld Neck Flange


Check Valve


N/A

2 1/2 in. Weld Neck Flange


Check Valve


N/A

3 in. Weld Neck Flange


Check Valve


3 in. NPT

Threaded Flange



Description

40860 40852 41470 41549 41463 40649 40656 40794 46095 40672 40665

1/2 in. check valve – threaded 3/4 in. check valve – threaded 1 in. check valve – threaded 1 1/4 in. check valve – threaded 1 1/2 in. check valve – threaded 2 in. check valve – threaded 2 1/2 in. check valve – threaded 2 in. check valve – weld neck flange 2 1/2 in. check valve – weld neck flange 3 in. check valve – weld neck flange 3 in. check valve – threaded flange

Check Valve - Threaded Dimension A Valve Size in. (cm) A

BONNET SPRING B CHECK

BODY

000679a

1/2 in. 3/4 in. 1 in. 1 1/4 in. 1 1/2 in. 2 in. 2 1/2 in.

3 3 5/8 4 1/8 5 5 1/2 6 1/2 8

(7.6) (9.2) (10.4) (12.7) (13.9) (16.5) (20.3)

Dimension B in. (cm) 2 5/8 3 1/8 3 3/4 4 1/2 5 1/8 5 3/4 6 3/4

(6.6) (7.9) (9.5) (11.4) (13) (14.6) (17.1)

Check Valve - Flanged Dimension A Valve Size in. (cm) A

2 in. 2 1/2 in. 3 in.

10 1/4 10 3/4 11 1/2


(26) (27.3) (29.2)

7 1/2 (19) 8 11/16 (22.1) 9 1/2 (24.1)

B

000683

Check Valve - Threaded Flange Valve Dimension A Dimension B Size in. (cm) in. (cm)

B A SPRING BONNET

3 in.

11 1/2 (29.2) 15

(38.1)

Dimension C in. (cm) 9 1/2

(24.1)

C

CHECK BODY 001817



715-735-7411

Form No. F-90215


Litho in U.S.A.

ANSUL




Cable with Swaged End Fitting

Description The 1/16 in. diameter cable is used to attach remote manual pull boxes to cylinder valves, pull equalizers, control boxes and selector valves. The cable is constructed of stranded, stainless steel wire. The cable is available in lengths of 50, 100, 150, and 200 ft. (15.2, 30.5, 45.7, and 60.9 m). The cable assemblies include a brass swaged end fitting for attaching to the remote pull box.

Component

Material

Approvals

Cable Assembly

Cable: Stainless Steel Swaged Fitting: Brass


Shipping Assembly Part No. Description 42104 42109 42113 42128

50 ft. (15.2 m) 1/16 in. (.16 cm) cable with swaged end fitting 100 ft. (30.5 m) 1/16 in. (.16 cm) cable with swaged end fitting 150 ft. (45.7 m) 1/16 in. (.16 cm) cable with swaged end fitting 200 ft. (60.9 m) 1/16 in. (.16 cm) cable with swaged end fitting

HANDLE SLOT IN COUPLING FOR INSTALLATION OF CABLE END FITTING CABLE END (BRASS)

COUPLING

STAINLESS STEEL CABLE WITH SWAGED CABLE END FOR PULL BOX, CABLE END HAVING RED PAINT MARK

000689b

000689a

NOTE: The strength of the end fitting exceeds the breaking point of the cable.



715-735-7411

Form No. F-90204


Litho in U.S.A.

ANSUL




Dual/Triple Control Boxes

Description The dual/triple control boxes allow manual actuation of a cylinder valve or a sector valve from two or three remote pull boxes. Two styles of control boxes are available. Part No. 42784 is 13 3/4 in. (34.9 cm) and Part No. 43166 is 20 3/4 in. (52.7 cm) long. Both styles can be used for cylinder valve actuation but only Part No. 43166 can be used for sector valve operation. The sector valve operation requires a longer cable travel which can only be accomplished by the longer control box. The inlet and outlet connections are threaded for 3/8 in. pipe. If 1/2 in. EMT conduit connections are required, adaptor Part No. 45780 is available.


Description

42784 43166

Dual/triple control box (short) Dual/triple control box (long)

Component

Material

Thread Size/Type

Approvals

Control Box (short)

Steel

3/8 in. NPT Female


Control Box (long)

Steel

3/8 in. NPT Female


Part No. 42784

13 3/4 IN. (34.9 cm) (OVERALL)

Part No. 42784 Junction Box (Shown Without Cover)

12 1/4 IN. (31.1 cm) CABLE – PULL TO CYLINDER RELEASE

DIRECTION OF PULL 5/8 IN. (1.5 cm)

3/8 IN. PIPE OR 1/2 IN. E.M.T.* 4 – 9/32 IN. (.71 cm) MOUNTING HOLES

REMOVEABLE COVER

CABLE CLAMP

CABLE PULL FROM PULL-BOXES

1/2 IN. (1.2 cm)

FLEXIBLE TRANSPARENT PROTECTION RING

1 IN. (2.5 cm)

1 7/8 IN. (4.7 cm)

11/16 IN. (1.7 cm)

2 3/4 IN. (6.9 cm) 3 1/4 IN. (8.2 cm)

End View 000685a

000685b

* Adaptors furnished for use with 1/2 in. EMT – Part No. 45780

1-38

Part No. 43166

20 3/4 IN. (52.7 cm) (OVERALL)

CABLE – PULL TO CYLINDER RELEASE

19 1/4 IN. (48.8 cm) CABLE CLAMP

REMOVEABLE COVER DIRECTION OF PULL 5/8 IN. (1.5 cm)

3/8 IN. PIPE OR 1/2 IN. E.M.T.* 4 – 9/32 IN. (.71 cm) MOUNTING HOLES

Part No. 43166 Junction Box (Shown Without Cover)

CABLE – PULL FROM PULL-BOXES

1/2 IN. (1.2 cm)


1 IN. (2.5 cm)

1 7/8 IN. (4.7 cm)

11/16 IN. (1.7 cm)

2 3/4 IN. (6.9 cm) 3 1/4 IN. (8.2 cm)

End View 000685b

000685a

* Adaptors furnished for use with 1/2 in. EMT – Part No. 45780



715-735-7411

Form No. F-90206


Litho in U.S.A.

ANSUL




Remote Cable Pull Equalizer

Description The remote cable pull equalizer is used in systems where manual actuation of the cylinder valve and operation of a selector valve must be accomplished at the same time. The pull equalizer is mounted in the remote pull station cable line. By pulling the remote pull box, the cable attached to the pull equalizer will pull the internal cable clamp in the pull equalizer which in turn will pull the cables attached to the cylinder valve and selector valve, causing them to operate. Two styles of pull equalizers are available. Part No. 42791 is 13 3/4 in. (34.9 cm) long and Part No. 43168 is 20 3/4 in. (52.7 cm). Only the longest equalizer, Part No. 43168, can be used for valves utilizing

sectors. The inlet and outlet connections are threaded for 3/8 in. pipe. If 1/2 in. EMT conduit connections are required, adaptor Part No. 45780 is available. Shipping Assembly Part No.

Description

42791

Remote cable pull equalizer (short)

43168

Remote cable pull equalizer (long)

Component

Material

Thread Size/Type

Approvals

Pull Equalizer (short)

Steel

3/8 in. NPT Female


Pull Equalizer (long)

Steel

3/8 in. NPT Female


Part No. 42791 13 3/4 IN. (34.9 cm) (OVERALL) 12 1/4 IN. (31.1 cm) CABLE CLAMP DIRECTION OF PULL

Part No. 42791 Equalizer Box (Shown Without Cover) REMOVABLE COVER

CABLE FROM CYLINDER AND VALVE RELEASES


4 – 9/32 IN. (.71 cm) MOUNTING HOLES

3/8 IN. PIPE OR 1/2 IN. E.M.T.*

1 7/8 IN. (4.7 cm) 11/16 IN. (1.7 cm)

CABLE TO PULL BOX 1 IN. (2.5 cm) 2 3/4 IN. (6.9 cm) 3 1/4 IN. (8.2 cm)

End View 000688a

000688b

* Adaptors furnished for use with 1/2 in. E.M.T. – Part No. 45780 1-39

Part No. 43168

20 3/4 IN. (52.7 cm) (OVERALL)

Part No. 43168 Equalizer Box (Shown Without Cover)

19 1/4 IN. (48.8 cm)

DIRECTION OF PULL

CABLE CLAMP

CABLE FROM CYLINDER AND VALVE RELEASES

REMOVABLE COVER

1 7/8 IN. (4.7 cm)

3/8 IN. PIPE OR 1/2 IN. E.M.T.*


11/16 IN. (1.7 cm) 1 IN. (2.5 cm)

CABLE TO PULL BOX

4 – 9/32 IN. (.71 cm) MOUNTING HOLES

2 3/4 IN. (6.9 cm) 3 1/4 IN. (8.2 cm)

End View 001844b

001844a

* Adaptors furnished for use with 1/2 in. E.M.T. – Part No. 45780



715-735-7411

Form No. F-90205


Litho in U.S.A.

ANSUL




Quartzoid Bulb Actuator

Description The Quartzoid Bulb Actuator (QBA-5) is a self-contained actuating device designed to be mounted directly in the hazard area.

of 100 ft. (30.5 m) of 1/8 in. pipe. The QBA-5 is available temperature ratings of 135, 175, and 250 °F (57, 79, and 121 °C).

It actuates the system pilot cylinder valves by releasing pressure when the hazard temperature reaches the fixed rating of the quartzoid bulb and causes it to break, releasing the pressure in the actuator. The pressure is routed to the carbon dioxide cylinders through a maximum

The QBA-5 is a rugged, completely self-contained actuating device, well suited for rough environments. The QBA-5 is available with or without a mounting bracket.

Component

Material

Thread Size/Type

Approvals

QBA-5 (135 °F) (57 °C)

Cylinder: Steel Valve: Brass

1/4 in. NPT Male


QBA-5 (175 °F) (79 °C)


1/4 in. NPT Male


QBA-5 (250° F) (121 °C)


1/4 in. NPT Male



Description

42267 42274 42276

QBA-5 – 135 °F (57 °C) with bracket QBA-5 – 175 °F (79 °C) with bracket QBA-5 – 250 °F (121 °C) with bracket

41893 41894 41895

QBA-5 – 135 °F (57 °C) without bracket QBA-5 – 175 °F (79 °C) without bracket QBA-5 – 121 °F (121 °C) without bracket

1-40

Component Dimensions Length: 10 in. (25.4 cm) Width: 2 7/8 in. (7.3 cm) Height: 3 3/4 in. (9.5 cm) 1/4 – 18 NPT OUTLET RELEASE MECHANISM 1/4 IN. X 1/8 IN. REDUCER NOT SUPPLIED

SAFETY RELIEF BURSTING DISC

BRACKET NAMEPLATE TEMPERATURE RATING STAMPED HERE

QUARTZOID BULB

NAMEPLATE

CARBON DIOXIDE CYLINDER

001400



715-735-7411

Form No. F-90203


Litho in U.S.A.

ANSUL




Pneumatic Time Delay

Description In some applications the system discharge must be delayed for a short time following actuation. This is usually in areas where it is necessary to evacuate personnel prior to carbon dioxide discharge. The time delay uses the carbon dioxide pressure to power the factory set delay mechanism. The time delay is installed in the discharge piping, either directly after the control (pilot) cylinder or

further along the piping. A manual release is incorporated on the time delay valve to allow instant override of the time delay. After the discharge is completed, pressure in the time delay slowly returns to normal and the time delay valve again closes. The length of time delay is factory set and is not adjustable. The time delay is available in delay settings of 10, 30 and 60 seconds.

Component

Material

Thread Size/Type

Approvals

Time Delay (10 second)

Valve: Brass Accumulator: Steel

3/4 in. NPT Female




3/4 in. NPT Female




3/4 in. NPT Female



Description

54170 54169 54168

10 second pneumatic time delay 30 second pneumatic time delay 60 second pneumatic time delay

3/4 IN. – 14 NPT BOTH SIDES

5 7/8 IN. (14.9 cm)

5 1/2 IN. (14 cm) 000699a

23 3/8 IN. (59.4 cm)

000699b

NOTICE: Delay time listed are at 70 °F (21 °C). Actual delay times may vary with ambient conditions and installation variations. ANSUL is a registered trademark. 1-41 ANSUL INCORPORATED, ONE STANTON STREET, MARINETTE, WI 54143-2542

715-735-7411

Form No. F-90207


Litho in U.S.A.

ANSUL




AP-8 Valve Enclosed Release Attachment with Flexible Connector

Description Enclosed Release Attachment: The enclosed release attachment is used for local/remote manual actuation of the AP-8 cylinder valve. The enclosed release is used in areas where sealed actuation cable is preferred, i.e., corrosive environments, areas subject to tampering. The enclosed release consists of a locking pin and a local manual control.

Component

Material

Approvals

Enclosed Release Attachment

Brass Housing


Flexible Connector

Brass


Flexible Connector: When using the enclosed release attachment, flexible connectors are required between the corner pulley and the first release and between the first release and the second release. Two lengths of flexible connectors, for use between cylinders, are available depending on cylinder size. Shipping Assembly Part No. Description 42743 42788 45507 45500

Enclosed release attachment (AP-8 cylinder valve only) 12 in. (30.5 cm) flexible connector 7 15/16 in. (20.2 cm) flexible connector 6 3/16 (8.1 cm) flexible connector

Dual Cylinder Release – 3 or More Cylinders

Single Cylinder Release – 1 or More Cylinders

LOCAL MANUAL CONTROL ENCLOSED RELEASE ATTACHMENT

FLEXIBLE CONNECTOR PART NO. 42788 LOCKING PIN

FLEXIBLE CONNECTOR (50 – 75 LB., PART NO. 45500) (100 LB., PART NO. 45507)

001825

FLEXIBLE CONNECTOR PART NO. 42788

001826

ANSUL is a registered trademark. 1-42 ANSUL INCORPORATED, ONE STANTON STREET, MARINETTE, WI 54143-2542

715-735-7411

Form No. F-90227


Litho in U.S.A.

ANSUL




Hose Reels

Description The carbon dioxide hose reel can be used in areas that normally do not require fixed pipe systems, or as a back up to a fixed pipe system. When used as a back up, provisions must be made to have self-contained breathing apparatus available for anyone entering the hazard area immediately after the fixed system discharge. Hose reels are available with hose lengths ranging from 25 ft. to 100 ft. (7.6 m to 30.5 m).

On small systems, 75 lbs. (34 kg) or less of carbon dioxide, discharge nozzle, Part No. 42842, should be used. On systes larger that 75 lbs. (34 kg), discharge nozzle, Part No. 42303 (for 1/2 in. hose) or Part No. 42312 (for 3/4 in. hose) should be used. The complete hose reel is finished in red enamel.

Component

Material

Thread

Approvals

Hose Reel

Steel With Brass Fittings

3/4 in. NPT Female



Description

41518 41519 41520 41523 41524 41526 44967

Hose reel with 25 ft. (7.6 m) of 1/2 in. (1.3 cm) hose Hose reel with 50 ft. (15.2 m) of 1/2 in. (1.3 cm) hose Hose reel with 75 ft. (22.9 m) of 1/2 in. (1.3 cm) hose Hose reel with 100 ft. (30.5 m) of 1/2 in. (1.3 cm) hose Hose reel with 50 ft. (15.2 m) of 3/4 in. (1.9 cm) hose Hose reel with 75 ft. (22.9 m) of 3/4 in. (1.9 cm) hose Hose reel with 100 ft. (30.5 m) of 3/4 in. (1.9 cm) hose

42842 42303

Projector horn - 75 lb. (34 kg) systems and less Volume discharge horn for 1/2 in. hose - 75 lb. (34 kg) systems and larger

42312

Volume discharge horn for 3/4 in. hose - 75 lb. (34 kg) systems and larger

40237 41807

Upper bracket (one required) Lower bracket (Use two per projector horn and one per volume discharge horn)

41924 41923

Operating instructions - for systems less than 100 lbs. (45.4 kg) Operating instructions - for systems 100 lbs. (45.4 kg) or larger

42227 42228 42224 42225 42222 42226 46604

1/2 in. hose assembly - 25 ft. (7.6 m) (replacement) 1/2 in. hose assembly - 50 ft. (15.2 m) (replacement) 1/2 in. hose assembly - 75 ft. (22.9 m) (replacement) 1/2 in. hose assembly - 100 ft. (30.5 m) (replacement) 3/4 in. hose assembly - 50 ft. (15.2 m) (replacement) 3/4 in. hose assembly - 75 ft. (22.9 m) (replacement) 3/4 in. hose assembly - 100 ft. (30.5 m) (replacement)

1-43

Hose Reel – Sectional View A BRASS COUPLING WITH RIGHT AND LEFT HAND THREAD (FURNISHED WITH 1/2 IN. HOSE ONLY)

BRASS ELBOW STEEL DRUM

STAMPED STEEL SIDE FLANGES BRASS PIPE NIPPLE (EXTRA HEAVY) BRASS THRUST BUSHING BRASS HUB BUSHING FOR BRACKET ASBESTOS GRAPHITE PACKING

Hose Reel – Side View

BRASS SHAFT BRASS WASHER

C

BRASS GLAND THREE (3) STEEL ALLEN HEAD CAP SCREWS

BRASS COTTER PIN BRASS ACORN NUTS

BRASS HUB BUSHING FOR FLANGE

STAMPED STEEL BRACKET

BRASS TEE

D

BROILER STEEL BACK PLATE 3/16 IN. THICK

STEEL TIE ROD B

001832a

001832b

Hose Reel Dimensions A

B

C

D

Hose Capacity

in. (cm)

in.

(cm)

in.

(cm)

in.

(cm)

Up to 75 ft. (22.9 m) of 1/2 in. (1.3 cm) hose Up to 50 ft. (15.2 m) of 3/4 in. (1.9 cm) hose 75 to 100 ft. (22.8 to 30.4 m) of 1/2 in. (1.2 cm) hose 50 to 75 ft. (15.2 to 22.8 m) of 3/4 in. (1.9 cm) hose 75 to 100 ft. (22.8 to 30.4 m) of 3/4 in. (1.9 cm) hose

8 8 12 12 14

12 3/8 12 3/8 16 3/8 16 3/8 20 1/4

(31) (31) (42) (42) (51)

20 20 20 20 23 1/2

(51) (51) (51) (51) (60)

21 1/2 21 1/2 21 1/2 21 1/2 25 3/4

(55) (55) (55) (55) (65)

Discharge Horn – Part No. 42842

(20) (20) (31) (31) (36)

Volume Discharge Horn – Part No. 42303 for 1/2 in. Hose, Part No. 42312 for 3/4 in. Hose

WOOD GRIP CONTROL VALVE ASSEMBLY

CONNECTING PIPE W/WOOD GRIP

SQUEEZE-GRIP CONTROL VALVE WITH SMALL WOOD GRIP 18 IN. (45.7 cm)

13 IN. (33 cm)

46 1/2 IN. (118.1 cm)

DISCHARGE HORN (NONCONDUCTOR)

DISCHARGE HOSE

9 7/8 IN. (25 cm)

WOOD HANDLE (FOR CARRYING AND DIRECTING DISCHARGE)

40 5/8 IN. (103.1 cm)

DISCHARGE ORIFICES (7)

17 3/4 IN. (45 cm)

17 3/8 IN. (44.1 cm)

VOLUME DISCHARGE HORN – NON-CONDUCTING 4 1/4 IN. (10.7 cm)

7 1/2 IN. (19 cm) 001833a

001833b

8 3/4 IN. (22.2 cm) DIAMETER 001852c

001852b

Extra Heavy Flexible Hose – Wire Reinforced High Pressure Type O.D.

O.D. (cm)

Flexible Hose

in.

1/2 in. Hose 3/4 in. Hose

1 1 1/4

(2.5) (3.2)

in. 1/2 3/4

I.D. (cm) (1.3) (1.9)

NEOPRENE COVER – WINTERIZED –40 °F (–40 °C)

FRICTION JACKET

WIRE BRAID

FRICTION JACKET

WIRE BRAID SYNTHETIC RUBBER INNER TUBE – WINTERIZED –40 °F (–40 °C)

I.D.

001843



715-735-7411

Form No. F-90195


Litho in U.S.A.

ANSUL




Pressure Trip

Description The pressure trip is connected to the actuation or discharge line of a carbon dioxide system. By either pneumatic or manual actuation, the pressure trip can release spring or weight powered devices to close doors and windows, open fuel dump valves, close fire dampers or close fuel supply valves. The pressure trip is constructed of brass with two 1/4 in. NPT fittings for connection to discharge or actuation lines. The link on the pressure switch is released either pneumatically, by agent discharge pressure; or manually, by use of the pull ring. The link then releases the device which performs the auxiliary functions.

NOTE: Operating pressure must be a minimum of 75 psi (5.2 bar) with a maximum load of 70 lbs. (31.8 kg).


Pressure trip

Component

Material

Thread Size/Type

Approvals

Pressure Trip

Brass

1/4 in. NPT Female


3 3/4 IN. (9.5 cm)

1/4 IN. NPT

3 IN. (7.6 cm)

000705



715-735-7411

Form No. F-90212-1


Litho in U.S.A.

ANSUL




Header Safety

Description The header safety is a device used to relieve high pressure build-up in a closed section of piping. If actuation pressure should get inadvertently trapped and should an increase in temperature cause the pressure to rise to a dangerous level, the burst disc in the header safety will rupture, allowing the pressure to escape. The header safety is available with 1/2 in. or 3/4 in. NPT threads.

SAFETY DISC NUT

Shipping Assembly Part No. Description 40094 40076 78756

1/2 in. header safety 3/4 in. header safety Replacement burst disc

1/2 IN. OR 3/4 IN. NPT

SAFETY DISC

SAFETY DISC WASHER

000706b

Component

Material

Thread Size/Type

Approvals

Header Safety

Brass

1/2 or 3/4 in. NPT Male




715-735-7411

Form No. F-90187


Litho in U.S.A.

ANSUL




Header Vent Plug

Description The header vent plug is used to release low pressure build up that may occur in closed system utilizing time delays or selector valves. The header vent plug should also be installed on the cylinder sides of the check valves on both main and reserve systems to relieve any pressure that may leak past the check valve and accidentally actuate the reserve system while the main system is discharging.

Component

Material

Vent Plug

Body: 1/2 IN. NPT Male Brass Spring: Bronze Seal: Neoprene


Thread Size/Type

Header vent plug

Approvals U.S. Coast Guard (162.038/7/0) UL (EX-2968) FM Approved

STEM SPRING

BODY

CHECK SEAL

CHECK CUP

WASHER

1/2 IN. NPT

29/32 IN. (2.3 cm)

7/8 IN. (2.2 cm)

000707b

000707a



715-735-7411

Form No. F-90188


Litho in U.S.A.

ANSUL




Pressure Operated Siren

Description The pressure operated siren is used to warn personnel of a system discharge. The siren is operated with the carbon dioxide pressure from the system. The siren will operate at the start of the carbon dioxide discharge and will continue through most of the discharge time. The minimum decibel level at 10 ft. (3 m) is 90 dB with a flow rate of 11 lb./minute (5 kg/minute.) The siren is constructed of brass and finished with red, corrosion resistant paint.


Pressure operated siren

Component

Material

Thread Size/Type

Approvals

Siren

Body: Brass Strainer: Monel

1/4 IN. NPT Female


4 1/2 IN. (11.4 cm)

1/4 IN. CONNECTION FROM CO2 PIPING

4 1/2 IN. (11.4 cm) 1 7/8 IN. (4.8 cm)

5 1/8 IN. (13 cm)

3 3/4 IN. (9.5 cm)

5/16 IN. DIAMETER MOUNTING HOLES 3 PLACES

000713a

000713b



715-735-7411

Form No. F-90186-1


Litho in U.S.A.

ANSUL




Discharge Indicator

Description The system discharge indicator is used to visually indicate, at a remote location, when the carbon dioxide system has discharged. Pressure from the system is tapped off and run to the discharge indicator by 1/4 in. piping. When the system discharges, pressure operates a piston in the indicator which pushes off a cover plate and exposes the wording ‘‘System Discharged.’’


Discharge indicator

Component

Material

Thread Size/Type

Approvals

Discharge Indicator

Housing: Bronze Piston: Stainless Steel

1/4 in. NPT Female


1 7/8 IN. (4.8 cm)

3 3/4 IN. (9.5 cm) FOR MOUNTING HOLES PISTON 2 3/4 IN. (7 cm) DIAMETER OF BODY

SPRING CLIP OUTER NAMEPLATE 9/32 IN. DIAMETER HOLES (.71 cm)

INNER NAMEPLATE 1/2 IN. PIPE FROM SYSTEM PIPING

OUTER NAMEPLATE

11/16 IN. (1.7 cm)

000710a

000710b



715-735-7411

Form No. F-90185


Litho in U.S.A.

ANSUL




Odorizer

Description The odorizer is used to inject a small amount of wintergreen scent into the carbon dioxide while flowing through the piping network. When the carbon dioxide discharges into the hazard area, it will carry a scent of wintergreen with it. This wintergreen scent is a warning to personnel entering the hazard area that the area contains a concentration of carbon dioxide and precautions must be taken, either leave the area immediately or secure proper breathing apparatus. The internal ampoule containing the oil of wintergreen in the odorizer must be replaced after each system discharge. Shipping Assembly Part No.

Description

42278 42284

Odorizer Replacement ampoule 000698

Component

Material

Thread Size/Type

Approvals

Odorizer

Steel

1 in. NPT Male




715-735-7411

Form No. F-90184


Litho in U.S.A.

ANSUL




Pressure Switch – DPST

Description The pressure switch is operated off the carbon dioxide pressure when the system is discharged. The pressure switch can be used to open or close electrical circuits to either shut down equipment or turn on lights or alarms. The double pole, single throw (DPST) pressure switch is constructed with a gasketed, water tight housing. The housing is constructed of malleable iron, painted red. A 1/4 in. NPT pressure inlet is used to connect the 1/4 in. pipe from the carbon dioxide system.


Description

46250

Pressure switch – DPST

Component

Material

Thread Size/Type

Electric Rating

Approvals

Pressure Switch DPST

Switch: BAKELITE Housing: Malleable Iron Piston: Brass

Conduit Inlet: 3/4 in. NPT Female Pressure Inlet: 1/4 in. NPT Female

2 HP – 240 VAC/ 480 VAC 2 HP – 250 VDC, 30A 250V AC/DC 5A 480V AC/DC

Coast Guard (162.038/7/0) UL (EX-2968) FM Approved

3 5/8 IN. (9.2 cm) MALLEABLE IRON FINISH – RED PAINT

BRASS RESET PLUNGER

2 7/8 IN. (7.3 cm)

MOISTURE PROOF JOINT

TO ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT TO BE CONTROLLED

GASKET NUT “O” RING GASKET NAMEPLATE

DOUBLE POLE – HEAVY DUTY TOGGLE SWITCH WITH FULLY ENCLOSED BAKELITE BASE

4 9/16 IN. (11.5 cm)

BRASS PISTON PISTON “O” RING GASKET TO POWER

3/4 IN. ELECTRICAL CONDUIT OUTLETS 1/4 IN. UNION 1/4 IN. PIPE FROM CYLINDERS 000716a

000716b

ANSUL is a registered trademark and BAKELITE is a trademark of Union Carbide Corp. 1-50 ANSUL INCORPORATED, ONE STANTON STREET, MARINETTE, WI 54143-2542

715-735-7411

Form No. F-90202


Litho in U.S.A.

ANSUL




Pressure Switch – 3PST

Description The pressure switch is operated off the carbon dioxide pressure when the system is discharged. The pressure switch can be used to open or close electrical circuits to either shut down equipment or turn on lights or alarms. The three pole, single throw (3PST) pressure switch is constructed with a gasketed, water tight housing. The housing is constructed of malleable iron, painted red. A 1/4 in. NPT pressure inlet is used to connect the 1/4 in. pipe from the carbon dioxide system.


Description

42344

Pressure switch – 3PST

Component

Material

Thread Size/Type

Electric Rating

Approvals

Pressure Switch 3PST



30A – 240 VAC 20A – 600 VAC 3 HP – 120 VAC 7.5 HP – 240 VAC 15 HP – 600 VAC 3 PHASE AC


“A”

4 IN. (10.1 cm) 3 1/16 IN. (7.7 cm)

3 3/4 IN. (9.5 cm) RESET KNOB

MOISTURE-PROOF GASKET 3/4 IN. NPT

SNAP LOCK-RING “O” RING GASKET PISTON ROD SPRING HALF ROUND ARM

5 3/16 IN. (13.1 cm)

TOGGLE SWITCH WITH FULLY ENCLOSED BAKELITE BASE

3 7/8 IN. (9.8 cm)

SPACER HALF ROUND ARM

BRASS SWITCH HOUSING

SPRING NAMEPLATE PISTON ROD PISTON “O” RING GASKET PISTON 4 – 9/32 IN. MOUNTING HOLES

PISTON-SPOT NUT SWIVEL NUT UNION HEX BUSHING 3/8 IN. X 1/4 IN. “A”

3/4 IN. BRASS PLUG

SECTION “A” – “A”

000715a

000715b

ANSUL is a registered trademark and BAKELITE is a trademark of Union Carbide Corp. 1-51 ANSUL INCORPORATED, ONE STANTON STREET, MARINETTE, WI 54143-2542

715-735-7411

Form No. F-90199


Litho in U.S.A.

ANSUL




Pressure Switch – SPDT

Description The pressure switch is operated off the carbon dioxide pressure when the system is discharged. The pressure switch can be used to open or close electrical circuits to either shut down equipment or turn on lights or alarms. The single pole, double throw (SPDT) pressure switch is constructed with a gasketed, water tight housing. The housing is constructed of malleable iron, painted red. A 1/4 in. NPT pressure inlet is used to connect the 1/4 in. pipe from the carbon dioxide system.


Description

46251

Pressure switch – SPDT

Component

Material

Thread Size/Type

Electric Rating

Approvals

Pressure Switch SPDT



10A - 125V 5A - 250 VAC


3 5/8 IN. (9.2 cm) MALLEABLE IRON FINISH – RED PAINT

2 7/8 IN. (7.3 cm)

BRASS RESET PLUNGER MOISTURE PROOF JOINT GASKET NUT ‘‘O’’ RING GASKET NAMEPLATE

TOGGLE SWITCH WITH FULLY ENCLOSED BAKELITE BASE

4 9/16 IN. (11.5 cm)

BRASS PISTON PISTON ‘‘O’’ RING GASKET

CONTACT ARRANGEMENT

000717b

3/4 IN. ELECTRIC CONDUIT OUTLETS

1/4 IN. UNION 1/4 IN. PIPE FROM CYLINDERS 000717a



715-735-7411

Form No. F-90201


Litho in U.S.A.

ANSUL




Pressure Switch DPDT – Explosion-Proof

Description The pressure switch is operated off the carbon dioxide pressure when the system is discharged. The pressure switch can be used to open or close elctrical circuits to either shut down equipment or turn on lights or alarms. The double pole, double throw (DPDT) pressure switch is constructed with an explosion-proof housing suitable for hazardous environments. A 1/4 in. NPT pressure inlet is used to connect the 1/4 in. pipe from the carbon dioxide system.


Description

43241

Pressure switch – DPDT

Component

Material

Thread Size/Type

Electrical Rating

Approvals

Pressure Switch DPDT

Housing: Malleable Iron


10A 125 VAC 5A 250 VAC


1/4 IN. PIPE CONNECTION TO CARBON DIOXIDE SYSTEM

1/4 IN. UNION

3/4 IN. CONDUIT OUTLET

3/8 IN. X 1/4 IN. BUSHING

6 1/2 IN. (16.5 cm) 7 7/8 IN. (20 cm)

5 13/16 IN. (14.7 cm) NAMEPLATE 5 1/8 IN. (13 cm)

2 5/8 IN. (6.6 cm)

2 11/32 IN. MOUNTING HOLES

3/4 IN. CONDUIT OUTLET

5 5/8 IN. (14.2 cm)

3 9/16 IN. (9 cm)

001842b

001842a

NOTE: SUITABLE FOR HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS, CLASS I, DIVISION I, GROUPS C, D AND CLASS II, DIVISION I, GROUPS E, F, G.

ANSUL is a registered trademark. 1-53


715-735-7411

Form No. F-90200-1


Litho in U.S.A.

ANSUL




Marine Actuation Station – Two Step

Description The marine actuation station is used to release the system pilot cylinders by means of compressed nitrogen gas. This is accomplished by pulling the operating handle marked CYLINDER RELEASE which punctures the nitrogen cartridge, allowing the gas to flow to a Local/Manual Override located on the pilot cylinders, and pulling the operating handle marked VALVE RELEASE which punctures the nitrogen cartridge, allowing the gas to flow to a pressure operated selector valve.

The marine actuation station comes equipped with 1/4 in. stainless steel compression fittings for attaching 1/4 in. O.D. stainless steel tubing. The enclosure is rainproof, constructed of 16 ga. galvanized steel and is equipped with a draw pull catch. The actuation pressure is achieved by means of an LT-20-L nitrogen cartridge. The two step actuation station is generally used to actuate systems which are protecting occupied spaces.

Component

Material

Tubing Connection

Approvals

Actuation Station

Galvanized Steel

1/4 in. Compression Fitting



Description

418731

Marine Actuation Station (Includes 1/4 in. ball valve, rainproof cabinet, two LT-20-L nitrogen cartridges and cartridge receiver with lever operator)

7012

Replacement LT-20-L nitrogen cartridge

INSTRUCTION CHART

V A L V E R E L

6 IN. (152 mm)

C Y L I N D E R R E L

12 IN. (305 mm)

PULL CATCH

NITROGEN CARTRIDGE

COMPRESSION FITTING FOR 1/4 IN. OD S.S. TUBE

10 IN. (254 mm)

000694

1-54

0

MAXIMUM LENGTH RUN (FEET) 100 150 200

50

250

300

.020 58

.025

94

.035

150

WALL THICKNESS (INCHES)

.030

67

.028

.040 .045

.049

.050 .055 .060 .065

.065

1/4 IN. STAINLESS STEEL TUBE

.070 MAXIMUM LENGTH OF ACTUATION TUBING FROM REMOTE STATION TO CYLINDERS 001382

Note: Vent Plug, Part No. 1732, must be utilized in actuation line near system actuator.



715-735-7411

Form No. F-90197-1


Litho in U.S.A.

ANSUL




Marine Actuation Station – One Step

Description The marine actuation station is used to release the system pilot cylinders by means of compressed nitrogen gas. This is accomplished by opening the 1/4 in. valve and pulling the handle which punctures the nitrogen cartridge, allowing the gas to flow to a remote pressure attachment located on the pilot cylinders. The marine actuation station comes equipped with a 1/4 in. stainless steel compression fitting for attaching 1/4 in. O.D. stainless steel tubing.The

enclosure is rainproof, constructed of 16 ga. galvanized steel and is equipped with a draw pull catch. The actuation pressure is achieved by means of an LT-20-L nitrogen cartridge. The one step actuation station is generally used to actuate systems which are protecting unoccupied spaces.

Component

Material

Tubing Connection

Approvals

Actuation Station

Galvanized Steel

1/4 in. Compression Fitting


Shipping Assembly Part No. 67686

Description Marine Actuation Station (Includes rainproof cabinet, LT-20-L nitrogen cartridge and cartridge receiver with lever operator)

7012

Replacement LT-20-L nitrogen cartridge

6 IN. (15.2 cm) INSTRUCTION CHART

COMPRESSION FITTING FOR 1/4 IN. O.D. S.S. TUBE

000695a

TO ACTUATE FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM, PULL HANDLE

PULL CATCH 12 IN. (30.5 cm)

NITROGEN CARTRIDGE

10 IN. (25.4 cm)

000695b

1-55

0

MAXIMUM LENGTH RUN (FEET) 100 150 200

50

250

300

.020 58

.025 .030 .035

94

.035

150

WALL THICKNESS (INCHES)

67

.028

.040 .045

.049

.050 .055 .060 .065

.065

1/4 IN. STAINLESS STEEL TUBE

.070 MAXIMUM LENGTH OF ACTUATION TUBING FROM REMOTE STATION TO CYLINDERS 001382

Note: Vent Plug, Part No. 1732, must be utilized in actuation line near system actuator.



715-735-7411

Form No. F-90198-1


Litho in U.S.A.

ANSUL



Carbon Dioxide System Applications Electronic Data Processing – Computer Room and Subfloor

Hazard Description

Electronic data processing involves storage, recall and use of information via electronic equipment. Electronic data processing equipment is found in almost every industry today. The equipment is very sensitive and operates within minute tolerances. Additionally, many computer installations are designed with a subfloor area containing data and power cable bundles. Because of the high dollar value of the equipment, the data managed by that equipment and the productivity provided by electronic data processing; rapid detection and efficient fire protection are imperative. Time lost to cleanup and ventilation of a computer room means lost time throughout the company; so these areas require a clean, no residue gas agent that disperses easily. The computer room and subfloor space can be protected with a carbon dioxide suppression system, especially when the computer room is normally unoccupied.

Sources of Ignition and Types of Fires

Fires can occur as deep seated fires within the computer electrical insulation and in the cable bundles in the subfloor. Paper debris that has been allowed to accumulate in the subfloor is also a source for ignition.

Recommended Protection

Computer room/subfloor protection can be accomplished by installation of a total flood carbon dioxide system. The CO2 system is designed in accordance with National Fire Protection Association Standard 12, 1989 Edition, which states that a 30% concentration must be achieved within two minutes and a design concentration of 50% must be reached within seven minutes. Design concentration must be maintained for a period of not less that twenty minutes. Notice: Factory Mutual (FM) requires a 65% design concentration if the subfloor is constructed of combustible material, or has contents other than cable. FM also requires the design concentration of 65% then be held for a minimum of thirty minutes. The figure below show the piping and nozzle arrangement for a CO2 system protecting a typical computer room/subfloor space.

000937

The CO2 system consists of a cylinder bank, a piping arrangement and a set of discharge nozzles located in the room and subfloor space. Occasionally, drainage is installed in the subfloor area. Provisions must be made for making the drain piping a closed system unless water is present to assist in assuring the necessary concentration. 2-1

Protection Considerations

When the computer room is normally occupied, personnel safety is of first concern. Alarms or warning devices must be located in the room to provide sufficient annunciation of CO2 discharge. In addition, a time delay device should be incorporated in the CO2 system to allow sufficient time for personnel to evacuate the room prior to CO2 discharge. The room and subfloor must be tight to prevent loss of CO2. All air handling equipment must be shut down and dampered prior to system discharge. Do not use the air handling system as a means of evacuating the CO2 after discharge. Smoke detectors are usually employed for early warning of fire to allow manual release of the CO2 system. Thermal detectors are used as a backup automatic system. The authority having jurisdiction may have additional requirements.


715-735-7411

Form No. F-90171


Litho in U.S.A.

ANSUL



Carbon Dioxide System Applications

Electronic Data Processing – Subfloor Hazard Description

Electronic data processing involves storage, recall and use of information via electronic equipment. Electronic data processing equipment is found in almost every industry today. The equipment is very sensitve and operates within minute tolerances. Additionally, many computer installations are designed with a subfloor area containing data and power cable bundles. Because of the high dollar value of the equipment, the data managed by that equipment and the productivity provided by electronic data processing, rapid detection and efficient fire protection are imperative. Time lost to cleanup and ventilation of a computer room means lost time throughout the company; so these areas require a clean, no residue gas agent that disperses easily. Common practice is to protect the computer room with a Halon 1301 suppression system and a carbon dioxide total flood system for protection of the cable bundles in the subfloor space. The following information pertains only to protection of subfloor space with a fixed CO2 fire suppression system.


Subfloor fires can occur as deep-seated fires in electrical insulation, in combustible debris accumulated due to poor maintenance, or in the construction material of the subfloor itself.


Protection of data processing subfloor spaces can be accomplished with a total flood system. The CO2 system is designed in accordance with National Fire Protection Association Standard No. 12, 1989 Edition. The figure below shows the piping and nozzle arrangement of a CO2 fire suppression system protecting a typical data processing subfloor area.

000938

The CO2 system consists of a cylinder bank and a piping arrangement with a set of low velocity nozzles. Some CO2 loss will occur through cable openings into equipment and through perforated tile. Make a complete evaluation of possible leakage sources and add CO2 to compensate. If leakage is excessive, an extended discharge system must be considered.

2-2

Recommended Protection (Continued)

Subfloor airspaces are often used as a plenum for the air handling system. If the space is used as a plenum, the air handling system MUST be shut down, tightly dampered and the air handling equipment at full rest BEFORE CO2 system discharge or the CO2 will be rapidly exhausted. A 50% design concentration is required for dry electrical fires by NFPA 12. A 30% concentration must be achieved within two minutes and design concentration must be reached within seven minutes. Design concentration must be maintained for a minimum of twenty minutes. Factory Mutual (FM) requires a 65% design concentration if the subfloor is constructed of combustible material or has contents other than cable. FM also requires the design concentration to be held for a minimum of 30 minutes. Occasionally, drainage is installed in a subfloor area. Provisions must be made for making the drain piping a closed system unless water is present. This will assist in assuring the necessary CO2 concentrations.


CO2, being heavier than air, will settle into low-lying areas possibly creating a hazard to personnel. Do not use the air handling system as a means of evacuating CO2 after discharge. Often, the data processing equipment cannot be shut down. Since most of this equipment has cooling fans, some CO2 will be drawn from the protected space. Because of this agent loss, a higher CO2 initial concentration or a greater volume of release may be required. Smoke detectors are usually employed for early warning of fire to allow manual release of the CO2 system with thermal detectors used as a backup to allow automatic system release. The authority having jurisdiction may have additional requirements.


715-735-7411

Form No. F-90164


Litho in U.S.A.

ANSUL




Recirculating Turbine Generators Hazard Description

Found both in heavy industry and power companies, turbine generators are usually enclosed recirculating devices. Steam is passed over the turbine blades, spinning the turbine which is attached to a generating device.


If an electrical fault occurs in the generator, a deep-seated electrical insulation fire can result. In addition, the generator bearings can overheat, igniting their lubricants.


Protection of enclosed recirculating generators can be accomplished with a total flood system. The design of this system should be in accordance with National Fire Protection Association Standard No. 12, 1989 Edition, which addresses the fire protection of rotating electrical equipment. The figure below shows the piping and nozzle arrangement of a carbon dioxide fire suppression system protecting a typical enclosed recirculating generator.

000939

The CO2 system consists of two cylinder banks and two separate piping arrangements. One bank of cylinders is piped to a set of nozzles which give a high initial rate of discharge upon receiving a signal from the detectors. (Note: The detectors must be located in the hot air stream ahead of all coolers.) This discharge rate shall be sufficient to achieve 30% concentration of CO2 within two minutes and design concentration within seven minutes. (Note: Factory Mutual (FM) requires an even higher discharge rate, sufficient to reach 30% concentration in one minute.) The second bank of cylinders is designed to discharge simultaneously at a much slower rate through a separate network of pipe and nozzles. This network provides an extended discharge of CO2 for the generator deceleration period in order to compensate for leakage and maintain an inert atmosphere within the enclosure. A minimum concentration of 30% must be maintained for at least twenty minutes. Multiple generators can be protected by the use of selector valves on common banks of CO2 cylinders. Reserve banks of cylinders are generally required as a common back-up.

2-3


Personnel safety is of first concern. Alarms or warning devices must be located in and/or around the hazard area to provide sufficient annunciation of CO2 discharge. A pre-discharge alarm or time delay device may be required to allow personnel time to leave the area. Provisions must be made for venting the CO2 and determining the safety of the atmosphere prior to reoccupation of the hazard area after discharge. Normal leakage from the enclosure should relieve any CO2 pressure build-up. However, in the case of air-tight enclosures, pressure relief venting may be required. Location of nozzles must be in the cold air stream leading to the generator. Incoming air will carry the CO2 to the hazard. Automatic discharge of the CO2 system might be achieved by a tie-in with the customer’s differential relays which could act as additional detection/actuation sources. The authority having jurisdiction may have additional requirements.


715-735-7411

Form No. F-90106


Litho in U.S.A.

ANSUL




Non-Recirculating Turbine Generators Hazard Description

Found both in heavy industry and power companies, turbine generators are sometime dampered, non-recirculating type devices. Steam is passed over the turbine blades, spinning the turbine which is attached to a generating device.


If an electrical fault occurs in the generator, a deep-seated electrical insulation fire can result. In addition, the generator bearings can overheat, igniting their lubricants.


Protection of dampered non-recirculating generators can be accomplished with a total flood system. The design of this system should be in accordance with National Fire Protection Association Standard No. 12, 1989 Edition, which addresses the fire protection of rotating electrical equipment. The figure below shows the piping and nozzle arrangement of a carbon dioxide fire suppression system protecting a typical dampered non-recirculating generator.

000939

The CO2 system consists of two cylinder banks and two separate piping arrangements. One bank of cylinders is piped to a set of nozzles which give a high initial rate of discharge upon receiving a signal from the detectors. (Note: The detectors must be located in the hot air stream ahead of all coolers.) This discharge rate shall be sufficient to achieve 30% concentration of CO2 within two minutes and design concentration within seven minutes. (Note: Factory Mutual (FM) requires an even higher discharge rate, sufficient to reach 30% concentration in one minute.) The second bank of cylinders is designed to discharge simultaneously at a much slower rate through a separate network of pipe and nozzles. This network provides an extended discharge of CO2 for the generator deceleration period in order to compensate for leakage and maintain an inert atmosphere within the enclosure. 35% additional CO2 must be added after the minimum design concentration of 30% has been calculated. This minimum design concentration must be maintained for at least twenty minutes. Multiple generators can be protected by the use of selector valves on common banks of CO2 cylinders. Reserve banks of cylinders are generally required as a common back-up.

2-4


Personnel safety is the first concern. Alarms or warning devices must be located in and/or around the hazard area to provide sufficient annunciation of CO2 discharge. A pre-discharge alarm or time delay device may be required to allow personnel time to leave the area. Provisions must be made for venting the CO2 and determining the safety of the atmosphere prior to reoccupation of the hazard area after discharge. Normal leakage from the enclosure should relieve any CO2 pressure buildup. However, in the case of air-tight enclosures, pressure relief venting may be required. Location of nozzles must be in the cold air stream leading to the generator. Incoming air will carry the CO2 to the hazard. Thermal detection is normally provided for automatic system release. Automatic discharge of the CO2 system might also be achieved by a tie-in with the customer’s differential relays which could act an as additional detection/actuation source. The authority having jurisdiction may have additional requirements.


715-735-7411

Form No. F-90162


Litho in U.S.A.

ANSUL




Control Rooms Hazard Description

Control rooms are found in all types of industry, housing transformers, motors, switch gear and other types of electronic devices necessary for energizing the various types of equipment.


If an electrical fault occurs in wiring or an electric motor overheats, a deepseated electrical insulation fire can result.


Protection of control rooms can be accomplished by treating it as a deepseated total flood hazard in accordance with requirements of National Fire Protection Association Standard 12, 1989 Edition. The figure below shows the piping and nozzle arrangement of a carbon dioxide fire suppression system protecting a control room.

000941

The CO2 system would consist of a single cylinder bank along with a single piping arrangement and discharge nozzles. The design of the CO2 system should be in accordance with NFPA 12, 1989 Edition, which states that a 50% concentration of CO2 is required for dry electrical hazards and that a 30% concentration shall be achieved within two minutes. Design concentration must be achieved within seven minutes and maintained for an additional twenty minutes. Protection Considerations

Personnel safety is the first concern. The CO2 system must incorporate a discharge alarm and/or pre-discharge alarm with a time delay depending on personnel evacuation time. Electrical power and ventilation must be shut down prior to system actuation. Common A/C duct may require dampering to prevent CO2 loss. Smoke detection is recommended. The authority having jurisdiction may have additional requirements.


715-735-7411

Form No. F-90177


Litho in U.S.A.

ANSUL




Record Storage Rooms Hazard Description

Typical document storage rooms contain records stored on shelves, in file cabinets and cartons, and are usually quite tightly packed within the room.


Room heaters, careless smoking, and overheating of ventilating fan could all cause ignition of paper material.


Protection of record storage rooms can be accomplished by treating the hazard as deep-seated total flood type, designed in accordance with National Fire Protection Association Standard 12, 1989 Edition. The figure below illustrates the piping and nozzle arrangement of a carbon dioxide suppression system protecting a record storage room.

000942

The CO2 system would consist of a bank of cylinders with a piping network and nozzles. The system design shall be in accordance with NFPA 12, 1989 Edition, which states that a 65% concentration of CO2 is required for record storage rooms, and that a 30% concentration shall be achieved within two minutes. The 65% design concentration must be achieved within seven minutes and maintained for an additional twenty minutes. Protection Considerations

Personnel safety is of primary concern. The CO2 system should incorporate a discharge alarm and/or pre-discharge alarm with a time delay. Electrical power and ventilation must be shut down. Common A/C ductwork may require dampering to prevent CO2 loss. Smoke detection is recommended. The authority having jurisdiction may have additional requirements.


715-735-7411

Form No. F-90175


Litho in U.S.A.

ANSUL




Battery Storage Hazard Description

Any industry requiring a large number of vehicles, such as the trucking industry, would have a room or vault for storing and charging acid type batteries. These rooms would have adequate ventilation so that large amounts of hydrogen could not collect.


If paper cardboard cartons, cleaning rags and the like are allowed to collect in the battery room, these could be ignited by overheated equipment such as ventilating fans or charging devices.


Notice: The carbon dioxide system is not an explosion suppression system. The CO2 will suppress fires in extraneous material within the room and inert a possible explosive atmosphere. The figure below illustrates a typical CO2 system protecting a battery storage room.

000943

The CO2 system design must be in accordance with National Fire Protection Association Standard 12, 1989 Edition, which states that a concentration of 75% CO2 is required for hazards where hydrogen is present. The CO2 system would consist of a group of cylinders, a piping arrangement and discharge nozzles. The design concentration shall be achieved within one minute. Protection Considerations

The CO2 system must be properly grounded to eliminate any possibility of a spark in a potentially explosive atmosphere. Objects exposed to the CO2 discharge must also be grounded to dissipate possible electrostatic charges (NFPA 77). Ventilation fans must be shut down prior to CO2 system discharge. Pre-discharge alarm and a time delay may be required for personnel safety. Photoelectric smoke detection is recommended. The authority having jurisdiction may have additional requirements.


715-735-7411

Form No. F-90174


Litho in U.S.A.

ANSUL




Open Top Lube Oil Pits Hazard Description

Lube oil pits can be open with a depth up to four feet; open pits can also exceed four feet in depth, but the depth must not exceed one quarter of its width, and open pits can be partially covered with solid plate.


Oil within the pit can be ignited by overheated pumps or equipment within the pit.


All open pits can be protected with a carbon dioxide suppression system in accordance with National Fire Protection Association Standard 12, 1989 Edition, which states that the CO2 discharge time shall be a minimum of 30 seconds. The figure below shows the single bank of cylinders, piping and nozzle arrangements for a CO2 system protecting an open lube oil pit.

000944

The figure below shows the piping and nozzle arrangement for a CO2 system protecting a partially covered lube oil pit. NFPA 12 states that if the top of the pit is partially covered, so that the open area is less than 3% of the cubic foot volume expressed in square feet, the CO2 requirement may be determined on a total flooding basis. A 34% concentration would be required within one minute.

000952

2-8


Personnel safety must be considered during and after a CO2 system discharge. A pre-alarm and time delay period should be considered to allow personnel time to evacuate the space. Adequate ventilating of the pit must be accomplished, and consideration given to low lying areas within the plant where CO2 may tend to settle. Thermal detection with automatic system release is recommended. The authority having jurisdiction may have additional requirements.


715-735-7411

Form No. F-90176


Litho in U.S.A.

ANSUL




Electrical Cabinets Hazard Description

Found in almost any large structure, including hospitals, heavy industry and high rise buildings, electrical cabinets present a hazard particularly well suited for carbon dioxide protection. A typical electrical cabinet is the focal point of the electrical service for a large building or plant. Virtually all of the incoming service enters at the cabinet and is dispersed, stepped up, stepped down or otherwise controlled at that point. An electrical cabinet may contain fuses, switches, transformers and other electrical equipment along with a large network of cable and wiring. Downtime for the electrical cabinet means downtime for the entire facility. Dry powder or liquid agents can damage sensitive equipment, or require meticulous clean-up causing additional delays in getting the facility back ‘‘on-line.’’ An air-dispersed gas, carbon dioxide eliminates these problems.


Electrical fault is the most common source of ignition in the electrical cabinet. Energized equipment overheats or shorts and ignites insulation causing a ‘‘deep seated’’ type fire.


Protection of electrical cabinets can be accomplished with a total flood system. By injecting a sufficient amount of CO2 to suppress the fire and maintaining the CO2 laden atmosphere to allow a ‘‘soaking period,’’ even deep-seated insulation fires can be suppressed. The design of this system should be in accordance with National Fire Protection Association Standard No. 12, 1989 Edition, which addresses the fire protection of electrical equipment. NFPA 12 states that a 50% concentration of CO2 is required for dry electrical hazards and that a 30% concentration shall be achieved within two minutes. Design concentration must be achieved within seven minutes and maintained for an additional twenty minutes. Depending on the type of doors the cabinet has, the CO2 system could be designed as either a normal total flood or extended discharge system. Cabinets with loose fitting doors or louver openings will have considerable CO2 leakage. Leakage from a weatherproof cabinet will be much slower. In a reasonably ‘‘tight’’ cabinet, such as a weatherproof enclosure, the extended discharge may not be necessary as the sealed enclosure allows little leakage and the inert atmosphere will remain until the cabinet is opened and ventilated.

2-9


The figure below shows the piping and nozzle arrangement of a CO2 fire suppression system protecting a typical electrical cabinet of reasonable tightness.

000945

The extended-discharge CO2 system consists of two cylinder banks and two piping arrangements. Upon receiving a signal from the detectors, one bank of cylinders which are piped to a set of nozzles give a high initial rate of discharge, meeting the requirements for reaching design concentration within seven minutes. The second bank of cylinders is piped to a set of smaller nozzles which provide an extended discharge period, maintaining the inert atmosphere for the required twenty minutes. Protection Considerations

Personnel safety is the first concern. Discharge alarms should be located in the area of the electrical cabinet to warn nearby personnel of the CO2 discharge. Due to the possibility of CO2 leaking from the cabinet and settling into low lying surrounding areas, all personnel should leave the immediate cabinet area until the space can be completely ventilated. Normal leakage from the cabinet should relieve any CO2 pressure build-up. However, in the case of an air-tight enclosure, pressure relief venting may be required. Electrical power and any ventilation must be shut down prior to discharge. Also, many electrical cabinets have cooling fans to draw air into or out of the enclosure. These must be shut down and an extended discharge system should be considered to allow for the spin-down time and unclosable openings. Electrical cabinets may have completely open interiors or may be compartmentalized. If the construction of the cabinet is a series of compartments, at least one CO2 nozzle and detector must be installed in each compartment. In exceptionally large electrical cabinets, selector valves could be included in the system which could direct the discharge to only the section involved. The authority having jurisdiction may have additional requirements.


715-735-7411

Form No. F-90166


Litho in U.S.A.

ANSUL




Transformers Hazard Description

Transformers are found in heavy industry and may sit in the open or in vaults. Transformers located in the open, where it is impractical to flood the room, are protected by locally applying carbon dioxide over the surfaces using the rate by area method. Transformers within a vault are treated as a surface type total flood hazard. There is a possibility that a heated transformer core in either a transformer located in a vault or in the open could produce a ‘‘deep seated’’ fire in the insulation.


Leakage of oil could be ignited by an electrical fault or insulation within the transformer could ignite due to an overheated core.


Transformers within an enclosure or vault can be protected by total flooding the enclosure with CO2 in accordance with National Fire Protection Association Standard 12, 1989 Edition, which states that a 50% concentration is required for deep seated dry electrical fires and that a 30% concentration shall be achieved within two minutes. The 50% design concentration must be achieved within seven minutes and held for an additional twenty minute period. The carbon dioxide system would consist of a bank of cylinders, a piping network and discharge nozzles, as shown in the figure below.

000946

2-10


Transformers in an open room are treated as a local application type hazard where CO2 is directly applied to the transformer surfaces. The CO2 system would be designed in accordance with NFPA 12 which states that the CO2 discharge shall be for a minimum of 30 seconds. The figure below illustrates a typical transformer protected with CO2.

000947

The CO2 system would consist of a group of cylinders, a piping arrangement and a set of discharge nozzles. Protection Considerations

Any floor drain located under the transformer should be provided with a normally closed valve which only opens by oil pressure during an oil spill. Electrical clearances should be maintained in accordance with NFPA 12. The room or area must be ventilated after CO2 discharge with consideration given to areas where CO2 might tend to settle. The authority having jurisdiction may have additional requirements.


715-735-7411

Form No. F-90173


Litho in U.S.A.

ANSUL




Wave Solder Machines Hazard Description

Employed in the manufacture of electronics and cans, the wave solder machine presents a multi-faceted hazard to the fire protection professional. The wave solder device consists of an enclosure housing flux tubs, preheaters and solder pots; along with a motorized conveyor which transports parts through the machine. Attached to this enclosure is a fume exhaust system which must also be protected.


The most common fire in a wave solder machine is a wetted surface fire, which can quickly ignite the flux tubs, resulting in the addition of a liquid-indepth fire. Ignition occurs when an excess amount of flux on the parts is ignited by the preheaters or molten solder.


The wave solder machine enclosure can be treated as a total flood hazard if the conveyor openings on either end of the wave solder machine are small. Access doors along the sides of the machine, however, must always be in the closed position if total flood is to be considered. In cases where access doors are left open, or are opened on a regular basis, the hazard should be protected on a local application basis. Regardless of the machine enclosure situation, the exhaust system is considered a total flood hazard. The design of the protection systems should be in accordance with National Fire Protection Association Standard No. 12, 1989 Edition. The figure below shows the piping and nozzle arrangement of a total flood carbon dioxide fire suppression system protecting a typical wave solder machine which normally operates with the access doors closed.

000948

The total flood system consists of a single cylinder bank and a single piping arrangement. The piping is external to the enclosure to avoid interference with the conveyor system and to allow easy maintenance inside the wave solder machine. Nozzles are sealed flanged type which attach to the outside of a bulkhead or duct and direct CO2 into the hazard through a small opening. The total flood system for the enclosure shall achieve a 34% CO2 concentration within one minute. The duct system shall achieve a 65% concentration within one minute. 2-11


The figure below shows a typical local application CO2 system for a wave solder machine which normally operates with the access doors open. The piping network runs inside the enclosure with nozzles applying CO2 directly to the flux tubs, preheaters and solder pots. CO2 discharge shall be a minimum of 30 seconds.

000949


In either the total flood or the local application systems, consideration must be given to personnel safety. CO2 discharge should be coupled to an alarm system to warn workers in the immediate area of system activation. While the CO2 is being released in a confined space, CO2 escaping from the enclosure and settling into low-lying areas could be a hazard to personnel. All heating sources, pumps, conveyors and exhaust systems involved must be shut down before CO2 system discharge. In addition, any exhaust ducts must be dampered upon system discharge. Electrical or pneumatic provisions should be made for these operations. Thermal detection for automatic system release is recommended. If the conveyor system carries parts to another room or other machines, fire doors or shutters should be installed to prevent transmission of fire from machine to machine or room to room via burning parts on a conveyor. The authority having jurisdiction may have additional requirements.


715-735-7411

Form No. F-90165


Litho in U.S.A.

ANSUL




Industrial Fryers Hazard Description

The food industry prepares many types of foods by frying in heated cooking oil. Several types of food that lend themselves to deep fat frying are potato chips, pizza, nutmeats, doughnuts, poultry and fish products. The heated oil is often contained in a vat that is covered by a hood with an associated exhaust system. A conveyor belt usually transports the product through the heated oil where it exits the fryer onto a drain area.


A fire condition exists when the thermostatic control used to maintain a predetermined cooking oil temperature fails. This allows the temperature of the oil to rise above its auto-ignition point, causing ignition.


Protection of a fryer can be accomplished with a combination total flood/local application suppression system. The design of the system shall be in accordance with National Fire Protection Association Standard 12, 1989 Edition, which states that the fryer vat with its hood in the lowered position requires a 34% concentration which shall be achieved within one minute. In addition, Ansul recommends the carbon dioxide discharge to continue for a period of not less than three minutes due to the possibility of the oil reflashing before the temperature drops below the auto-ignition point. The exhaust duct is protected by the total flood method, achieving a 65% concentration within one minute. The drainboard portion, including related pumps, are treated as a local application type hazard, with the CO2 discharge continuing for a minimum of 30 seconds. The figure below illustrates a carbon dioxide suppression system protecting a typical potato chip fryer.

000950

The CO2 system consists of a bank of cylinders along with a piping network feeding discharge nozzles installed in the fryer/hood enclosure, the exhaust duct, and nozzles installed over the drain area and pumps. All pumps, fuel supply, motorized conveyor and exhaust fans must be shut down prior to CO2 system discharge. The exhaust duct must be dampered to prevent loss of CO2.

2-12


Personal safety must be provided using alarms or warning devices located in and around the hazard area. Uncloseable openings must be held to a minimum. Provisions must be made for venting the CO2 and determining the safety of the atmosphere prior to reoccupation of the hazard area after CO2 discharge. Thermal detection for automatic release is recommended. The authority having jurisdiction may have additional requirements.


715-735-7411

Form No. F-90172


Litho in U.S.A.

ANSUL




Dip Tanks Hazard Description

Many manufacturers use dip tanks for various processes in their plants. Metal fabrication, electronics, automotive and railway operations may use dip tanks in their daily work. A dip tank may be a simple hand-held operation or may involve a complex overhead monorail or hoist. Some tanks are enclosed by a hinged lid, some are open. Most have a drain board or drip area which may or may not be enclosed.


Overheated circulating pumps, flammable liquids heated beyond flashpoint, or sparks from machinery are all common sources of ignition for dip tanks. Two types of fires can result: liquid in depth fires in the tank itself or wetted surface fires on the dipped material and in the drain board/drip area.


Protection of dip tanks and associated components can be accomplished by a local application system. The design of this system should be in accordance with National Fire Protection Association Standard No. 12, 1989 Edition. A typical dip tank carbon dioxide suppression system is shown in the figure below.

000951

The carbon dioxide system consists of one cylinder bank and one piping arrangement. Overhead protection is used in this instance. Local application methods apply CO2 directly to the surface of the burning material, rather than flooding an enclosure. The CO2 discharge time shall be a minimum of 30 seconds. Essential to the success of the fire suppression system is the shutdown of all pumps, motorized conveyors and ventilation fans. If the dip tank has an exhaust duct, it must be dampered to allow sufficient CO2 concentration for fire suppression. In some situations, the dipped parts are carried through an oven for drying. The authority having jurisdiction may require fire protection for the oven also. The oven can be protected by a separate CO2 system or by the dip tank system with a selector valve system.

2-13


Personnel safety must be provided for with alarms or warning devices located in and around the hazard area. A pre-discharge alarm or time delay device may be required to allow personnel time to leave the hazard area. Provisions must be made for venting the CO2 and determining the safety of the atmosphere prior to reoccupation of the hazard area after discharge, and consideration given to low lying areas within the plant where CO2 may tend to settle. Thermal detection for automatic system release is recommended. Protection of a dip tank requires applying CO2 to ALL wetted sections of the hazard, including any conveyor system, drainboards and drip areas. If cleaning tanks or flammable materials are stored in the vicinity of the dip tank, they should also be protected. If at all possible, enclose the hazard wherever production will permit. The authority having jurisdiction may have additional requirements.


715-735-7411

Form No. F-90163


Litho in U.S.A.

OPEN FACE WET BENCH AND PROCESSING TOOL PROTECTION GUIDE Page 1

Introduction The information contained in this guide provide the guidelines for designing, installing and inspecting fixed high pressure CO2 fire suppression systems for the protection of wet benches and other processing tools used in the fabrication of semiconductor devices. This guide contains specific design methods and guidelines that apply to surface and subsurface protection of open face wet benches. General design information is also included for protection of other areas of the wet benches or processing tools; however, for specific design methods of these areas, the designer should design in accordance with the latest edition of the National Fire Protection Association Standard on Carbon Dioxide Extinguishing Systems (NFPA 12), Ansul’s Carbon Dioxide Systems Design Manual, the requirements of the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ), and customer specification as applicable. Acceptance of any system is subject to the review and requirements of the Authority Having Jurisdiction. In open style tools, the application of these guidelines are limited to tools with air exhaust flow rates not exceeding 150 cfm/linear ft. These guidelines apply to the fire suppression portion of the system only. To complete the system it is necessary to incorporate a fire detection and control system with the appropriate ancillary equipment and devices. Only listed equipment that has been specifically evaluated for this application may be used. Factory Mutual has Approved for fire detection in either an open face wet bench or process equipment, the Fire Sentry Corporations’ Model FS7-130-SX controller module, the S72173-C flame detector using firmware version 3720-0006, and the FS7-2173 flame detector using firmware 3720-1001, also Santa Barbara Dual Spectrums’ Model PM-5SX and PM-9SBE flame detectors. Use of the detection and control equipment should be in accordance with the manufacturerís recommendations. Consult the Authority Having Jurisdiction for specific detection and control requirements for the particular application. Note: An FMRC Approved Ansul control panel must be interfaced with the wet bench fire detection system to be used as a releasing device control unit for the fire suppression system. Wet bench protection utilizing high pressure CO2 uses the same design requirements as stated in the Design section for total flooding and local application with additional limitations and conditions stated in this guide. General Protection Requirements • The suppression system should be designed to discharge with the ventilation/exhaust system in continuous operation. • Except for the electrical power necessary to maintain operation of the exhaust/ventilation system, the electrical power supply to the tool must be interlocked to shut down upon system discharge. • Total agent supply demand for each extinguishing system should be based on a one shot discharge of the system over the entire tool. The method of determining agent quantity and recommended duration of discharge can be found in the appropriate section of this guide. • It is recommended that each tool be protected by an individual fire extinguishing system; however, if acceptable to the AHJ, a single system may protect a group of tools if the agent supply is sized for the largest hazard and an equally sized connected reserve is provided. • The AHJ should be consulted to determine connected reserve supply requirements. • If acceptable to the AHJ, tools exceeding 8 ft. (2.4 m) in length may be zoned providing the working surface of a wet bench or other processing tool is not subdivided into multiple zones of discharge. A physical barrier is required to separate each zone, and each zone should be provided with a separate agent supply and connected reserve or the system should be sized for the entire bench and provided with an equally sized connected reserve. • If acceptable to the AHJ, a maximum 30 second time delay prior to discharge of the extinguishing system over the working surface may be used. • If acceptable to the AHJ, a maximum 30 second time delay prior to discharge may be used in other areas of a tool in a single protection zone system. • Materials used in the installation of the system must be suitable for the type of environment that they will be located in. All equipment and materials of construction are subject to approval by the customer and the AHJ. For corrosive environments (environments containing acids, solvents, etc.) only the Corrosion Resistant “D” nozzle should be used.* All pipe and hangers should be protected against corrosion by an appropriate protective coating or sheath. All pipe joints, hangers, and fasteners should be protected by an appropriate corrosion protected finish or covering. The protective coating or covering should be suitable for the particular environments that they will be subjected to. All pipe and fittings must be cleaned of all chips, oil, and dirt prior to installing. General CO2 System Design Guidelines The tool subsurface (plenum) area should be protected using total flooding application only, designed to achieve a minimum concentration of 50 percent within 1 minute. The quantity of CO2 required should be adjusted to compensate for the air exhaust flow rate of the processing equipment. *FM APPROVAL OF THE (CR) “D” NOZZLE IS LIMITED TO NON-CORROSIVE ENVIRONMENTS. 2-14


General CO2 System Design Guidelines (Continued) If the CO2 system is arranged to protect the working surface area and plenum simultaneously, the discharge rate for the plenum should be calculated in accordance with the 1998 Edition of NFPA 12 section 3-3.2.3. For working surface open style tools, design the CO2 system on a local application basis, rate-by-volume method, for a minimum discharge time of 30 seconds. The basic system discharge rate of 1 LB/min/cu. ft. of assumed volume may be proportionately reduced to account for barriers that surround the working surface, such as: side panels, back walls, and headcase, in accordance with the 1998 Edition of NFPA 12 section 3-5.3.1. Use the Open Face Wet Bench CO2 System Design Guidelines in this guide in conjunction with the Ansul Carbon Dioxide Systems Design Manual and the ANSCALC version 2 HYDRAULIC CALCULATION PROGRAM for total flooding application design of wet bench subsurface (plenum areas and local application design of open face wet bench working surfaces. For tools provided with mini-environment enclosures, use the Ansul Carbon Dioxide System Design Manual and the ANSCALC program to design the CO2 system on a total flooding basis to achieve a minimum concentration of 50 percent within 1 minute. The quantity of CO2 required should be adjusted to compensate for the air exhaust flow rate of the wet bench. Always use the CR “D” Nozzle and corrosion protected pipe, fittings, and hardware in corrosive environments or where contamination of the process is an issue.* For protection of wet bench headcase and other compartments, use the Ansul Carbon Dioxide System Design Manual and the ANSCALC program to design the CO2 system on a total flooding basis to achieve a minimum concentration of 50 percent within 1 minute in each compartment. Open Face Wet Bench CO2 Fire Protection System Design Guidelines Open face wet bench protection utilizing high pressure CO2 uses the same design requirements as stated in the Design section of the Ansul “Carbon Dioxide Systems” manual for total flooding and local application with the additional limitations stated here: • Surface area of open face wet bench to be protected by using local application – rate by volume method only. Use only the CR “D” nozzle, Part Nos. 422647 through 422659.* • Under bench area (Plenum) to be protected using total flooding application only. For non-corrosive environments, use the standard “D” nozzle, Part Nos. 44651 through 44663. For corrosive environments, use the CR “D” nozzle, Part Nos. 422647 through 422659. See component sheet F-96156 for chemical resistance guidelines.* • 33 in. (84 cm) maximum height of surface area nozzle from lowest point of nozzle to working surface of wet bench. • 8 ft. (2.4 m) maximum spacing between nozzles used for total flooding under bench (plenum). Nozzle to be mounted against side wall of plenum and aimed to discharge horizontally. Additional nozzles, if necessary, are to be spaced accordingly. • 600 psi (41.4 bar) minimum nozzle pressure required for both the local application and total flooding. • When designing the local application – rate by volume method system, always use 0.1 ft. (0.3 m) as hazard height. • Design concentration must be a minimum of 50%. • Minimum of 60° F (16 °C) to a maximum of 80 °F (27 °C) storage temperature range. • Maximum air exhaust flow rate of the wet bench cannot exceed 150 CFM/linear ft.

*FM APPROVAL OF THE (CR) “D” NOZZLE IS LIMITED TO NON-CORROSIVE ENVIRONMENTS.


Open Face Wet Bench CO2 Fire Protection System Design Guidelines (Continued) WET BENCH EXAMPLE: 1000 CFM THRU BENCH

1 FT.-8 IN. (.5 m)

0 FT.-11 IN. (.3 m)

7 FT.-7 IN. (2.3 m)

1 FT.-11 IN. 2 FT.-7 IN. (.6 m)

000758

(.8 m)

A sample problem is included to help explain the design procedure. Hazard: Open Face Wet Bench Work Area: Length: 7 ft. 7 in. (2.3 m) Width: 2 ft. 7 in. (.8 m) Plenum Area: Length: 7 ft. 7 in. (2.3 m) Width: 2 ft. 7 in (.8 m) Height: 1 ft. 11 in. (.6 m) First, determine the CO2 requirements for the work area. The design requirements will be calculated by the local application – Rate by Volume Method. Working Surface Protection – Local Application – Rate of Volume Method Step No. 1 – Determine volume –Length 7.6 ft. (2.3 m) x Width 2.6 ft. (.8 m) x Height 0.1 ft. (2.5 cm) = 1.9 cu. ft. (.05 cu. m). Note: The height of 0.1 ft. (2.5 cm) is always used for calculation purposes. Step No. 2 – Determine Assumed Volume –Based on standard design requirements, 2 ft. (.6 m) must be added to the height of the hazard and 2 ft. (.6 m) must be added to the width. This is required because these are not enclosed by actual walls. Assumed Volume = Length 7.6 ft. (2.3 m) x Width 4.6 ft. (1.4 m) x Height 2.1 ft. (.6 m) = 73.4 cu. ft. (2.1 cu. m). Step No. 3 – Determine % of closed perimeter –The % of closed perimeter is determined by dividing the actual closed perimeter by the total perimeter and then multiplying by 100. The actual closed perimeter is 7.6 ft. (2.3 m) + 1.7 ft. (.5 m) + 1.7 ft. (.5 m) =11.0 ft. (3.4 m). The assumed volume total perimeter is 7.6 ft. (2.3 m) + 7.6 ft. (2.3 m) + 4.6 ft. (1.4 m) + 4.6 ft. (1.4 m) = 24.4 ft. (7.4 m). 11.0 ft. (3.4 m) divided by 24.4 ft. (7.4 m) = 0.46 x 100 = 46% closed perimeter. Step No. 4 – Determine Nozzle Discharge Rate –Refer to the chart in Figure 16, Page 6-12 of this section. As determined in Step No. 2, 46% closed perimeter requires a minimum flow rate of 0.66 #/min./CF. Step No. 5 – Determine Total Agent Required –Based on the above steps, the total agent required for local application – rate by volume, can now by determined. Total agent required = Assumed Volume x Flow Rate per Minute Per Cu. Ft. x 1.4 (liquid factor) x .5 (minimum discharge time) 73.4 cu. ft. (assumed volume) x 0.66 (flow rate per min. per cu. ft.) = 48.4 lb./minute. 48.4 lb./min. x 1.4 (liquid factor) x .5 (minimum discharge time in minutes) = 33.9 lbs of agent required. Step No. 6 – Determine Number of Nozzles Required –Based on the limitation listed above, the maximum height from the face of the nozzle to the working surface of the wet bench is 33 in. (84 cm). In this example, the nozzle will be mounted at a height of 30 in. (76 cm). Referring to Figure 9 on Page 6-6, at 30 in. (76 cm) height, the “D” nozzle has a FM flow rate of 20.0 lb./minute.


Open Face Wet Bench CO2 Fire Protection System Design Guidelines (Continued) Working Surface Protection – Local Application – Rate of Volume Method (Continued) 48.4 (lb./min) divided by 20.0 (flow rate per nozzle) = 2.4 nozzles required. This number must be rounded up to the next whole number of 3. Therefore, the surface protection requires 33.9 lbs. of agent and 3 nozzles. Nozzles are to be mounted and aimed per the standard local application guidelines. See Section 6, Pages 6-5 – 6-6. Now, determine the total flooding requirements for the plenum area (below bench). Plenum Area Protection – Total Flooding Step No. 1 – Determine Hazard Volume – The under bench volume is Length 7.6 ft. (2.3 m) x Width 2.6 ft. (.8 m)) x Height 1.9 ft. (.6 m) = 37.5 cu. ft. (1.1 cu m). Step No. 2 – Determine Initial Quantity of Agent Required –Refer to Volume Factors Chart on Page 6-2, Figure 2. For volumes up to 140 cu. ft. (3.9 cu. m), the volume factor of 0.072 must be used. 37.5 cu. ft. x 0.072 (volume factor) = 2.7 lbs. of agent The next step is to increase the amount of agent if the minimum design concentration is greater than 34%. Referring to the limitations stated above, the minimum design concentration must be 50%. Step No. 3 – Determine Adjusted Quantity of Agent Required – It is determined that a 50% design concentration is required. Based on the “Material Conversion Factors Chart” on Page 6-2, Figure 3, the conversion factor for 50% design concentration is 1.6. The adjusted quantity of agent required is determined by: 2.7 lbs. (agent quantity) x 1.6 (conversion factor) = 4.3 lbs. of agent required Step No. 4 – Ventilation Requirements –This wet bench has 1000 CFM of air moving through it. The additional ventilation adjustment quantity is determined by: Ventilation Adjustment Quantity = CFM x Volume Factor x Conversion Factor x Discharge Time in Minutes 1000 (CFM) x 0.072 (volume factor) x 1.6 (conversion factor) x .5 (discharge time) = 57.6 additional lbs. of agent required Step No. 5 – Amount of Total Flooding Agent Required –Add the quantity of agent determined in Step Nos. 3 and 4. 4.3 lbs. + 57.6 lbs. = 61.9 lbs. required for total flooding system. Step No. 6 – Determine Number of Nozzles Required –Based on the limitations stated above, the maximum spacing for total flooding wet bench nozzles is 8 ft.. This example hazard is 7.6 ft. (2.3 m) long, therefore one (1) nozzle is required. Based on FM approval testing, the total flooding “D” nozzle should be mounted at the sidewall in the under bench area to discharge horizontally. Additional nozzles are to be spaced no greater than 8 ft. (2.4 m) apart. Total Wet Bench System Requirements The total quantity of agent required = 33.9 lbs. (local application) + 61.9 lbs. (total flooding) = 95.8 lbs. total. Standard hydraulic calculations can now be performed to determine pipe sizes and nozzle orifice sizes. NOTE: Verification shall be made from the hydraulic calculations that the minimum discharge nozzle pressure of 600 psi and the flowrate as calculated for the specific height is achieved. A flowrate in excess of that calculated for the discharge nozzle height may cause a splash hazard upon discharge of the carbon dioxide fire extinguishing system. Installation Guidelines • Always use the “CR” D nozzle in corrosive type areas.* • Make certain blow off cap is in place on the installed nozzle. Use installation tool, Part No. 426206, for proper blow off cap installation. • All piping joints (fittings) and piping located in the corrosive environment must be protected using extruded Teflon tubing (TFE) or heat shrink tubing (TFE). • When using heat shrink tubing, make certain all exposed threads are covered. • If extruded Teflon or heat shrink tubing are not used, the recommended piping is stainless steel. • Follow all other installation piping requirements as stated in the Installation section of the Ansul Carbon Dioxide System Design Manual. NOTE: Make certain all pipe and fittings are clean of any chips, oil, or dirt prior to installing. Inspection Inspection should be performed in accordance with the Ansul Carbon Dioxide System Design Manual and NFPA 12. *FM APPROVAL OF THE (CR) “D” NOZZLE IS LIMITED TO NON-CORROSIVE ENVIRONMENTS.


715-735-7411

Form No. F-97137


Litho in U.S.A.

DATA

SPEC

2. MANUFACTURER Ansul Incorporated One Stanton Street Marinette, WI 54143-2542 Phone: (715) 735-7411 FAX: (715) 732-3479

ANSUL®

The ten-point Spec-Data® format has been reproduced from publications copyrighted by CSI, 1964, 1965, 1966, 1967, and used by permission of The Construction Specifications Institute, Alexandria, VA 22314. 002690

15300

FIRE PROTECTION Carbon Dioxide Extinguishing Systems

bon dioxide systems: • Printing presses • Vaults • Open pits • Dip tanks • Spray booths • Ovens • Engine rooms • Coating machines • Process equipment • Hoods and ducts • Flammable gas or liquid storage areas • Generators Composition and Materials: The basic system consists of agent (CO2) stored in high strength alloy steel cylinders. Various types of actuators, either manual or automatic, are available for release of the agent into the hazard area. The agent is distributed and discharged into the hazard area through a network of piping and nozzles. Each nozzle is equipped with a fixed orifice designed to deliver a uniform discharge to the protected area. On large hazards, where three or more cylinders are required, a screwed or welded pipe manifold assembly is employed. The manifold assembly is connected to each cylinder by means of a flexible discharge bend and check valve assembly. Additional equipment includes: remote manual pull stations, corner pulleys, door closures, pressure trips, bells and sirens, transfer switches, time delays, pneumatic switches, and weighing devices. All or some are required when designing a total system. CO2 Agent – Carbon dioxide is an effective fire extinguishing agent that can be used on many types of fires. It is effective for surface fires, such as flammable liquids and most solid combustible materials. It expands at a ratio of 450 to 1 by vol-

15

3. PRODUCT DESCRIPTION The Ansul Carbon Dioxide (CO2) Fire Suppression System is an engineered system utilizing either a fixed nozzle agent distribution network, hose reel(s), or a combination of both. The system is Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) listed, Factory Mutual (FM) approved, and designed in accordance with the latest revision of the National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Standard 12, ‘‘Carbon Dioxide Extinguishing Systems.’’ When properly designed, the carbon dioxide system will extinguish fire in Class A, B, and C hazards by displacing the air containing oxygen which supports combustion. The system can be actuated by detection and control equipment for automatic system operation along with providing local and remote

manual operation as needed. Accessories are used to provide alarms, delay discharge, ventilation control, door closures, or other auxiliary shutdown or functions. Due to the method of extinguishment, personnel occupying areas protected by carbon dioxide systems must be evacuated prior to system discharge. For this reason, discharge time delays and alarms are mandatory for occupied hazards. Two or more hazard areas can be protected with a single group of agent storage containers (cylinders) by means of directional or selector valves. A system installation and maintenance manual is available containing information on system components and procedures concerning design, maintenance, and recharge. The system is installed and serviced by authorized distributors that are trained by the manufacturer. Basic Use: The Ansul Carbon Dioxide system is particularly useful for suppressing fires in hazards where an electrically non-conductive medium is essential or desirable; where clean-up of other agents presents a problem; or where the hazard obstructions require the use of a gaseous agent. The following are typical hazards protected by car-

Ansul Incorporated February 1991

15

1. PRODUCT NAME Ansul Carbon Dioxide (CO2) Fire Suppression System

ANSUL®


®


This Spec-Data sheet conforms to editorial style prescribed by The Construction Specifications Institute. The manufacturer is responsible for technical accuracy.

ume. For fire suppression purposes the discharge is designed to raise the carbon dioxide concentration in the hazard. This displaces the air containing oxygen which supports combustion, and results in fire extinguishment. Other attributes are its high degree of effectiveness, its excellent thermal stability, and freedom from deterioration. It has a low toxicity classification by Underwriters Laboratories (Group 5a). Cylinders – The cylinders are constructed, tested, and marked in accordance with applicable Dept. of Transportation (DOT) and the U.S. Bureau of Explosives specifications. Cylinder Assembly – The cylinder assembly is of steel construction with a red enamel or epoxy finish. Five sizes are available to meet specific needs. Each is equipped with a pressure seat-type CV90 valve. The valve is of forged brass and is attached to the cylinder providing a leak tight seal. The valve also includes a safety pressure relief device which provides relief at 2650 to 3000 psi (18269 to 20682 kPa). Cylinder charging pressure is 850 psi at 70 °F (5861 kPa at 21 °C) with a filling density of not more than 68% of its water capacity. The cylinders are shipped with a maintenance record card and shipping cap attached. The cap is attached to the threaded collar on the neck of each cylinder to protect the valve while in transit. The cylinder serial number along with the full and empty weight capacities are stamped near the neck of each cylinder. Electric Actuator – Electric actuation of an agent cylinder is accomplished by an electric actuator interfaced through an AUTOPULSE® Control System. This actuator can be used in hazardous environments where the ambient temperature range is between 0 °F and 130 °F (–18 °C and 130 °C). In auxiliary or override applications, a manual override valve actuator can be installed on top of the electric actuator. An arming tool is required to reset (arm) the electric actuator after operation. Manual/Pneumatic Actuators – Several types of manual/pneumatic actuators are available for override manual/pneumatic actuation on the electric actuator or direct manual/ pneumatic actuation on the cylinder

valve. Manual actuation is accomplished by pulling the hand lever on the actuator. The lever design contains a forged mechanical detent which secures the lever in the open position when actuated. A manuallocal actuator is available to provide either a manual or pneumatic means for a remote pressure release from a remote pressure device. Direct manual actuation of this actuator is accomplished by pulling the ring pin and depressing the red palm button on top of the actuator. Detection System – The AUTOPULSE Control System is used where an automatic electronic control system is required to actuate a fixed carbon dioxide system. This control system is used to control a single fixed fire suppression or alarm system based on inputs received from fire detection devices. The detection circuits can be configured using cross, counting, independent or priority-zone (counting) concepts. The control system has been tested to the applicable FCC Rules and Regulations for Class A Computing devices. Nozzles – Nozzles are designed to direct the discharge of carbon dioxide in a liquid and gaseous state using the stored pressure from the cylinders. The system design specifies the orifice size to be used for proper flow rate and distribution pattern. The nozzle selection depends on the hazard and location to be protected. Both low velocity and high velocity nozzles may be used for total flooding. Low velocity nozzles are generally used for direct application to a flammable liquid fire. Both types of nozzles can be adapted for a specific hazard by sizing the orifice to achieve the designed flow rate and concentration. Standard nozzles are painted red or are natural brass, depending on type. Optional chrome plating is also available. All are corrosion resistant and, where the hazard warrants, are equipped with blow-off caps or sealing discs. Limitations: The carbon dioxide system must be designed and installed within the guidelines of the manufacturer’s design, installation, recharge, and maintenance manual. The ambient temperature limitations are 0 °F to 130 °F (–18 °C to 54 °C) for total flooding and 32 °F to 120 °F (0 °C to 49 °C) for local applica-

tions. All AUTOPULSE Control Systems are designed for indoor applications and for temperature ranges between 32 °F and 120 °F (0 °C and 49 °C). 4. TECHNICAL DATA Applicable Standards: UL listed under EX-2968; USCG approved under Approval No. 162.038/7/0; meets requirements of NFPA Standard 12 ‘‘Carbon Dioxide Extinguishing Systems;’’ approved by Factory Mutual Research Corporation; AUTOPULSE Control System meets requirements of NFPA 70 (Standard for National Electrical Code) and NFPA 72 (Standard for Protective Signaling Systems). 5. INSTALLATION All system components and accessories must be installed by personnel trained by the manufacturer. All installations must be performed according to the guidelines stated in the manufacturer’s design, installation, recharge, and maintenance manual. 6. AVAILABILITY AND COST Availability: The Ansul Carbon Dioxide Systems are sold and serviced through an international network of independent distributors located in most states and many foreign countries. Cost: Cost varies with type of system specified, size, and design. 7. WARRANTY Warranty: The components of the fire suppression system supplied by Ansul Incorporated (‘‘Ansul’’) are warranted to you as the original purchaser for one year from the date of delivery against defects in workmanship and material. Ansul will replace or repair any Ansul-supplied components, which, in its opinion, are defective and has not been tampered with or subjected to misuse, abuse, or exposed to highly corrosive conditions provided that written notice of the alleged defect shall have been given to Ansul within 30 days after discovery thereof and prior to the expiration of one year after delivery, and further provided that if Ansul so instructs, such article or part thereof is promptly returned to Ansul with shipping charges prepaid. Disclaimer of Warranty and

Limitation of Damage: The warranty described above is the only one given by Ansul concerning this system. ANSUL MAKES NO OTHER WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, WHETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR PARTICULAR PURPOSE. ANSUL’S MAXIMUM RESPONSIBILITY FOR ANY CLAIMS WHETHER IN CONTRACT, TORT, NEGLIGENCE, BREACH OF WARRANTY, OR STRICT LIABILITY SHALL BE LIMITED TO THE PURCHASE PRICE OF THE SYSTEM. UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL ANSUL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES OF ANY KIND. Ansul does not assume or authorize any other person to

assume for it any additional liability in connection with the sale of this system. For repairs, parts, and service of the Ansul fire suppression system, contact a local Ansul representative, or Ansul Fire Protection, Marinette, WI 54143-2542, (715) 735-7411. 8. MAINTENANCE Maintenance is a vital step in the performance of a fire suppression system. As such, it must be performed by an authorized Ansul distributor in accordance with NFPA 12 and the manufacturer’s design, installation, recharge, and maintenance manual. When replacing components on the Ansul system, use only Ansul approved parts.

9. TECHNICAL SERVICES For information on the proper design and installation of the Ansul Carbon Dioxide System, contact a local Ansul distributor. Ansul application engineering department is also available to answer design and installation questions. Call Ansul at (715) 735-7411. 10. FILING SYSTEMS Electronic SPEC-DATA® SPEC-DATA® II Carbon Dioxide Systems Manual Additional product information available upon request

ANSUL INCORPORATED, MARINETTE, WI 54143-2542

715-735-7411

2-91-2430

Form No. F-90181


Litho in U.S.A.

MANU

PART 1 GENERAL 1.01

SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Carbon Dioxide Fire Suppression System. Suitable for hazard areas such as printing presses, vaults, open pits, dip tanks, spray booths, ovens, engine rooms, coating machines, process equipment, hoods and ducts, flammable gas or liquid storage areas, computer rooms/subfloors, generators, and other similar areas.


15

ANSUL®

SECTION 15360 CARBON DIOXIDE EXTINGUISHING SYSTEMS

B. Related Sections: 1. Section 13900 – Fire Suppression and Supervisory Systems. 2. Section 16720 – Fire Alarm and Detection Systems. 1.02

REFERENCES

A. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 1. NFPA 12 – Standard on Carbon Dioxide Extinguishing Systems. 2. NFPA 70 – National Electrical Code. 3. NFPA 72 – Standard For Protective Signaling Systems. B. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) – Fire Protection Equipment Directory.

15

C. Factory Mutual Insurance (FM) Approval Guide. 1.03

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Design Requirements: 1. Shall be the engineered type. 2. Shall utilize [fixed nozzle agent distribution network.] [hose reel(s).] [combination of both fixed nozzle agent distribution network and hose reel(s).] 3. Shall be capable of automatic detection and [automatic] [remote manual] actuation. 4. Additional equipment shall be available for fuel shut-off where required. B. Performance Requirements: 1. Shall be capable of extinguishing fire in Class A, B, and C hazards. 2. CO2 agent shall dilute oxygen content of protected hazard to a point where it will not support combustion. 3. Detection system shall be tested to applicable FCC Rules and Regulations for Class ‘‘A’’ computing devices.

The Manu-Spec® format has been reproduced from publications copyrighted by CSI and is herein used by permission of The Construction Specifications Institute, Alexandria, VA 22314.

15300


ANSUL®

This Manu-Spec presents the manufacturer’s suggested proprietary specification in conformance with the CSI 3-Part Section Format. The manufacturer is solely responsible for content and references.

®


Ansul Incorporated One Stanton Street Marinette, WI 54143-2542 Phone: (715) 735-7411 FAX: (715) 732-3479


SPEC

SPEC-DATA® PROGRAM

MANUFACTURER

1.04

SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit product data under provisions of Section [01300.] [01340.] B. Shop Drawing: Submit drawings under provisions of Section [01300.] [01340.] C. Quality Control Submittals: 1. Design Data: Submit design calculations under provisions of Section [01300.] [01340.] 2. Manufacturer’s Instructions: Submit manufacturer’s instructions for system maintenance and recharge under provisions of Section [01300.] [01360.] [01700.] [01730.] 1.05

QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Qualifications: 1. Manufacturer: The manufacturer of the system components shall have a minimum of 10 years experience in the manufacture and design of carbon dioxide fire suppression systems and related fire detection and control equipment. 2. Installer: The installer shall be authorized and trained by manufacturer to design, install, and maintain carbon dioxide fire suppression systems. B. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Conform to [Applicable] [____________] building code for requirements specified herein. 2. Codes and Permits: Conform to the local code requirements applicable to this section. Obtain and pay any necessary permits prior to beginning work involved in this section. 3. All system components must be UL listed as part of the manufacturer’s total system. 4. All system components must be approved by Factory Mutual Insurance (FM). 1.06

DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Acceptance at Site: 1. Deliver materials to job site in sealed, original containers bearing the manufacturer’s labels. 2. Materials arriving at site without labels, opened, damaged, or containing less material than specified shall not be accepted for use. B. Storage and Protection: 1. Store, protect, and handle products at site under provisions of Section [01600.] [________.] 2. Materials shall be stored in a well ventilated area at temperatures between 0 °F and 130 °F (–18 °C and 54 °C). 1.07

PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Requirements: 1. Carbon Dioxide System: a. Total Flood System: 0 °F to 130 °F (–18 °C to 54 °C) ambient temperature range of protected area. b. Local Application: 32 °F to 120 °F (0 °C to 49 °C) ambient temperature range of protected area. 2. AUTOPULSE® Control System: a. Indoor application only with 32 °F to 120 °F (0 °C to 49 °C) ambient temperature range. 1.08

SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

A. Coordinate work performed under this section with work specified in Section [13900.] [16720.] [_____________.] 1.09

MAINTENANCE

A. Maintenance Service: Shall be provided by an authorized, factory trained representative in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01

MANUFACTURER

A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Ansul Incorporated, One Stanton Street, Marinette, WI 54143-2542.

2.02

SYSTEM

A. Ansul Carbon Dioxide Fire Suppression System. 2.03

COMPONENTS

A. CO2 Agent: 1. A clean, dry, non-corrosive, non-damaging, non-deteriorating chemical. B. Cylinder: 1. Constructed, tested, and marked in accordance with applicable Department of Transportation (DOT) and U.S. Bureau of Explosives specifications. C. Cylinder Assembly: 1. Steel construction with a red enamel or epoxy finish available in five sizes, and equipped with a pressure seat-type CV90 valve. 2. Valve constructed of forged brass. 3. Valve contains safety pressure relief device which provides relief at 2650 to 3000 psi (18269 to 20682 kPa). 4. Cylinder charging pressure to be a minimum 850 psi at 70 °F (5861 kPa at 21 °C) with a filling density of not more than 68% of its water capacity. 5. Cylinder shipped with maintenance record card and shipping cap attached. 6. Cylinder serial number, along with the full and empty weight capacities, stamped near neck of cylinder. D. Electric Actuator: 1. Electrical actuation of agent cylinder to be accomplished by an electric actuator interfaced through compatible control panel by system manufacturer. 2. Actuator capable of being used in hazardous environments where ambient temperature range is between 0 °F and 130 °F (–18 °C and 54 °C). An arming tool is required to reset the electric actuator after operation. E.

Manual/Pneumatic Actuator: 1. Several types of manual/pneumatic actuators available for providing manual/pneumatic actuation of cylinder valve. Manual actuation accomplished by pulling hand lever on the actuator. Pneumatic actuation accomplished by a remote pressure device.

F.

Detection System: 1. AUTOPULSE Control System used where an automatic electronic control system is required to actuate a fixed carbon dioxide system. 2. Used to operate a single fixed fire suppression or alarm system based on inputs received from fire detection devices. 3. Circuits to be configured using cross, counting, independent or priority-zone concepts.

G. Nozzles: 1. Designed to direct discharge of carbon dioxide in a liquid or gaseous state. 2. Orifice size determined by flow rate and system design required. 3. Standard nozzles to be natural brass or painted red. 4. Optional chrome plating available. 5. All nozzles to be corrosion resistant and, if needed, equipped with blow-off caps or sealing discs. H. Distribution Piping: 1. Meets requirements of ASTM [A53] [A106] specifications. 2. Distribution lines up to 3/4 in. diameter shall be Schedule 40 seamless steel pipe, [black iron.] [galvanized.] 3. Distribution lines greater than 3/4 in. diameter shall be Schedule 80 seamless steel pipe, [black iron.] [galvanized.] 4. For pipe sizes up to 2 in. diameter, Class 300 [malleable] [ductile] iron fittings shall be used. For pipe larger than 2 in. diameter, IPS and forged steel fittings shall be used.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01

EXAMINATION

A. Verification of Conditions: The contractor shall verify that area being protected by carbon dioxide system meets requirements of NFPA 12. 3.02

INSTALLATION

A. The contractor shall install system in accordance with manufacturer’s design, installation, recharge, and maintenance manual. Field testing can be waived by the authority having jurisdiction. Delete Article 3.03 if testing is not required. 3.03

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Tests: Field testing of system shall be conducted by personnel authorized and trained by the manufacturer. 3.04

DEMONSTRATION

A. Instruct owner’s personnel in the operation of [equipment] [system] under provisions of Section [01670.] [____________.] 3.05

SCHEDULES

Consult with the authority having jurisdiction or other qualified person for a recommended format. A. System Component:

Quality:

Location:

________________________

________________________

________________________

________________________

________________________

________________________

________________________

________________________

________________________

END OF SECTION

ANSUL INCORPORATED, MARINETTE, WI 54143-2542

715-735-7411

2-91-2354

Form No. F-90230


Litho in U.S.A.

ANSUL

Section 4



6-19-98 REV. 1

General Information CARBON DIOXIDE

TYPES OF SYSTEMS

Carbon dioxide, as an extinguishing agent, has many desirable properties. It will not damage equipment and leaves no residue to be cleaned up. Since it is a gas, carbon dioxide will penetrate and spread to all parts of the protected hazard. It does not conduct electricity and, therefore, can be used on live electrical equipment. It can be effectively used on most combustible material.

There are two basic types of systems: total flooding and local application.

Carbon dioxide extinguishes fire by reducing the oxygen concentration to a point where the atmosphere will no longer support combustion. The carbon dioxide concentration must be maintained for a sufficient period to allow the maximum temperature to be reduced below the auto-ignition temperature of the burning material. Carbon dioxide is most effective against flammable liquid fires. For most flammable liquids, reduction of the oxygen concentration to 15% (from the normal 21%) will be sufficient to extinguish the fire. For Class A (wood, and paper) combustibles, a reduction to 15% will control the fire. Some materials, such as acetylene and ethylene oxide, require a greater reduction of oxygen concentration for extinguishment. Still other materials, such as cellulose nitrate and metal hydrides, which do not require oxygen as they burn, cannot be extinguished by use of carbon dioxide.

Total Flooding A total flooding system normally consists of a fixed supply of carbon dioxide connected to fixed piping with nozzles to direct the agent into an enclosed space about the hazard. In a total flooding system, the space around the hazard must be tight enough to hold the required percentage of carbon dioxide concentration long enough to extinguish the fire. Local Application A local application system consists of a fixed supply of carbon dioxide, piping, and nozzles to direct the agent at the hazard independent of any enclosure that may exist. The nozzles are arranged to discharge the carbon dioxide directly onto the burning material.

TYPES OF ACTUATION There are four basic types of actuation for carbon dioxide systems: pneumatic, mechanical, electrical, and rate of rise (H.A.D.). Pneumatic

PERSONNEL SAFETY !

CAUTION

The discharge of carbon dioxide into an enclosed space can create a dangerous oxygen deficiency. It can also reduce visibility to a point where exits are difficult to locate by persons attempting to evacuate the area. Any use of carbon dioxide in an occupied space should provide for the prompt evacuation of personnel and resuscitation of anyone trapped in the hazard area. Time delays, training, signs, alarms, and breathing apparatus should be provided to the personnel involved.

Pneumatic actuation utilizes gas pressure from either a remote cartridge actuator or from a cartridge located in a control panel such as an ANSUL AUTOMAN II-C release. A pneumatic actuator is installed on top of the CV-90 cylinder valve. The gas pressure forces the piston of the pneumatic actuator down, which in turn forces the cylinder valve to open, releasing the carbon dioxide from the cylinder, through the piping and out the nozzles. On a CV-98 valve, a 1/4 in. actuation line is attached to the 1/4 in. port on the side of the valve. Pneumatic pressure from the ANSUL AUTOMAN II-C or pilot cylinder opens the valve through this port. Mechanical Mechanical actuation is accomplished by either a local/manual override or a lever actuator mounted on top of the cylinder valve. By manually depressing the strike button on the local/manual override or rotating the lever on the lever actuator, the cylinder valve can be opened, allowing the carbon dioxide to discharge through the piping and nozzles.

4-1

Section 4 – General Information 6-19-98 REV. 1 TYPES OF ACTUATION (Continued)

Mechanical (Fusible Link)

Electrical

The mechanical detection system consists of a mechanical release enclosure which houses the release mechanism and a nitrogen cartridge. The release mechanism is actuated when the fusible link wire rope network, normally under tension, is relaxed, due to the link separating because of heat in the hazard area. When the link separates, the release operates, puncturing the seal in the nitrogen cartridge. This nitrogen pressure will then operate the pneumatic actuator located on the cylinder valve. This will cause the carbon dioxide to be released into the piping network and discharged out the nozzles.

Electrical automatic actuation of the CV-90 cylinder valve, through an approved control panel, can be accomplished by using an HF electric actuator. Electrical automatic actuation of the CV-98 cylinder valve can be accomplished by using a CV-98 electrical actuator. NOTE: CV-98 and HF actuators cannot be mixed on the same release circuit. Both styles of actuator are energized by an electric signal from the detection control panel. When using either style of electric actuator, pneumatic or mechanical actuating devices can also be attached as a secondary means of actuation. Rate of Rise (H.A.D.) Another type of automatic actuation can be accomplished by the use of a heat actuated device (H.A.D.). This device is designed to sense abrupt changes in temperature caused by fire. This temperature rise causes a small increase in pressure in the pneumatic detection circuit which in turn actuates a mechanical device mounted on top of the cylinder valve.

TYPES OF DETECTION There are three types of automatic detection available for carbon dioxide systems. One type is pneumatic (H.A.D.), one type is electric (control panel), and the other type is mechanical (fusible link). H.A.D. (Rate of Rise) The H.A.D. detection system consists of a mechanical control head mounted on the cylinder valve. Pneumatic tubing is run to a pneumatic detector. An increase in temperature of the air surrounding the detector will cause an increase in pressure in the pneumatic detection circuit, which in turn will cause the control head located on the cylinder valve to actuate the valve and release the carbon dioxide into the piping network and out the discharge nozzles. Electric Electric operation of the carbon dioxide system is obtained through the use of electronic control systems which monitor and control various system functions. Detection devices available are: ionization smoke detectors, photoelectric smoke detectors, fixed temperature detectors, rate-of-rise heat detectors, flame detectors, or combustible vapor detectors. When a detector senses a fire, a signal is sent to the control panel. The panel in turn sends an electric signal to the actuator located on the cylinder valve. The actuator opens the cylinder valve causing the carbon dioxide to be released into the piping network and discharged out the nozzles.

4-2

ANSUL

Section 5



Planning One of the key elements for fire protection is to correctly define the hazard and choose the best application method. This section is divided into two sub-sections: Application Methods and Hazard Analysis.

APPLICATION METHODS Two types of approved application methods are available with the carbon dioxide system: total flooding and local application. Total Flooding Total flooding is defined as a system consisting of a fixed supply of carbon dioxide permanently connected to fixed piping, with fixed nozzles arranged to discharge carbon dioxide into an enclosed space or enclosure about the hazard. The enclosure must be adequate to contain the discharge of agent to achieve the required carbon dioxide concentration. Examples of this type of enclosure include rooms, vaults, and machine enclosures. Local Application Local application is defined as a system consisting of a fixed supply of carbon dioxide permanently connected to a system of fixed piping with nozzles arranged so as to discharge the agent directly into the fire. Local application systems are used for the suppression of surface fires in flammable liquids, gases, and shallow solids where the hazard is not enclosed or where the enclosure does not conform to the requirements for total flooding. Examples of hazards that may be successfully protected by local application systems include dip tanks, quench tanks, oil-filled electric transformer, etc. Local application systems are divided into two types: rate-by-area and rate-by-volume. Rate-by-area method of system design is used where the fire hazard consists primarily of flat surfaces or low-level objects associated with horizontal surfaces. The rate-by-volume method of system design is used where the fire hazard consists of three-dimensional irregular objects that cannot be easily reduced to equivalent surface areas.

HAZARD ANALYSIS A thorough hazard analysis is required to determine the type and quantity of protection required. It is important to cover each element and accurately record the information. This information will be used to determine the size and type of carbon dioxide system required and also to determine at a later date if any changes were made to the hazard after the system was installed. Record size of hazard, any obstructions, unclosable openings, and anything else that would concern system performance. Review each of the following criteria: Hazard Type Briefly describe the types of hazards being protected. If protecting prefabricated booths or machines, record the manufacturer model number and anything unique about the hazard. Hazard Dimensions Sketch hazard and record all pertinent dimensions including all interior walls, location of doors and windows, and any permanent structures which may interfere with piping or discharge pattern. Unclosable Openings For enclosures that have unclosable openings, the following rules must be observed when total flooding: For surface fires, such as occur with flammable liquids, the total area of unclosable openings must not exceed 3% of the volume of the enclosure. These unclosable openings must be compensated for by an additional quantity of carbon dioxide equal to the anticipated loss during a oneminute holding time. If the hazard could result in a deep-seated fire, any opening that cannot be closed at the time of extinguishment shall be compensated for by the addition of carbon dioxide equal in volume to the expected leakage volume during the extinguishing period. If leakage is appreciable, consideration shall be given to an extended discharge system.

5-1

Section 5 – Planning

HAZARD ANALYSIS (Continued) Unclosable Openings (Continued) Openings leading to adjacent areas containing hazards can be protected in several ways. The opening may be equipped with automatic closures operated by pressure trip devices which close the openings upon system actuation. Or, screening nozzles may be installed at the opening areas to prevent fire from spreading through the opening to adjacent areas. Any additional carbon dioxide required for screening the opening must be adjusted if the temperatures are outside the normal design range. Types of Fires Types of fires which can be extinguished by total flooding may be divided into two categories: surface fires involving flammable liquids, gases and solids, and deep-seated fires involving solids subject to smoldering. Local application systems can be used only for surface fire protection. SURFACE FIRES – Are the most common hazards particularly adaptable to extinguishment by total flooding systems. They are subject to prompt extinguishment when carbon dioxide is quickly introduced into the enclosure in sufficient quantity to overcome leakage and provide an extinguishing concentration for the particular materials involved. DEEP-SEATED – For deep-seated fires, the required extinguishing concentration shall be maintained for a sufficient period of time to allow the smoldering to be extinguished and the material to cool to a point at which reignition will not occur. The hazard should be inspected immediately after to make certain extinguishment is complete. Cooking oils and grease will require longer discharge.

CLASS B – FLAMMABLE LIQUID AND GAS FIRES – These fires involve such materials as oils, greases, tars, oilbased paints, lacquers, and gasoline. NOTE: Specific fuel must be identified as it will determine total flood concentration requirements. CLASS C – ENERGIZED ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT FIRES – Common Class C devices include control rooms, transformers, oil switches, circuit breakers, rotating equipment, pumps, and motors. Carbon dioxide is NOT effective on the following types of fires: • Class D combustible metals such as sodium, potassium, magnesium, titanium, and zirconium. • Chemicals containing their own oxygen supply, such as cellulose nitrate. • Metal hydrides Ventilation Considerations The hazard ventilation system is very important when considering total flooding application, but should also be considered for local application. If possible, the ventilation system should be shut down and/or dampered before or simultaneously with the start of the carbon dioxide discharge. If the ventilation system cannot be shut down, the volume of air moved by the system during the discharge period must be added to the enclosure volume if a total flooding designed system is required. Consider installing dampers wherever possible to restrict the fire to the protected area and enhance the fire protection.

Hazard Atmosphere

Electrical Considerations

The carbon dioxide system can be used in most industrial environments. If the hazard is designed as explosion-proof, the control system, releasing devices and electric valve actuators (if not approved for hazardous environments) must be located away from the hazard area and the system must be remotely piped to the area. Only the detectors, distribution piping, nozzles, or other nonelectrical parts may be located in the hazard.

It is recommended that all electrical power sources associated with the protected hazard be shut down before system discharge. This eliminates the potential of a fire being electrically-reignited.

Hazardous Material Carbon dioxide is an effective agent to suppress the following types of fires: CLASS A – SURFACE FIRES: These fires involve ordinary combustible materials such as cloth, paper, rubber, and many plastics.

5-2

In addition to the above, review the following statements: LIVE UNINSULATED HIGH VOLTAGE WIRE – For minimum clearances of live uninsulated high voltage wire, refer to NFPA 12 “Electrical Clearances.’’ Reduced clearance can result in line spikes being fed into the control system, releasing devices, or field wiring circuits. 120 VAC PRIMARY POWER SOURCE – Determine if a 120 VAC primary power source is available for the control system or releasing device operation. The control system or releasing device requires an independent 120 VAC 50/60 Hz circuit. System wiring must comply with all local codes and applicable NFPA Standards.


HAZARD ANALYSIS (Continued) Temperature Range The following temperature ranges must be determined and noted to ensure proper placement and operation of the carbon dioxide and detection control components: HAZARD AREA – Determine the minimum and maximum temperature of the hazard to be protected. This temperature may be any temperature that the distribution piping and detectors can withstand only if the agent tank, control system, or accessories are located outside of the hazard area. For extreme temperature conditions, the following compensations must be made:

DISCHARGE TEST – Determine if a discharge test is required. A discharge test will require proper preparation and will affect your total cost estimate. AUTHORITY HAVING JURISDICTION – Contact the enduser or authority having jurisdiction to establish the requirements for: • Minimum/maximum detector spacing; • Type of detection and control system that is acceptable; • Final inspection or discharge test required; • If reserve system is required; • What audible and/or visual alarm devices may be required.

• If the enclosure temperature is above 200 °F (93 °C), the quantity of agent must be increased by 1% for each five degrees above 200° F (93 °C). • If the temperature is below 0 °F (–18 °C), the agent quantity must be increased by 1% for each one degree below 0 °F (–18 °C). AGENT CYLINDER – The carbon dioxide cylinder must be located in an area with a temperature range from 0 °F to 130 °F (–18 °C to 54 °C). DETECTION/CONTROL SYSTEM –The detection/control system must be located in an area with a temperature range from 32 °F to 120 °F (0 °C to 49 °C). Other Factors That Influence System Planning The following additional factors require consideration to perform a thorough hazard analysis: HANDICAPPED PERSONNEL – Care should be taken that proper signs and visual devices are placed so all personnel are aware that the system has been activated. RESPONSE TIME OF FIREFIGHTING SERVICE – Establish the maximum time required for firefighting service to respond to an alarm. This information can be used to determine if a reserve system is required. The reserve system can provide a second discharge in the event of a fire reflash. RESERVE SYSTEM – If a reserve carbon dioxide system is required, determine if it should be permanently connected, or unconnected and located on the premises. The addition of a connected or unconnected reserve system will add to your job cost estimate. CYLINDER AND ACCESSORY LOCATION – Establish a location that is acceptable with the end-user and verify the following: • Temperature range is acceptable; • Piping limitations are not exceeded; • Components are not subject to damage or vandalism.

5-3


NOTES:

5-4

Section 6

ANSUL



Design After completing the hazard analysis sub-section in Section 5, Planning, proceed with the following elements to work up a complete design and bill of materials.

Minimum Carbon Dioxide Concentrations For Extinguishment

APPLICATION METHOD Choose one of the following approved application methods. Depending on the hazard, it may be necessary to combine different application methods on the total system. Total Flooding HAZARD VOLUME – Determine the hazard volume by physically measuring the enclosure and calculating its volume. Make a sketch noting any permanent installations that would affect the flow of the agent into the enclosure or affect piping installation. Note any partially enclosed areas that require special consideration to ensure complete flooding of the space. NFPA 12 states “in figuring the net cubic capacity to be protected, due allowance may be made for permanent nonremovable impermeable structures materially reducing the volume.’’ CALCULATING % OF UNCLOSABLE OPENING – The total area of unclosable openings must not exceed 3% of the total hazard area. To calculate the percent of unclosable opening, first total the surface area of the hazard walls, floor, and ceiling. Then total the area of all the unclosable openings. Once both totals have been recorded, divide the total area of all openings by the total area of the hazard and then multiply that number by 100. Total Unclosable Opening Area divided by Total Hazard Area x 100 = % of Unclosable Openings. The number arrived at will be the percentage of unclosable openings. If the number is above 3%, arrangements must be made to close some of the openings upon discharge of the system. AGENT QUANTITY – The quantity of agent required for extinguishment is dependent upon whether the fire is a surface-type or deep-seated. • Surface Fires: It is assumed that extinguishment will occur as soon as the necessary concentration is achieved. Minimum design concentration for many common flammable liquids are given in Figure 1. For materials not listed in this table, values must be obtained from a recognized source or obtained by testing. The minimum design concentration used for any hazard must not be less than 34%.

Material Acetylene Acetone Aviation Gas Grades 115/145 Benzol, Benzene Butadiene Butane Butane-1 Carbon Disulfide Carbon Monoxide Coal or Natural Gas Cyclopropane Diethyl Ether Dimethyl Ether Dowtherm Ethane Ethyl Alcohol Ethyl Ether Ethylene Ethylene Dichloride Ethylene Oxide Gasoline Hexane Higher Paraffin Hydrocarbons Cm H2m + 2m - 5 Hydrogen Hydrogen Sulfide Isobutane Isobutylene Isobutyl Formate JP-4 Kerosene Methane Methyl Acetate Methyl Alcohol Methyl Butene – I Methyl Ethyl Ketone Methyl Formate Pentane Propane Propylene Quench Lube Oils

Theoretical Min. CO2 Concentration (%)

Minimum Design CO2 Concentration (%)

55 27* 30

66 34 36

31 34 28 31 60 53 31* 31 33 33 38* 33 36 38* 41 21 44 28 29 28

37 41 34 37 72 64 37 37 40 40 46 40 43 46 49 34 53 34 35 34

62 30 30* 26 26 30 28 25 29 33 30 33 32 29 30 30 28

75 36 36 34 34 36 34 34 35 40 36 40 39 35 36 36 34

NOTE: The theoretical minimum extinguishing concentrations in air for the above materials were obtained from a compilation of Bureau of Mines Limits of Flammability of Gases and Vapors (Bulletins 503 and 627). Those marked with * were calculated from accepted residual oxygen values.

FIGURE 1

6-1

Section 6 – Design REV. 1

APPLICATION METHOD (Continued) Total Flooding (Continued) Because some carbon dioxide escapes from the enclosure with the displaced air, the actual amount of agent required is greater than the theoretical amount. For example, to achieve a carbon dioxide concentration of 34% would ideally require about one pound of carbon dioxide per 26 cubic feet of space. However, in actual practice, one pound of carbon dioxide is required per 22 cubic feet of space to achieve 34% concentration.

– For ventilating systems that cannot be shut down, additional carbon dioxide shall be added to the space through the regular distribution system in an amount computed by dividing the volume moved during the liquid discharge period by the flooding factor. This shall be multiplied by the material conversion factor when the design concentration is greater than 34 percent. – For extreme temperature conditions, the following compensations must be made:

For enclosures of less than 50,000 cubic feet, the minimum quantities of agent and volume factors given in Figure 2 must be adhered to.

If the enclosure temperature is above 200 °F (93 °C), the quantity of agent must be increased by 1% for each five degrees above 200 °F (93 °C).

Volume Factors Volume of Volume Factor Space (cu. ft. (cu. ft. (lb. CO2 inclusive) lb. CO2) cu. ft.)

Calculated Quantity (lb.) Not Less Than

If the temperature is below 0 °F (–17 °C), the agent quantity must be increased by 1% for each one degree below 0 °F (–17 °C).

Up to 140 141 - 500 501 - 1600 1601 - 4500 4501 - 50000 Over 50000

– 10 35 100 250 2500

14 15 16 18 20 22

.072 .067 .063 .056 .050 .046

FIGURE 2 The higher concentration achieved from using this table is based on the assumption that the leakage from a small enclosure will be greater on a volumetric basis, than from a large enclosure. If the minimum design concentration is greater than 34% for the hazard, the volume factor must be multiplied by the material conversion factor listed in Figure 3 to achieve the required greater concentration.

CONVERSION FACTOR

Material Conversion Factors

MINIMUM DESIGN CO2 CONCENTRATION – %

FIGURE 3 001858

Special conditions that may occur must be compensated for as follows: 6-2

To calculate the minimum agent quantity required for a total flooding surface fire, complete the following steps: 1. Refer to Figure 1 to determine the correct design concentration for the type of hazard material. Example: A 4500 cubic ft. hazard contains barrels of JP-4 fuel. Referring to the table, JP-4 fuel requires a carbon dioxide concentration of 36%. 2. Refer to the “Volume Factors” in Figure 2. Using the previously calculated hazard volume, determine the required amount of carbon dioxide by dividing the hazard volume (in cubic feet) by the Volume Factor for cu. ft./lb. CO2 (or multiply by lb. CO2/cu. ft.) determined in the table. Example: The sample hazard has a volume of 4500 cubic feet. Dividing 4500 cubic feet by 18 (volume factor) equals 250 lbs. of carbon dioxide required. If the sample hazard material had required a design concentration of 34%, no additional calculation steps would be required to determine total quantity of carbon dioxide. Because the example hazard requires 36% design concentration, an additional step must be completed to determine amount of carbon dioxide required. Continue with Step 3. 3. For materials requiring a design concentration greater than 34%, refer to Figure 3. After determining the amount of carbon dioxide required in Step 2, calculate the new amount required by following the graph in this figure. Example: The sample hazard contains JP-4 fuel. This fuel requires a design concentration of 36%. Find 36% on the bottom of the graph. Follow the line up until it intersects with the curved line. At that point, read across to the left to determine the conversion factor. In this case, the conversion factor is 1.1 on the left side of the graph. To complete the calculation, multiply the quantity of carbon dioxide determined in Step 2 (250 lbs.) by the conversion factor of 1.1 which equals 275. Therefore, 275 lbs. is the required amount of carbon dioxide needed for this sample hazard.


Total Flooding (Continued) After calculating the minimum amount of carbon dioxide required, add to it any additional carbon dioxide needed to compensate for loss through openings, extreme temperature ranges, etc., as stated in the beginning of this section. To determine the additional amount of CO2 required to compensate for the loss through the unclosable openings, refer to Figure 4. Determine the height from the top of the hazard down to the center of the unclosable opening. Find this dimension on the bottom line of the chart. Read up the chart to the diagonal line representing the % of CO2 being designed for. At that intersect point, read to the left to determine the leakage rate in lbs. of CO2 per minute per sq. ft. of opening. Finally, multiply this number by 1/2 of the sq. ft. area of the unclosable opening. This will now give the additional amount of CO2 required which must be added to the previous total. Remember, use only 1/2 of the total opening area since it is presumed that fresh air will enter through one-half of the opening and the protective gas will exit through the other half. The following example will help understand this calculation: – Based on the previous example requiring 275 lbs. of CO2, now assume that the hazard has one unclosable opening of 2 ft. x 3 ft. This is an area of 6 sq. ft. The center of the opening is 8 ft. down from the ceiling of the hazard. The JP-4 fuel requires a carbon dioxide concentration of 36%. Referring to the chart in Figure 4, find 8 ft. on the bottom line. Follow up the line until it intersects approximately 36% on the diagonal line. Reading over to the left gives a leakage rate of approximately 20 lbs. per min. per sq. ft. of opening. Now multiply 20 lbs. x 3 sq. ft. (1/2 the total opening area) = 60 lbs. 60 lbs. of additional CO2 must now be added to the original amount of 275 lbs. for a new total of 335 lbs.

100 90 80 70 60 50

CO 2 0% 10 90 80 70

40

Leakage Rate in lbs. CO2/min./sq. ft.

APPLICATION METHOD (Continued)

60

30

50 40

20 30

20

10 9 8 7 6 5

10

4 3 2

1

For SI Units 1 ft. = 0.302 m 1 lb./min./ft.2 = 4.89 kg/min./m2 1

2

3

4

5 6 7 8 9 10

20

30

40 50 60

80 100

Feet Height of Atmosphere Above Center of Opening

FIGURE 4 001859

•Deep-Seated Fires: For deep-seated fires, the concentration of agent must be maintained for a substantial period of time, but not less than 20 minutes, to assure extinguishment. This consideration demands that the enclosure be relatively leak proof. Any leakage must be given careful consideration. The agent concentration is dependent upon the type of combustible material present. See Figure 5 to determine the correct flooding factors for deep-seated fires. Flooding Factors For Specific Hazards (Deep Seated) Design Concentrations %

Flooding Factor (cu. (lb. ft./lb. CO2/ CO2 cu. ft.)

Specific Hazard

50

10

.100

Dry electric,wiring insulation hazards in general. Spaces 0-2000 cu ft.

50

12

.083

Spaces greater than 2000 cu ft.

65

8

.125

Record (bulk paper) storage, ducts, and covered trenches

75

6

.166

Fur storage vaults, dust collectors FIGURE 5 6-3

Section 6 – Design

APPLICATION METHOD (Continued) Total Flooding (Continued) Special situations must be given the same considerations previously mentioned under “special conditions,” Page 6-2. If the agent concentration must be maintained for an extended period of time, the agent discharge time must be increased accordingly to maintain the minimum concentration required. For unusually tight enclosures, venting may be required to prevent a dangerous buildup of pressure within the enclosure. Small leaks in normal enclosures have been found to provide adequate venting in most cases. To calculate the minimum agent quantity required for a deep-seated fire, complete the following steps: 1. Refer to Figure 5 to determine the correct design concentration for the type of material being protected. Example: 4000 cubic foot fur storage vault is being protected. This requires a concentration of 75%. 2. Again, referring to Figure 5, note the correct “Flooding Factor” to use for the type of material being protected. In this example, the correct flooding factor for a fur storage vault is 6. 3. To determine the required amount of carbon dioxide needed, divide the total hazard volume by the flooding factor volume. Example: The total hazard volume of this example is 4000 cubic feet. The required flooding factor is 6. Therefore, 4000 divided by 6 equals 667 lbs. of carbon dioxide required to protect this hazard. After calculating the minimum amount of carbon dioxide required, add to it any additional amount needed to compensate for loss through openings, extreme temperatures, ventilating systems, etc., as stated in the beginning of this section. NUMBER OF NOZZLES – There is no exact science when it comes to placing discharge nozzles in a hazard area. Some of the rules that should be followed are: • 20 ft. maximum spacing between nozzles – total flooding only • Not more than 10 ft. from a wall or major obstruction – total flooding only • Try not to locate the nozzle near an unclosable opening – unless using for screening • Make certain nothing interferes with the discharge pattern of the nozzle • Make certain the nozzle is not located so that it causes unduly splash of flammable liquids or creates dust clouds that might extend the fire, create an explosion, or otherwise adversely affect the contents of the enclosure.

6-4

When locating the nozzles, draw a sketch of the hazard and place the location of the nozzles on it. Dimension the location of the nozzles from the walls or major components in the hazard area. These locations and dimensions will be used later to determine piping lengths and number of fittings. NOZZLE TYPE – Again, there is no exact science when choosing a nozzle for total flooding. Some style nozzles are better suited for certain type of hazards than others. Listed below are the styles of available total flooding nozzles and a short description of their discharge characteristics and possible usage: • A or D Type Nozzle – Produces a soft discharge. Generally used in sub-floor areas where a too strong of discharge would drive the carbon dioxide out of the area. • Sealed Type Nozzle – Sealed to prevent dirt or vapors from getting into the piping network. Generally used in ducts, hoods, or enclosed machinery spaces. • Regular Type Nozzle – Produces a high velocity spray type pattern. Generally used in ducts and small enclosed hazards. • Baffle Type Nozzle – Fan shape pattern. Spreads agent rapidly. Most commonly used nozzle for rooms and enclosed spaces. Usually mounted near ceiling. EXTENDED RATE OF APPLICATION – Where leakage is appreciable and the design concentration must be obtained quickly and maintained for an extended period of time, carbon dioxide provided for leakage compensation may be applied at a reduced rate using small orifice nozzles. • This type of system is particularly applicable to enclosed rotating electrical apparatus, such as generators, motors, and convertors, but it may also be used on ordinary total flooding applications where suitable. The minimum design concentration shall be obtained within the limits specified below: • For surface fires, the design concentration shall be achieved within 1 minute. • If a part of the hazard is to be protected by total flooding, the discharge rate for the total flooding portion shall be computed by dividing the quantity required for total flooding by the factor 1.4 and by the time of the local application discharge in minutes. • For deep-seated fires, the design concentration shall be achieved within 7 minutes, but the rate shall be not less than that required to develop a concentration of 30 percent in 2 minutes.


APPLICATION METHOD (Continued) Total Flooding (Continued) The extended rate of discharge shall be sufficient to maintain the minimum concentration. For enclosed rotating electrical equipment, a minimum concentration of 30% shall be maintained for the deceleration period, but not less than 20 minutes. HYDRAULIC CALCULATIONS – For estimating purposes, see Figure 18 to approximately determine the size of piping required for carbon dioxide discharge. Consult your piping sketch and determine flow rate and approximate pipe sizes. These pipe sizes are not to be used for final hydraulic system design. The designer must have knowledge of and access to the ANSUL ANSCALC Version 2.0 HYDRAULIC CALCULATION PROGRAM. See Appendix section of this manual. Local Application DISCHARGE TIME – The discharge time for local application systems is a minimum of 30 seconds. This applies to normal fuels such as quench oil. When protecting fuels with an auto-ignition point below its boiling point, such as paraffin wax or cooking oils, the effective discharge time is increased to 3 minutes. This increase is to permit cooling of the fuel to prevent reignition.

DETERMINE NOZZLE PLACEMENT – Local application carbon dioxide fire suppression systems employ overhead type nozzles. Each nozzle is rated for a specific flow rate at a given height over the protected surface. The nozzle is also rated to protect a specific square area based on a side-of-square dimension at a given height and flow rate. The overhead nozzles are not restricted to placement exactly perpendicular to the surface they are protecting. These nozzles may be installed at angles between 45° and 90° (perpendicular) from the plane of the hazard surface. See Figure 6 and 7. The following chart lists the aiming factors for angular placement of nozzles, based on a 6-inch freeboard. Aiming Factor (2) 1/4 1/4 - 3/8 3/8 - 1/2 1/2 (Center)

Discharge Angle (1) 45° - 59° 60° - 74° 75° - 89° 90° (Perpendicular)

(1) Degrees from plane of hazard surface (2) Fractional amount of nozzle coverage side-of-square Local Application Nozzle Ranges X IN. X IN.

90°

60°

RATE OF DISCHARGE – Nozzle discharge rates shall be determined by either the area method or the volume method: L 2

• The area method of system design is used where the fire hazard consists of flat surfaces or low level objects associated with horizontal surfaces. • The volume method of system design is used where the fire hazard consists of three-dimensional irregular objects that cannot be easily reduced to equivalent surface areas.

L 4

L

L

NOTE: Distance “X” and the flow rate are the same in both cases; only the aiming point for the nozzle changes.

FIGURE 6 001860

Local Application Nozzle Ranges 6MDL 6MD

MOST COMMONLY USED

CONE “D” “A”

72 IN. MAX. (182.8 cm)

91 1/2 IN. MAX. (232.4 cm)

18 IN. MIN. (45.7 cm)

132 IN. MAX. (335.2 cm)

144 IN. MAX. (365.7 cm)

108 IN. MAX. (274.3 cm)

15 IN. MIN. (38.1 cm)

42 IN. MIN. (106.6 cm)

120 IN. MAX. (304.8 cm)

36 IN. MIN. (91.4 cm)

PROTECTED SURFACE

FIGURE 7 001861

6-5



“D” Nozzle

Local Application (Continued) The nozzle height above the hazard will determine flow rate and number of nozzles required, therefore, based on what the hazard configuration will allow, place the nozzles as close to the hazard as possible. This will then allow for the least number of nozzles and the least total amount of agent. DETERMINE NOZZLE TYPE – Figure 8 through Figure 12 show the overhead nozzle ratings for flow rate and side-of-square for specific heights above the surface being protected. For liquid or wetted surfaces, (rate by area) 6 in. Multi-Discharge, Type "A", Type "D", or Cone nozzles are normally used. For rate by volume, the 6 in. Multi-Discharge is normally used. Be sure to compare all nozzles and choose the most efficient one. “A” Nozzle Flow Rate Height (lb./ (in.) min.) 18 14.0 21 16.0 24 18.0 27 19.9 30 21.7 33 23.6 36 26.0 39 27.5 42 29.5 45 31.4 48 33.0 51 35.1 54 37.0 57 38.9 60 41.0 63 42.8 64 1/2 44.0 66 44.8 69 46.6 72 48.5

UL Side of Square Liquid Wetted (ft.) (ft.) 1.58 1.87 1.70 2.00 1.82 2.15 1.91 2.27 2.02 2.40 2.13 2.51 2.24 2.65 2.32 2.74 2.40 2.85 2.48 2.95 2.57 3.03 2.64 3.13 2.72 3.23 2.80 3.30 2.88 3.41 2.96 3.51 3.00 3.55 3.00 3.55 3.00 3.55 3.00 3.55

Flow Rate (lb./ min.) 13.7 15.5 17.2 19.0 20.7 22.5 24.3 26.0 28.3 33.7 38.0 39.4 40.9 42.3 43.8 45.2 45.9 46.6 48.1 49.5

FM Side of Square Liquid Wetted (ft.) (ft.) 1.58 1.87 1.73 2.05 1.88 2.21 2.03 2.39 2.07 2.45 2.12 2.51 2.16 2.57 2.21 2.63 2.25 2.66 2.25 2.66 2.25 2.66 2.25 2.66 2.25 2.66 2.44 2.90 2.63 3.11 2.81 3.33 2.90 3.44 3.00 3.55 3.00 3.55 3.00 3.55

NOTE: These tables shall not be extrapolated beyond the upper or lower limits shown.

FIGURE 8

6-6

Height (in.) 15 18 21 24 27 30 33 36 39 42 45 48 51 54 57 60 63 66 69 72 75 78 81 84 87 90 91 1/2

UL FM Flow Rate (lb./min.) 11.0 11.0 12.5 12.8 14.3 14.6 16.0 16.4 17.5 18.2 19.0 20.0 20.5 21.8 22.0 23.6 23.3 25.4 24.7 26.0 26.0 26.6 27.5 27.2 29.0 27.8 30.5 28.4 32.0 29.0 33.5 30.7 35.0 32.4 36.5 34.1 38.0 35.8 39.5 37.5 40.8 39.2 42.2 40.9 43.6 42.6 45.0 44.3 46.4 46.0 47.8 47.7 48.5 48.5

Side of Square Liquid Wetted (ft.) (ft.) 1.58 1.87 1.71 2.00 1.85 2.17 1.97 2.32 2.11 2.51 2.24 2.65 2.24 2.65 2.24 2.65 2.24 2.65 2.24 2.65 2.24 2.65 2.24 2.65 2.24 2.65 2.24 2.65 2.24 2.65 2.24 2.65 2.24 2.65 2.24 2.65 2.24 2.65 2.24 2.65 2.24 2.65 2.24 2.65 2.24 2.65 2.24 2.65 2.24 2.65 2.24 2.65 2.24 2.65

NOTE: These tables shall not be extrapolated beyond the upper or lower limits shower.

FIGURE 9



6MD Nozzle

Local Application (Continued) CONE NOZZLE Height (in.) 42 45 48 51 54 57 60 63 66 69 72 75 78 81 84 87 90 93 96 99 102 105 108

UL/FM Flow Rate (lb./min.) 21.0 26.5 31.5 37.0 41.5 46.5 51.5 57.0 62.0 67.0 72.0 77.0 82.0 87.0 92.0 97.0 102.0 107.0 112.5 117.0 122.0 127.0 132.0

Side of Square Liquid Wetted (ft.) (ft.) 2.47 2.91 2.67 3.16 2.86 3.39 3.03 3.59 3.20 3.78 3.36 3.97 3.51 4.14 3.65 4.31 3.80 4.48 3.92 4.63 4.05 4.78 4.17 4.94 4.29 5.08 4.41 5.23 4.53 5.36 4.64 5.49 4.75 5.61 4.85 5.75 4.96 5.86 4.98 5.89 5.00 5.91 5.00 5.91 5.00 5.91

Note: These tables shall not be extrapolated beyond the upper or lower limits shown.

FIGURE 10

Height (in.) 36 39 42 45 48 51 54 57 60 63 66 69 72 75 78 81 84 87 90 93 96 99 102 105 108 111 114 117 120 123 126 129 132

UL/FM Flow Rate (lb./min.) 28.5 31.0 33.0 35.5 38.0 40.0 42.5 45.0 47.0 49.5 52.0 54.0 56.5 58.5 61.0 63.5 66.0 68.0 70.5 73.0 75.5 77.0 79.5 82.0 84.5 86.5 89.0 91.5 94.0 96.0 98.0 100.5 103.0

Side of Square Liquid Wetted (ft.) (ft.) 2.26 2.66 2.32 2.74 2.38 2.81 2.43 2.88 2.49 2.95 2.55 3.02 2.61 3.08 2.66 3.15 2.72 3.21 2.77 3.28 2.83 3.35 2.88 3.41 2.93 3.46 2.98 3.52 3.03 3.59 3.08 3.65 3.13 3.70 3.18 3.76 3.23 3.81 3.27 3.87 3.32 3.92 3.36 3.97 3.40 4.02 3.43 4.06 3.47 4.11 3.53 4.18 3.53 4.18 3.53 4.18 3.53 4.18 3.53 4.18 3.53 4.18 3.53 4.18 3.53 4.18


FIGURE 11

6MDL Nozzle Height (in.) 120 123 126 129 132 135 138 141 144

UL/FM Flow Rate (lb./min.) 86.0 89.0 91.5 94.0 97.0 100.0 102.5 105.0 108.0

Side of Square Liquid Wetted (ft.) (ft.) 3.39 4.01 3.48 4.11 3.56 4.22 3.64 4.31 3.71 4.39 3.80 4.48 3.88 4.58 3.95 4.67 4.02 4.76


FIGURE 12 6-7


APPLICATION METHOD (Continued) Local Application (Continued) DETERMINE NUMBER OF NOZZLES – The number of nozzles required is based on the length and width of the hazard area. After the type of nozzle has been chosen and the height above the hazard has been determined, refer to the appropriate figure (Figures 8-12) for that nozzle and record the listed “side-of-square.” Then, use the following formula to determine total number of nozzles required: Number of Nozzles Required = Linear Length x Linear Width Side-Of-Square Side-Of-Square AGENT QUANTITY – In the case of local application type carbon dioxide fire suppression systems, only the liquid portion of the discharge is considered effective. The calculated quantity of agent, then, shall always be increased by 40%. This is done through the use of a multiplier with a value of 1.4 (140%). The agent quantity formula is as follows: Amount of Agent Required = Number of Nozzles x Flow Rate Per Nozzle x 1.4 x Discharge Time Required The number of cylinders required is obtained by dividing the total pounds of agent required by the size of the agent storage container to be used and then rounding the result up to the next whole number.

SAMPLE PROBLEMS –The following two sample problems, rate by area, and rate by volume, are structured to lead you, step by step, through each of the required areas for designing a local application system. • Rate by area: A typical dip tank (9 ft. long x 3 ft. wide) and drainboard (6 ft. long x 3 ft. wide) is to be protected by means of a local application carbon dioxide system. The parts to be dipped are fed into the dip tank by means of an overhead conveyor system. Attached to the dip tank is a drainboard to reclaim any excess from the dripping operation. To allow for maintenance to the conveyor, tank, or drain, the customer requests that the overhead nozzles be placed no closer than 30 inches from the surface being protected. Since the conveyor system runs along the center line of the dip tank and drain, the conveyor may interfere with the effectiveness of overhead nozzles placed directly over the protected surface. The solution to the problem, then, is to place overhead nozzles on either side of the conveyor and orientate them by means of the Aiming Factor Chart, Figure 7. This orientation of the nozzles will not affect the agent quantity required, but merely provide an aiming point on the protected surface for installation purposes. Once the placement of the nozzles have been determined, the nozzle type and number is required. Referring to the Nozzle Range Table, Figure 8, it is noted that both the “A” Type and the “D” Type nozzle will permit placement in a range that is acceptable for the sample problem. It should be noted that even though all the overhead nozzles meet the criteria of the example problem, the further the nozzle is from the hazard surface, the higher the flow rate must be; and, therefore, more agent is require. The following table compares the “A” and “D” Type nozzles for the liquid surface protection of the dip tank: Nozzle Height Type (in.) “A” 30 “D” 30

Side-of Flow Rate Square Number (lb./min.) (ft.) Required* 21.7 2.02 10 19.0 2.24 8

Total Flow (lb./min.) 217 152

*Number Required = Linear Length x Linear Width Side-Of-Square Side-Of-Square

6-8


APPLICATION METHOD (Continued) Local Application (Continued) With this comparison, it can easily be seen that of the two types of nozzles, the “D” type nozzle will provide the protection required with the fewest number of nozzles and the least amount of agent.

Wetted Surfaces = 6 “D” Nozzles x 19.0 lbs./min./ Quantity nozzle x 1.4 x .05 minutes. = 79.8 lbs. of carbon dioxide required Total Agent Required

= 106.4 lbs. + 79.8 lbs. = 186.2 Total lbs.

For the liquid surface of the dip tank, the “D” type nozzle at a height of 30 in. will protect an area having a side-of-square of 2.24 feet. The number required to protect the dip tank is:

Using 100 lb. cylinders.

Number Required = Linear Length x Linear Width Side-Of-Square Side-Of-Square = 9.0 ft. x 3.0 ft. 2.24 ft. 2.24 ft. = 4.0 x 1.34 =4x2 = 8 "D" Nozzles at 30 in. and 19.0 lb./min.flow rate each.

Since the agent supply is larger than required, the discharge time will be somewhat greater than 30 seconds.

For the wetted surface of the drainboard, the “D” type nozzle at a height of 30 in. will protect an area having a side-of-square of 2.65 feet. The number required to protect the drainboard is: Number Required = Linear Length x Linear Width Side-Of-Square Side-Of-Square = 6.0 ft. x 3.0 ft. 2.65 ft. 2.65 ft. = 2.26 x 1.13 =3x2 = 6 "D" Nozzles at 30 in. and 19.0 lb./min. flow rate each. Now that the type, number and flow rate of each nozzle has been determined, the quantity of agent may now be calculated. It should again be noted that only the liquid portion of the discharge is considered effective. The quantity of agent must, therefore, be increased by 40%. To do this, the calculation includes a multiplier of 1.4 (140%). Also, the discharge time for local application systems protecting hazards containing normal fuels shall be a minimum of 30 second (0.5 minutes). Given the above parameters the following calculations for agent quantity can be made: Quantity of Agent = Number of Nozzles x Flow Rate per Nozzle x 1.4 x Discharge Time Liquid Surface Quantity

= 8 “D” Nozzles x 19.0 lbs./min./nozzle x 1.4 x .05 minutes.

Number of = Agent Required = 186.2 lbs. = 2-100 lb. Cylinders Cylinder Size 100 lb./cyl. cylinders

NOTICE Do not increase flow rate as this may cause splashing of fuel. Another type of local application system is the rate by volume method. This type should be considered when the fire hazard consists of three-dimensional irregular objects that cannot be easily reduced to equivalent surface areas. Rate by volume (assumed enclosure): When attempting to design a system using this approach, several factors most be considered: • The total discharge rate of the system shall be based on the volume of an assumed enclosure entirely surrounding the hazard. • The assumed enclosure shall be based on an actual closed floor unless special provisions are made to take care of bottom conditions, such as local application or rate by area design applied from underneath. • The assumed walls and ceiling of the enclosure shall be at least 2 ft. from the main hazard unless actual walls are involved and shall enclose all areas of possible leakage, splashing, or spillage. • No reduction shall be made for solid objects within the volume. • A minimum dimension of 4 ft. shall be used in calculating the volume of the assumed enclosure. • If the hazard may be subject to winds or forced drafts, the assumed volume shall be increased to compensate for losses on the windward sides. • The total discharge rate for the basic system shall be equal to 1 lb./min./cu. ft. of assumed volume.

6-9


APPLICATION METHOD (Continued) Local Application (Continued) • If the assumed enclosure has a closed floor and is partly defined by permanent continuous walls extending at least 2 ft. above the hazard (where the walls are not normally a part of the hazard), the discharge rate may be proportionately reduced to not less than 0.25 lb./min./cu. ft. actual walls completely surrounding the enclosure. Rate by volume is normally a less cost efficient way to protect a hazard but this approach should be considered if no other appropriate means of protection is available. The first approach to look at in designing a rate by volume system is to design the system assuming there are no walls around or near the hazard. This approach requires increasing the hazard size by 2 ft. all around (assume volume) and designing the system for this increased size. The following example will take you through the necessary steps. Example 1: The hazard in question is a back-up generator located in a corner of a warehouse. The generator itself is 6 ft. long x 3 ft. wide x 4 ft. high. When utilizing the first approach to designing a rate by volume system, add 2 ft. completely around the hazard. This then gives a total hazard size of 10 ft. long x 7 ft. wide x 6 ft. high. This increase in size now gives an assumed volume of 420 cu. ft. See Figure 13.

The next step is to determine the total amount of carbon dioxide required. This is done by multiplying the total volume x the flow rate per minute per cu. ft. x the liquid carbon dioxide factor of 1.4 x the minimum discharge time of 30 seconds. In this example the total volume is 420 cu. ft., the flow rate per minute per cu. ft. is 1 lb. when no reduction is figured in for walls, therefore, the formula is: 420 (volume in cu. ft.) x 1 (flow rate per minute) x 1.4 (liquid factor) x .5 (minimum discharge time) = 294 lbs. of agent required. The next step is to determine the number of cylinders required. This is accomplished by dividing the total amount of agent by the size of cylinder chosen and then rounding up to the next whole number. 294 (total carbon dioxide) divided by 100 (size of cylinder chosen) = 2.94 or 3 cylinders required (rounded up). Now, review the hazard to determine where to locate the nozzles and how many nozzles will be required. There is no exact science for locating local application nozzles. Choose as many nozzles as you feel it may take to adequately cover the assumed volume. The nozzles should be mounted around the perimeter of the assumed volume and pointed at the hazard. In this example, four nozzles have been chosen. Nozzles should be placed to keep agent in assumed enclosure. Next step is to determine flow rate per nozzle by dividing the total amount of agent by the number of nozzles: 294 (total lbs. of agent) divided by 4 (total number of nozzles) = 73.5 lbs./min. flow rate. If no other rate by volume designs were to be looked at, then the next step would be to sketch the piping configuration and proceed to the hydraulic calculation program to determine pipe sizes. In this example though, we will continue on and look at additional types of rate by volume designs for this same hazard.

6 FT. (1.82 m) 4 FT. (1.21 m) 3 FT. (.91 m)

7 FT. (2.13 m)

6 FT. (1.82 m)

10 FT. (3.04 m)

FIGURE 13 001862

6-10

Example 2: The next approach to this hazard would be to consider what the system requirements would be by designing the system utilizing the actual walls which are on two sides of the hazard.


APPLICATION METHOD (Continued) Local Application (Continued) The following steps detail this type of local application, rate by volume, approach: The first step is to determine the new assumed volume. This is done by adding two ft. to the sides of the hazard which are not enclosed by actual walls and using the actual distance that the hazard is from the actual walls. Again, in determining volume, two ft. must also be added to the height of the actual hazard. Determine the assumed volume by multiplying the length, width, and height together. See Figure 14.

Next, determine the % of closed perimeter (actual walls) compared to the total perimeter (total of assumed walls and actual walls). This is done by adding the actual wall lengths and dividing that number by the total of all walls (both actual and assumed). In this example, the actual walls total 25 ft. (14 + 11) and the total perimeter totals 50 ft. (14 + 14 + 11 + 11). See Figure 15.

14 ft. long x 11 ft. wide x 6 ft. high = 924 cu. ft.

11 FT. (3.35 m)

14 FT. (4.26 m)

2 FT. (.61 m)

FIGURE 15 001864

6 FT. (1.82 m)

% of enclosure = 25 ft. divided by 50 ft. = .5 .5 x 100 = 50% perimeter closed

4 FT. (1.21m)

6 FT. (1.82 m)

3 FT. (.9 m)

6 FT. (1.82 m) 6 FT. 14 FT. (1.82 m) (4.26 m)

11 FT. (3.35 m) 2 FT. (.61 m)

2 FT. (.61 m)

FIGURE 14 001863

6-11


APPLICATION METHOD (Continued) Local Application (Continued) Now, knowing that 50% of the perimeter is closed, refer to the “Rate By Volume – Assumed Enclosure Chart,” Figure 16, to determine the required nozzle discharge rate.

Example 3: Once again, we are dealing with the same volume as Example 2 (924 cu. ft.) but this time the hazard has been enclosed on the two open sides by the addition of a concrete block wall. See Figure 17. The only wall opening that exists now is a 3.5 ft. opening for access to the generator. Remember, the additional wall must only be 2 ft. higher than the actual hazard.

Rate By Volume (Assumed Enclosure) Perimeter Closed Discharge Rate 0% 10% 15%

1#/min./CF .925#/min./CF .8875#/min./CF

20% 25% 30%

.85#/min./CF .8225#/min./CF .775#/min./CF

35% 40% 45%


50% 55% 60%


65% 70% 75%


80% 85% 90% 93% 95% 100%

.40#/min./CF .3625#/min./CF .325#/min./CF .310#/min./CF .290#/min./CF .25#/min./CF FIGURE 16

Referring to the chart, 50% closed perimeter allows a discharge rate of .625 lb./min./cu. ft. Knowing this, the total amount of carbon dioxide required can now be calculated by the following formula: Total agent required = Volume x Flow Rate per minute per cu. ft. x 1.4 (liquid factor) x .5 (minimum discharge time). 924 cu. ft x .625 lb./min./cu. ft. x 1.4 x .5 = 404 lb. of carbon dioxide required. At this point, it appears that this approach is not as cost effective as Example No. 1 using the assumed volume method with no walls. But, if the closed perimeter approach is looked at by having the customer install some inexpensive, non-combustible concrete block walls around the open side of the hazard, the results may be considerably different. Assume that the customer will install 6 ft. high walls around the open sides of the hazard, calculate the amount of agent required by following the steps in Example 3. 6-12

3 FT. 6 IN. (1.1 m)

6 FT. (1.82 m)

11 FT. (3.35 m)

14 FT. (4.26 m)

FIGURE 17 001865

Now, determine the % of closed perimeter (actual walls) compared to the total perimeter (total of assumed walls and actual walls). This is accomplished by adding the actual wall lengths and dividing that number by the total of all walls (both actual and assumed). In this example, the actual walls total 46.5 ft. (14 + 11 + 14 + 7.5) and the total perimeter totals 50 ft. (14 + 14 + 11 + 11). % of enclosure = 46.5 ft. divided by 50 ft. = .93 .93 x 100 = 93% perimeter closed Referring to the “Rate By Volume” – Assumed Enclosure Chart,” Figure 16, 93% closed perimeter allows a discharge rate of .31 lb./min./cu. ft. Knowing this, the total amount of carbon dioxide required can now be calculated by the following formula: Total agent required = Volume x Flow Rate per Minute Per Cu. Ft. x 1.4 (liquid factor) x .5 (minimum discharge time) 924 cu. ft. x .31 lb./min./cu. ft. x 1.4 x .5 = 200 lb. of carbon dioxide required. As you can see, by having the customer install a fairly inexpensive wall, the hazard can be protected by 2-100 lb. cylinders instead of the next least amount of three as calculated in Example 1.


APPLICATION METHOD (Continued) Local Application (Continued) HYDRAULIC CALCULATIONS – For estimating purposes, the following Figure 18 can be used to approximately determine the size of piping required for carbon dioxide discharge. Consult your piping sketch and determine flow rate and approximate pipe sizes. These pipe sizes are not to be used for final hydraulic system design. Nominal Flow With Average Maximum Flow Pipe Size Conditions With Short Runs (in.) Schedule (lbs./min.) (lbs./min.) 1/2 3/4

40 40

60 150

100 200

1 1 1/4 1 1/2

80 80 80

250 500 800

300 600 900

2 2 1/2

80 80

1300 2300

1600 2500

3

80

3500

4000

The rate and duration of discharge and consequently the amount of carbon dioxide shall be determined by the type and potential size of the hazard. A hand hose line shall have a sufficient quantity of carbon dioxide to permit its use for at least 1 minute. The carbon dioxide supply shall be located as close to the hose reel as possible so that liquid carbon dioxide will be supplied to the hose line with a minimum of delay after actuation. Refer to UL Fire Protection Equipment Directory, under section titled Carbon Dioxide System Units, Hand Hose Line (FYWZ) for equivalent lengths of hose line components. DETECTION SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS Refer to ANSUL AUTOPULSE Detection and Control Installation, Programming, and Maintenance Manual. Mechanical Detectors (Fusible Links)

NOTE: This table is for estimating purposes only. Flow calculations are required for all system installations. Check valves or selector valves may be chosen through the use of this table.

FIGURE 18 The designer must have knowledge of and access to the ANSUL ANSCALC Version 2.0 HYDRAULIC CALCULATION PROGRAM. See Appendix Section of this manual. Hand Hose Lines Hand hose line systems may be used to supplement fixed fire protection systems or to supplement first aid fire extinguishers for the protection of specific hazards for which carbon dioxide is a suitable extinguishing agent. These systems shall not be used as a substitute for other fixed carbon dioxide fire extinguishing systems equipped with fixed nozzles, except where the hazard cannot adequately or economically be provided with fixed protection. The decision as to whether hose lines are applicable to the particular hazard shall rest with the authority having jurisdiction. Hand hose lines stations shall be placed such that they are easily accessible and within reach of the most distant hazard which they are expected to protect. In general, they shall not be located such that they are exposed to the hazard nor shall they be located inside any hazard area protected by a total flooding system.

The fusible link detection system can be used where a self-contained, unsupervised, mechanical detection system is desired or required. The detection system allows for automatic detection by means of specific rated fusible links, which, when the temperature reaches the rating of the link, the link separates, allowing the release mechanism to actuate. Ansul’s recommendations for quantity and placement of fusible link detectors are directly related to the hazard type and application method used as followed: TOTAL FLOODING APPLICATION–Maximum spacing per detector is 100 sq. ft. and 5 ft. from a wall and 10 ft. between detectors with a maximum height (above hazard) of 14 ft. On ceiling heights above 14 ft. up to 20 ft. high, the maximum spacing per detector is 64 sq. ft. and 4 ft. from a wall and 8 ft. between detectors. NOTE: For sloped ceiling (peaked type or shed type) installations, refer to NFPA-72, “National Fire Alarm Code” for detailed spacing requirements. LOCAL APPLICATION – OVERHEAD (DETECTOR SPACING) – Maximum spacing per fusible link detector is 36 sq. ft. (3.3 sq. m or 3 ft. (.9 m) from edge of hazard and 6 ft. (1.8 m) between fusible link detectors. When a detector(s) is mounted more than 1 ft. (.3 m) below ceiling or in an open area, heat trap(s) is recommended. Detectors should be mounted overhead at nozzle height or as close to the hazard as possible without interference, not to exceed 10 ft. (3 m). Detectors should not be located where they will be susceptible to damage during the normal work operation.

6-13


DETECTION SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS (Continued)

ACTUATION REQUIREMENTS

Mechanical Detectors (Fusible Links) (Continued)

Three types of actuation are available for the Carbon Dioxide system: manual, pneumatic, and electric.

LOCAL APPLICATION – TANKSIDE (DETECTOR SPACING) – Detectors can be located either near the inner tank wall and flammable liquid surface or above the tank. If located above the tank, the rules for local application overhead would apply. If located on the tank wall, the detectors can be mounted horizontally or vertically in the freeboard area, but must be protected from damage during normal working operation. Detectors should be located at a maximum spacing per detector of 3 ft. (.9 m) from edge of hazard and 6 ft. (1.8 m) between detectors on the long side of the tank. FUSIBLE LINK SELECTION – In order to determine the normal operating temperature at the fusible link location, utilize a maximum registering thermometer, Part No. 15240. Select correct fusible link(s) for installation in detector(s) according to the temperature condition chart below: Fusible Link Part No. 415739 415740 415741 415742 415743 56816

Temperature Rating (See Figure 20) 165 °F (74 °C) 212 °F (100 °C) 280 °F (138 °C) 360 °F (182 °C) 450 °F (232 °C) 500 °F (260 °C)

To Be Used Where Temperature Does Not Exceed 100 °F (38 °C) 150 °F (66 °C) 225 °F (107 °C) 290 °F (143 °C) 360 °F (182 °C) 400 °F (204 °C)

Manual Actuation Manual actuation can be used with or without automatic detection. When no detection is required, the lever actuator can be mounted on top of the carbon dioxide cylinder valve. The manual lever release actuator provides a manual means of agent cylinder actuation by direct manual actuation of its pull lever or cable actuation when used in conjunction with a remote manual pull station. In a two cylinder system, the remaining cylinder is actuated by the pressure generated within the distribution manifold. In three or more cylinder systems, two lever actuators are required, and a connecting link is used to provide simultaneous actuation of both manual cable-pull actuators. The maximum length of actuator cable which may be used in the remote line is 150 ft. The maximum number of corner pulley elbows is 10. The second means of manual actuation can be accomplished by using a manual/pneumatic actuator. This actuator can be also used if pneumatic pressure or an electric signal is being supplied by the control panel of the automatic detection system. Manual actuation is accomplished by removing the ring pin and depressing the red palm button. One manual/pneumatic actuator is required in single or two cylinder systems. Pneumatic Actuation

TEMPERATURE RATING STAMPED ON FUSIBLE LINK BODY

ML STYLE 500 °F (200 °C) ONLY

K STYLE

000676b

FIGURE000171 19

BEAMS AND CEILING OBSTRUCTIONS–Beams and ceiling obstructions may be present which could obstruct detector placement over the hazard. Additional detectors may be required to provide adequate protection and to avoid obstructions. Lay Out the Detection and Control Components on the Hazard Sketch Now that you have analyzed the hazard and selected the detection and control hardware, you can complete a sketch. The sketch should show the placement of the accessories as well as the detection, control, and electrical components.

6-14

Pneumatic actuation is used with pneumatic valve actuators located on the carbon dioxide cylinder valves. The pressure is supplied from an LT-30-R nitrogen cartridge located in the ANSUL AUTOMAN and ANSUL AUTOMAN II-C release. The pressure pneumatically opens the cylinder valves. One pneumatic actuator is required in single or two cylinder systems and two actuators are required in systems with three or more cylinders. The maximum length of 1/4 in. Schedule 40 pipe is 150 ft. If it is necessary to have an actuation pipe run which exceeds the maximum allowable 1/4 in. pipe requirements, 1/4 in. stainless steel tubing with a wall thickness of 0.065 can be used for the actuation line. When this size tubing is used, a maximum of 300 ft., with no reductions for elbows or tees, is allowed.


ACTUATION REQUIREMENTS (Continued)

ACCESSORIES

Electric Actuation

Specific selection and placement of accessories that may be used with the carbon dioxide are:

Electric actuation is used with the HF electric actuator mounted on the carbon dioxide cylinder valve and an AUTOPULSE control system. See appropriate AUTOPULSE manual for detailed wiring information. The AUTOPULSE control system also provides a supervised method of tank actuation without limits on the tank location. In auxiliary or override applications, a manuallocal override valve actuator or a lever actuator can be installed on top of the HF actuator. A means of electric actuation of a selector valve is by the use of a solenoid actuator assembly, Part No. 73111. See appropriate AUTOPULSE manual for detailed wiring information.

Electric or Mechanical Manual Pull The electric or mechanical manual pull station allows the carbon dioxide system to be manually operated at some point distant from the control system or cylinders. The pull station should be installed at a maximum height of 60 in. and located in the path of exit. The total length of wire rope used for each mechanical manual pull station within a system must not exceed 150 ft. The maximum number of pulley elbows that may be used per pull station is 10. Parts that are required for installation of a remote manual pull station, either electric or mechanical are: Description Part No. Latch Type Pull Box 45062 Type A Break Glass Pull Box 41527 Pair of Legs for Pull Box 41542 1/16 in. Cable W/Swaged End Fitting-50 ft. 42104 1/16 in. Cable W/Swaged End Fitting-100 ft. 42109 1/16 in. Cable W/Swaged End Fitting-150 ft. 42113 1/16 in. Cable W/Swaged End Fitting-200 ft. 42128 Aluminum Corner Pulley (Use With EMT) 45771 Brass Corner Pulley-Nylon Wheel-Watertight 42678 Brass Corner Pulley-Brass Wheel-Watertight 45515 Dual/Triple Control Box 42784 Pull Cable Equalizer 42791 Pull Cable Equalizer (Sector Valves) 43166 1/16 in. Cable Clamp 45333 Flared End Fitting 40060 Pulley Adaptor Right and Left Hand 40696 (Brass Pulley Only) Electric Manual Pull Station, SPST–N.O. 78420 (Indoor Use Only) Electric Manual Pull Station, SPST–N.O. 24741 (Indoor Use Only) Electric Manual Pull Station, DPST–N.O. 24742 (Indoor Use Only) Dual Action Electric Manual Pull Station, 78101 DPST–N.O. (Indoor Use Only) Surface Mount Back Box 24871 (Fits Part No. 24741 and 24742) Electric Manual Pull Station, Weatherproof, 34822 SPST–N.O. (Includes Surface Mount Back Box) Selector Valves Selector valves are used to direct the flow of carbon dioxide into a single hazard of a multiple hazard system. 6-15


ACCESSORIES (Continued)

Direction/Stop Valves

Selector valves can be operated by either pneumatic pressure, an electric signal to operate a solenoid valve attachment, remote cable pull, or manually at the valve. Selector valves range in size from 1/2 in. to 4 in. When installing cable operated selector valves, the maximum length of 1/16 in. cable that may be run to operate the selector valve is 150 ft. with a maximum of 10 pulley elbows.

Direction/stop valves are used to either manually control the flow of carbon dioxide into a hazard area or to manually control the flow into one of several hazards being protected by a common bank of carbon dioxide cylinders. These valves are operated manually, either by the use of a handle attached directly to the valve or by means of a remote pull box which operates a sector attached to the valve. Directional/stop valves can be used as a safety feature, keeping the flow of carbon dioxide from entering a hazard area, either because of a false discharge or to allow the occupants enough time to exit the area prior to the valve being manually opened.

All style of selector valves can be actuated manually or by remote cable when adding a lever actuator to the top of the valve. Parts that may be used for installation of selector valves are: Description Part No. 1/2 in. Electric Operated Selector Valve 42764 3/4 in. Electric Operated Selector Valve 42765 1 in. Electric Operated Selector Valve 42766 1 1/4 in. Electric Operated Selector Valve 42767 1 1/2 in. Electric Operated Selector Valve 42768 2, 2 1/2, 3 in. Electric Operated Selector Valve 46195 4 in. Electric Operated Selector Valve 46202 Electric Discharge Plug Connector 45535 Electric Discharge Plug 77237 1/2 in. Pressure Operated Selector Valve 3/4 in. Pressure Operated Selector Valve 1 in. Pressure Operated Selector Valve 1 1/4 in. Pressure Operated Selector Valve 1 1/2 in. Pressure Operated Selector Valve 2, 2 1/2, 3 in. Pressure Operated Selector Valve 4 in. Pressure Operated Selector Valve

57428 57429 57430 57431 57432 57433

1/2 in. Lever Operated Selector Valve 3/4 in. Lever Operated Selected Valve 1 in. Lever Operated Selector Valve 1 1/4 in. Lever Operated Selected Valve 1 1/2 in. Lever Operated Selector Valve

43348 46386 43349 43350 43351

2, 2 1/2, 3 in. Lever Operated Selector Valve 4 in. Lever Operator Selector Valve 1/2 in. Solenoid Operated Selector Valve 3/4 in. Solenoid Operated Selector Valve 1 in. Solenoid Operated Selector Valve 1 1/4 in. Solenoid Operated Selector Valve 1 1/2 in. Solenoid Operated Selector Valve 2, 2 1/2, 3 in. Solenoid Operated Selector Valve 4 in. Solenoid Operated Selector Valve

46194 46201 415221 415222 410223 415224 415225 415226

Lever Release (With Handle and Pin, For Local Control) Lever Release (No Handle, No Pin, For Remote Control)

42484

6-16

57445

415227

42486

When installing a remote pull station to operate the sector on a direction/stop valve, the maximum allowable length of 1/16 in. cable is 150 ft. and the maximum allowable number of pulley elbows is 10. Parts that may be used with direction/stop valve installation are: Description Part No. 1/2 in. Direction/Stop Valve (Valve Only) 41451 3/4 in. Direction/Stop Valve (Valve Only) 41102 1 in. Direction/Stop Valve (Valve Only) 41354 1 1/4 in. Direction/Stop Valve (Valve Only) 41338 1 1/2 in. Direction/Stop Valve (Valve Only) 41424 Handle–Normally Open (For Use With 40238 1/2 in. Valve) Handle–Normally Open (For Use With 3/4 in. 40239 and 1 in. Valves) Handle–Normally Open (For Use With 1 1/4 in. 40259 and 1 1/2 in. Valves) Handle–Normally Closed (For Use With 1/2 in. Valve) Handle–Normally Closed (For Use With 3/4 in. and 1 in. Valves) Handle–Normally Closed (For Use With 1 1/4 in. and 1 1/2 in. Valves)

40248

Sector (For Use With 1/2 in. Valve) Sector (For Use With 3/4 in. and 1 in. Valves) Sector (For Use With 1 1/4 in. and 1 1/2 in. Valves)

40276 40279 40281

40267 46393



Pressure Trip

Siren

The pressure trip is connected to the actuation or discharge line of a carbon dioxide system. By either pneumatic or manual actuation, the pressure trip can release spring or weight powered devices to close doors and windows, open fuel dump valves, close fire dampers or close fuel supply valves.

The pressure operated siren is used to warn personnel of a system discharge. The siren is operated with the carbon dioxide pressure from the system. The piping to the siren is normally run from the system distribution manifold. The minimum decibel level at 10 ft. is 90 dB. The design requirements are as follows: Required Pipe: 1/4 in., Schedule 40 Flow Rate: 11 lb. per minute Maximum Sirens: 4 Maximum Pipe Length: 200 ft. (61m) minus 1 ft. (.3m) for every elbow used. NOTICE Design of system must include agent used through siren if siren is not located in the hazard area. Pressure operated siren that may be use on the system is: Description

Part No.

Pressure Operated Siren

43118

Pressure Switch The pressure switch is operated off the carbon dioxide pressure when the system is discharged. The piping to the pressure switch is normally run from the distribution manifold. The pressure switch can be used to open or close electrical circuits to either shut down equipment or turn on lights or alarms.

The piping required to connect from the system manifold to the pressure trip is 1/4 in. Schedule 40. This is no maximum length requirement for this piping as the carbon dioxide will be drawn back through the distribution piping and out the nozzles. Pressure trip that may be used on system is: Description

Part No.

Pressure Trip

5156

Pneumatic Time Delay In some applications the system discharge must be delayed for a short time following actuation. This is usually in areas where it is necessary to evacuate personnel prior to carbon dioxide discharge. The time delay uses the carbon dioxide pressure to power the factory-set delay mechanism. The time delay is installed in the discharge piping either directly after the control (pilot) cylinder or further along the piping. See Figure 22. A manual release is incorporated on the time delay valve to allow instant override of the time delay. After the discharge is completed, pressure in the time delay slowly returns to normal and the time delay valve again closes. The length of time delay is factory set and not adjustable. The time delay is available in delay settings of 10, 30, and 60 seconds.

The piping required to connect from the system manifold to the pressure switch is 1/4 in. Schedule 40. There is no maximum length requirement for this piping as the carbon dioxide will be drawn back through the distribution piping and out the nozzles. Pressure switches that may be used on system are: Description Part No. Pressure Switch–DPST 46250 Pressure Switch–DPDT (Explosion-Proof) 43241 Pressure Switch–3PST 42344 The pressure switches are rated as follows: Part No. 46250 – 2 HP @ 240VAC/480 VAC or 2 HP @ 250 VDC, 30A 250V AC/DC 5A 480V AC/DC Part No. 43241 – 10A @ 125 VAC, 5A @ 250 VAC Part No. 42344 – 30A @ 240 VAC, 20A@ 600 VAC, 3 HP @120 VAC, 7.5 HP @ 240 VAC, 15 HP @ 600 VAC, 3 Phase AC

FIGURE 22 001867

NOTICE Delay time listed are at 70 °F (21 °C). Actual delay times may vary with ambient conditions and installation variations.

6-17



DEVELOP BILL OF MATERIALS

Pneumatic Time Delay (Continued)

After completing the subsections of the design section, finalize the system design by completing a bill of material for each hazard area being protected. The bill of material, hazard sketches, hydraulic calculations, and any notes, should be kept on file for future reference.

Time delays used with the system are: Description

Part No.

Pneumatic Time Delay – 60 Seconds Pneumatic Time Delay – 30 Seconds Pneumatic Time Delay – 10 Seconds

54168 54169 54170

SAMPLE PROBLEM Alarms Several types of electric alarms are available. Each of these operate on 24 VDC and must be used on the alarm circuit of an AUTOPULSE Control System. Refer to appropriate AUTOPULSE installation, maintenance, and recharge manual for detailed design information. RESERVE SYSTEM Normally the authority having jurisdiction will determine whether a hazard requires a back up reserve set of carbon dioxide cylinders, either connected or spares. IRI (Industrial Risk Insurers) requires the following: “In high pressure systems an extra full complement of charged cylinders (connected reserve) manifolded and piped to feed into the automatic system should be provided on all installations. The reserve supply is actuated by manual operation of the main/reserve switch on either electrically operated or pneumatically operated systems. A connected reserve is desirable for four reasons: –Protection should reflash occur. –Reliability should the main bank malfunction. –Protection during impairment when main tanks are being replaced. –Protection of other hazards if selector valves are involved and multiple hazards are protected by the same set of cylinders. If a full complement of charged cylinders cannot be obtained or the empty cylinders recharged, delivered and reinstalled within 24 hours, a third complement of fully charged spare cylinders should be maintained on premises for emergency use. The need for spare cylinders may depend upon whether or not the hazard is under protection of automatic sprinklers.” NFPA 12, Standard on Carbon Dioxide Extinguishing Systems, 1989 Edition, states, “Both primary and reserve supplies for fixed storage systems shall be permanently connected to the piping and arrange for easy changeover, except where the authority having jurisdiction permits an unconnected reserve.” When designing a system, always determine if, and what kind of, reserve system is required. 6-18

Refer to Section 12 for examples of typical applications. By reviewing these examples, it may help answer some questions concerning the total design process.

ANSUL

Section 7



Installation

All installations are to be performed in accordance with the parameters of this manual and all appropriate codes and standards from the local, state, and federal authority having jurisdiction. Before the carbon dioxide system is installed, the qualified installer should develop installation drawings in order to locate the equipment, to determine an actuation and distribution piping routing, and to develop a bill of material. For successful system performance, the carbon dioxide system components must be located within their approved temperature ranges. The ambient temperature ranges are 0 °F to 130 °F (–18 °C to 54 °C) for total flooding and 32 °F to 120 °F (0 °C to 49 °C) for local applications. All AUTOPULSE Control Systems are designed for indoor applications and for temperature ranges between 32 °F to 120 °F (0 °C to 49 °C).

See Figures 1 thru 7 for detailed mounting height information for all cylinder bracketing. Clamp Installation – CV90 Cylinder Assembly Cylinder Size Ib. (kg) 25 (11.3) 35 (15.9) 50 (22.7) 75 (34.0) 100 (45.4)

Dim. A in. (cm) 6 (15) 9 (23) 12 (31) 12 (31) 12 (31)

Carbon dioxide cylinders may be located inside or outside the protected space, although it is preferable to locate them outside of the space. They must not be located where they will be exposed to a fire or explosion in the hazard. When they are installed within the space they protect, a remote manual control must be installed to release the system safely from outside the hazard area. The cylinders should be installed so that they can be easily removed after use or for weighing and inspection. Do not install the cylinders where they are exposed to direct sun rays.

Dim. C in. (cm) 9 3/4 (25) 9 3/4 (25) 9 3/4 (25) 10 1/2 (27) 12 (31)

Dim. D in. (cm) 12 3/4 (32) 12 3/4 (32) 12 3/4 (32) 13 1/2 (34) 15 1/8 (38)

Bracketing Without Uprights – Single Cylinder

MOUNTING HOLES – 2 HAVING 11/16 IN. DIAMETER

MOUNTING COMPONENTS Cylinder/Bracket Assembly

Dim. B in. (cm) 12 (31) 18 (46) 26 (66) 29 (74) 31 (79)

B

D 2 IN. X1 IN. 3/16 IN. STEEL CHANNELS 1/2 IN. X 1 1/4 IN. BOLTS AND HUTS (BOLT HEADS WELDED TO CHANNELS)

C

A

2 IN. X 3/16 IN. STEEL STRAPS

FIGURE 1 001868a/001868b

Bracketing Installation – CV90 Cylinder Assembly Cylinder Size Ib. (kg) 25 (11.3) 35 (15.9) 50 (22.7) 75 (34.0) 100 (45.4)

Dimension A in. (cm) 15 (38) 21 (53) 31 (79) 34 (86) 36 (91)

Dimension B in. (cm) 11 (28) 11 (28) 11 (28) 11 1/2 (29) 13 (33)

Bracketing Without Uprights – Single Row

5 IN. (13 cm)

12 IN. (31 cm) A B

FIGURE 2 002260a/002260b

7-1

Section 7 – Installation

MOUNTING COMPONENTS (Continued)

Bracketing Installation – CV90 Cylinder Assembly

Cylinder/Bracket Assembly (Continued)

Cylinder Size Ib. (kg) 25 (11.3) 35 (15.9) 50 (22.7) 75 (34.0) 100 (45.4)


Dimension A in. (cm) 15 (38) 21 (53) 31 (79) 34 (86) 36 (91)

Dimension B in. (cm) 21 (53) 21 (53) 21 (53) 22 1/2 (57) 26 (66)

Dimension A in. (cm) 15 (38) 21 (53) 31 (79) 34 (86) 36 (91)

Dimension B in. (cm) 25 (64) 25 (64) 25 (64) 26 (66) 29 (74)

Dimension C in. (cm) 80 (203) 80 (203) 80 (203) 80 (203) 80 (203)

Bracketing Without Uprights – Back To Back

Bracketing Without Uprights – Double Row

7 IN. (19 cm) 12 IN. (31 cm)

5 IN. 12 IN. (13 cm) (31 cm)

C

B

A B

B

FIGURE 4

FIGURE 3

001870

001869a/001869b


Dimension A in. (cm) 15 (38) 21 (53) 31 (79) 34 (86) 36 (91)

Dimension B in. (cm) 14 (36) 14 (36) 14 (36) 14 1/2 (37) 16 (41)

Dimension C in. (cm) 46 (117) 56 (142) 72 (183) 77 (196) 79 1/2 (202)

Dimension D in. (cm) 8 (20) 8 (20) 8 (20) 8 (20) 8 (20)

Bracketing Without Uprights – Single Row (DISTANCE TO WEIGH RAIL)

D

7 1/2 IN. 12 IN. (19 cm) (31 cm) C*

B A

*Dimensions are based on using weigh scale, Part No. 74241, and Lifting Yoke, Part No. 69877.

FIGURE 5 002253

7-2


MOUNTING COMPONENTS (Continued) Cylinder/Bracket Assembly (Continued) Bracketing Installation – CV90 Cylinder Assembly Cylinder Size (kg) Ib. 25 (11.3) 35 (15.9) 50 (22.7) 75 (34.0) 100 (45.4)

Dimension A in. (cm) 15 (38) 21 (53) 31 (79) 34 (86) 36 (91)

Dimension B in. (cm) 24 (61) 24 (61) 24 (61) 25 1/2 (65) 29 (74)

Dimension C in. (cm) 46 (117) 56 (142) 72 (183) 77 (196) 79 1/2 (202)

Dimension D in. (cm) 8 (20) 8 (20) 8 (20) 8 (20) 8 (20)

E

Bracketing With Uprights – Double Row

Dimension E in (cm) 11 (28) 11 (28) 11 (28) 11 (28) 11 (28)

D

C* 7 1/2 IN. (19 cm)

12 IN. (31 cm)

A B

FIGURE 6


002271

Bracketing Installation – CV90 Cylinder Assembly Cylinder Size Dimension A Dimension B Dimension C Ib. (kg) in. (cm) in. (cm) in. (cm) 25 (11.3) 15 (38) 25 (64) 46 (117) 35 (15.9) 21 (53) 25 (64) 56 (142) 50 (22.7) 31 (79) 25 (64) 72 (183) 75 (34.0) 34 (86) 26 (66) 77 (196) 100 (45.4) 36 (91) 29 (74) 79 1/2 (202) Bracketing With Uprights – Double Row Back To Back

Dimension D in. (cm) 8 (20) 8 (20) 8 (20) 8 (20) 8 (20)

D

D

C* 7 1/2 IN. 1/2 IN. (19 cm) (31 cm)

B


A

FIGURE 7 001873

7-3

Section 7 – Installation 6-1-98 REV. 1 MOUNTING COMPONENTS (Continued) Cylinder/Bracket Assembly (Continued) 1. Mount each carbon dioxide cylinder by completing the following:

!

CAUTION

Do not remove the safety shipping caps at this time. They are provided to prevent accidental actuation and discharge during shipping and handling. If valve assembly is accidentally operated, velocity of unrestricted escaping gas is forceful enough to cause injury, especially about the face and head. a. Assemble bracket components. See Parts List, F9127, F-9128, and F-9129, located in the Appendix Section, for details of cylinder bracketing and component assembly. b. If a reserve system is being installed, mount the reserve cylinder(s) directly next to the main system cylinder(s).

!

CAUTION

Proper fasteners must be used when mounting cylinder bracketing to wall or support. Failure to mount properly could cause cylinder movement upon discharge. c. Securely mount bracketing to rigid wall or support. d. Fasten cylinder(s) securely in bracketing. e. The actuated pilot valves must be located in the distribution manifold as far from the manifold outlet as possible.

Releasing Devices Different types of Releasing/Detection systems are available with the carbon dioxide system: – ANSUL AUTOMAN mechanical release using fusible link detectors with pneumatic actuation. – ANSUL AUTOMAN II-C release using thermal detectors with pneumatic actuation. – AUTOPULSE Control System using electric detection with electric actuation. – AUTOPULSE Control System with electric detection utilizing an ANSUL AUTOMAN II-C release for pneumatic actuation. For detailed information on detection systems, refer to the following: – Ansul Detection and Control Application Manual – NFPA 12 Carbon Dioxide Extinguishing Systems – NFPA 72 National Fire Alarm Code INSTALLING ACTUATION PIPING Before installing any actuation piping, the piping design must be determined. This will confirm that the lengths of actuation piping does not exceed the maximum allowable. General Piping Requirements 1. Use only 1/4 in. Schedule 40 black iron, hot-dipped galvanized, chrome-plated, or stainless steel pipe/braided hose and fittings conforming to ASTM A120, A53, or A106. 2. Before assembling the pipe and fittings, make certain all ends are carefully reamed and blown clear of chips and scale. Inside of pipe and fittings must be free of oil and dirt. 3. The piping and fitting connections must be sealed with pipe tape. When applying pipe tape, start at the second male thread and wrap the tape (two turns maximum) clockwise around the threads, away from the pipe opening. NOTICE Do not allow tape to overlap the pipe opening, as this could cause possible blockage of the gas pressure. Thread sealant or compound must not be used. 4. Cast iron pipe and fittings are not acceptable. 5. Actuation piping must be rigidly supported by UL listed hangers as described on Page 7-6.

7-4

Section 7 – Installation 6-1-98 REV. 1 INSTALLING ACTUATION PIPING (Continued)

INSTALLING DISTRIBUTION PIPING

Actuation Piping Installation

Hanger Applications

1. Install 1/4 in. Schedule 40 pipe from gas outlet port on the ANSUL AUTOMAN release or ANSUL AUTOMAN II-C release to cylinder location. Use one of the 1/2 in. (1.3 cm) knockouts provided in the top, bottom, or side of the enclosure to exit the piping.

Install the pipe hangers in accordance with good piping practice as well as the following: 1. The maximum spacing between hangers must not exceed those listed below. Maximum Spacing Pipe Size Between Hangers in. NPT ft. (m) 1/4 4 (1.2) 1/2 6 (1.8) 3/4 8 (2.4) 1 12 (3.7) 11/4 12 (3.7) 1 1/2 and larger 15 (4.6)

2. 3.

4.

5.

NOTICE If system requires a manual pneumatic actuator, install a 1/4 in. check valve, Part 25627, in the 1/4 in. actuation piping outside the release mechanism and a 1/4 in. check valve near the pneumatic actuator. Maximum length of all 1/4 in. actuation piping cannot exceed 150 ft. (45.7 m). If pneumatic operated accessories are required to be operated from the actuation pressure, branch off the 1/4 in. actuation piping and run to each accessory. Install 1/4 in. tee in the actuation piping approximately 24 in. (61 cm) before first carbon dioxide cylinder and install vent plug, Part No. 42175. See Figure 8. Install actuation hose, Part No. 31809, 32335, or 32336 (depending on length required) between actuation piping and either the pneumatic actuator or the CO2 valve. A 1/4 in. male connector, Part No. 32338, is required on each end of the actuation hose. See Figure 8.

2. A hanger should be installed between fittings when the fittings are more than 2 ft. (.6 m) apart. 3. A hanger should be installed at a maximum of 1 ft. (.3 m) from the nozzle. 4. The hangers must be UL listed and rigidly supported. The Hanger Application Table and Figure 9 list some typical hangers used for different mounting surfaces.

PRESSURE TRIP, PART NO. 805156

APPROX. 24 IN. (61 cm) PRESSURE SWITCH (SEE COMPONENT SECTION)

12 IN. (30 cm)

1/4 IN. VENT PLUG, PART NO. 842175 CHECK VALVE, PART NO. 25627

FIGURE 8 001874

7-5

Section 7 – Installation REV. 1

INSTALLING DISTRIBUTION PIPING (Continued) Hanger Application Table Hanger Type

Application

No. 1

For attaching to wood beams

No. 2

On level ceilings of sufficient thickness to permit proper fastening

No. 3

For 2 in. and smaller pipe under sloping ceilings and roofs

No. 4

For special cases where punching is more economical than using clamps

No. 5

For sheathed ceilings of wood construction with sufficient thickness

No. 6

For most cases except where plastering is done after installation

No. 7

For attaching to concrete beams

No. 8

For attaching to lower flange of beam or truss

No. 9

To keep piping closer to beam than is possible with clamp and ring

No. 10

Suitable for 3/4 to 2 in. pipe where necessary to hang pipe at a distance from wall

No. 11

For attaching to channel iron

No. 12

For attaching to bottom of steel beams

General Piping Requirements 1. Pipe shall conform to ASTM specifications A53 or A106. 2. A120 pipe SHALL NOT BE USED. 3. All pipe up to and including 3/4 in. size to be standard weight black, stainless, or galvanized steel (Schedule 40). 4. All pipe over 3/4 in. size to be extra heavy black, stainless, or galvanized steel (Schedule 80). 5. Extra heavy galvanized malleable iron or ductile iron fittings should be used through 2 in. size; and galvanized forged steel fittings in all larger sizes. 6. Refer to NFPA 12, “Carbon Dioxide Extinguishing Systems” for detailed piping requirements. 7. Cylinder and piping to be securely bracketed especially at the fittings and nozzles. 8. Ream, clean, and blow out all pipe before installing. 9. All dead end pipe lines to be provided with a 1/2 in. capped nipple, 2 in. long. See Figure 10.

FIGURE 10 001876

10. After assembly, blow out entire pipe system before installing discharge nozzles. NO. 1

NO. 6

NO. 10

NO. 2

NO. 7

NO. 11

NO. 3

NO. 4

NO. 8

NO. 5

NO. 9

NO. 12

FIGURE 9 001875/3 rows

7-6

Section 7 – Installation REV. 2

INSTALLING DISTRIBUTION PIPING (Continued)

7. If accessory piping is required, see Installing Accessories, for detailed piping information.

Distribution Manifold And Piping

MAIN/RESERVE SYSTEM

1. Starting with the cylinder manifold, securely mount the manifold at the appropriate height as shown in Figure 11. Make certain that if accessories piping is to be done later that the end of the manifold contains a tee instead of an elbow. The outlet of the tee will later be reduced down to 1/4 in. for piping to the accessories. 2. Continue piping remainder of the distribution piping, following piping sketch and computer design completed in System Design Section.

3. 4. 5. 6.

NFPA 12, Standard on Carbon Dioxide Extinguishing Systems, 1989 Edition, states, "Both primary and reserve supplies for fixed storage systems shall be permanently connected to the piping and arranged for easy changeover, except where the authority having jurisdiction permits an unconnected reserve." When piping a connected reserve system, the reserve cylinders must be segregated from the pressure of the main system. This is accomplished by adding check valves in the distribution manifold. It is also necessary to install a header vent plug on each side of the manifold. This is required because of the addition of the check valves in the manifold. See Figure 12.

NOTICE All piping shall be laid out to reduce friction losses to a reasonable minimum and care shall be taken to avoid possible restrictions due to foreign matter or faulty fabrication. Before installing nozzles, blow air through complete piping system to determine there is no blockage. Install discharge nozzles as specified on the computer design piping output sheet. Install male end of flexible discharge bend, Part No. 427082, into each manifold inlet. Wrench tighten. With cylinders securely mounted in bracket, attach female end of flexible discharge bend unto cylinder valve outlet. Wrench tighten.

SELECTOR VALVES

HEADER VENT

HEADER SAFETY

HEADER VENT

CAUTION

!

CHECK VALVES

Make certain flexible discharge bend is attached to valve outlet and NOT the fill port inlet. The valve outlet port is the higher of the two threaded ports.

MAIN/RESERVE SYSTEM WITH SELECTOR VALVES

FIGURE 12 004306

Header Installation – Cylinder Assembly Cylinder Size Dimension A Dimension B Ib. (kg) in. (cm) in. (cm) 25 (11.3) 38 1/2 (98) 39 (99) 35 (15.9) 48 1/2 (123) 49 (125) 50 (22.7) 64 1/2 (164) 65 (165) 75 (34.0) 69 1/2 (177) 70 (178) 100 (45.4) 72 (183) 72 1/2 (184) 100 (LC) (45.4) 72 1/2 (184) 73 (185)

Dimension C in. (cm) 12 (31) 12 (31) 12 (31) 12 (31) 12 (31) 12 (31)

1/2 IN. ELBOW

FLEXIBLE DISCHARGE BEND, PART NO. 427082

SUPPLY PIPE

C

"Y" FITTING SUPPLY PIPE

A

1 CYLINDER

Dimension E in. (cm) 12 (31) 12 (31) 12 (31) 12 (31) 12 (31) 12 (31) HEADER

SUPPLY PIPE

D

C

Dimension D in. (cm) 12 (31) 15 (31) 12 (31) 12 (31) 12 (31) 12 (31)

B

CYLINDER VALVE

E 2 CYLINDERS


A

E


E

3 CYLINDERS

FIGURE 11 001878

7-7

Section 7 – Installation 6-19-98 REV. 2 INSTALLING DETECTION/ACTUATION SYSTEM Several types of detection systems are available for use with the Ansul carbon dioxide extinguishing system. Some detection systems offer supervised input and output circuits and battery back-up while other types offer unsupervised mechanical, electrical, or pneumatic detection. The type of hazard or the authority having jurisdiction will determine the detection system requirements. NFPA 12 states, “Supervision of automatic systems shall be provided unless specifically waived by the authority having jurisdiction. Interconnections between the components that are necessary for the control of the system and life safety, such as detection, actuation, alarms, power sources, etc., shall be supervised. An open circuit, ground fault condition, or loss of integrity in the pneumatic control lines that would impair full system operation shall result in a trouble signal. The alarm and trouble signals shall be transmitted by one of the following methods: a. Local alarm service which will cause an audio and visual signal at a constantly attended location (NFPA 72) b. Proprietary alarm service (NFPA 72) c. Remote alarm service (NFPA 72), or d. Central station alarm service (NFPA 71) Exception: High pressure pneumatic operated slave cylinder connections immediately adjacent to pilot cylinder need not be supervised.” AUTOPULSE Control System With Electric Actuator The AUTOPULSE Control System is an electronic device incorporating an internal power supply, “on-line” emergency batteries, and solid-state electronics. The system can incorporate either ionization, photoelectric, heat, flame, or combustible vapor detectors. The AUTOPULSE Control System offers electric valve actuation by the use of the Ansul HF Actuator, Part No. 73327 for the CV-90 valve cylinders and by the use of the CV-98 electric actuator, Part No. 423684, for the CV-98 valve cylinder. For detailed installation instructions, refer to the appropriate AUTOPULSE Control Systems Manual and the HF Electric Actuator Application and Installation Sheet, Part No. 73330, and CV-98 Electric Actuator Instruction Sheet, Part No. 426003.

7-8

AUTOPULSE Control System With ANSUL AUTOMAN II-C With Pneumatic Actuation In some cases it is advisable to have electric supervised detection with pneumatic valve actuation. This can be accomplished by incorporating an AUTOPULSE Control System for the detection and an ANSUL AUTOMAN II-C release for the pneumatic actuation. 1. See the appropriate AUTOPULSE Control Manual for detailed installation instructions. 2. Once the electrical portion of the detection system is completed, mount the ANSUL AUTOMAN II-C release in a convenient location to both the AUTOPULSE panel and the carbon dioxide cylinders. 3. Complete wiring required between the AUTOPULSE control panel and the ANSUL AUTOMAN II-C release. See Figure 13. THESE SWITCH CONTACTS TRANSFER UPON ACTUATION OF RELEASE "ANSUL AUTOMAN" II-C HIGH TB1

ACCESSORY POWER SOURCE

N.C.

S1

LOW USE JUMPER PART NO.17761 (12.5--30VDC) AUTOPULSE RELEASE CIRCUIT***

D1

S2 N.C.

Rx J1

D2

SOL1

*AUXILIARY ALARMING DEVICES, SEE S1 RATINGS **FUEL SHUT-OFF VALVE, BLOWER MOTOR, DOOR CLOSER, ETC., SEE S1 RATINGS ***POLARITY SHOWN IN THE ALARM CONDITIONS

FIGURE 13 001879

4. See Actuation Piping Requirements listed on Page 7-4. NOTICE It is only required to actuate two pilot cylinders in the total system. The remainder of the cylinders will be actuated by back-pressure from the pilot cylinders. In a connected reserve system, two pilot cylinders are required on the main and two on the reserve.

Section 7 – Installation 6-19-98 REV. 1 INSTALLING DETECTION/ACTUATION SYSTEM (Continued) H.A.D. Detection With Mechanical Actuation This type of system is actuated automatically by means of heat actuated detectors (H.A.D.) located in the protected space. Copper tubing connects the detectors to the control head located on the cylinder valve. This system may also be actuated from a remote pull station connected by cable to the automatic control head or by the local manual release located on the control head. H.A.D. COMPONENT CONNECTION 1. Mount heat actuated detectors on ceiling of hazard area in accordance with location determined in the System Design Section. 2. Install 4 in. sq. junction boxes and 1/2 in. conduit as required by system layout. Provide smooth, rounded bends to allow pulling of 1/8 in. air tubing. Fasten conduit securely at 6 ft. (1.8 m) intervals. 3. Feed 1/8 in. air tubing through conduit leaving several inches surplus at each junction box and detector to provide for expansion and contraction. Runs of air tubing should not be pulled tight, but looped as shown in Figure 14. 4. Terminate conduit at junction box mounted near control head. Using union fitting, run 3/16 in. air tubing to control head leaving a loop of tubing to allow for removal of control head from cylinder valve. See Figure 14. THREE WAY FITTING TWO WAY FITTING TWO WAY FITTING

HEAT ACTUATOR 1/8 IN. AIR TUBING JUNCTION BOX (COVER REMOVED) MOUNTED ON WALL ABOVE CONTROL HEADS 3/16 IN. AIR TUBING RATE-OF-RISE CONTROL HEAD

HEAD WITH VENT USED ON ALL SYSTEMS

PLAN VIEW OF JUNCTION BOX (COVER REMOVED) 1/2 IN. CONDUIT

HEAT ACTUATOR

3/16 IN. X 1/8 IN. UNION FITTING PART NO. 41397

TUBING TEE

HEAD WITHOUT VENT USED ONLY ON SYSTEMS WITH 3 OR MORE CYLINDERS

FIGURE 14 001881

7-9

Section 7 – Installation 6-19-98 REV. 1 INSTALLING DETECTION/ACTUATION SYSTEM (Continued) H.A.D. Detection With Mechanical Actuation (Continued) MOUNTING THE CONTROL HEAD 1. !

“CLIP-ON” STYLE LINKAGE INSTALLATION 1. Secure the conduit to the detector bracket using the two 1/2 in. steel compression fittings on the series detector bracket or the single 1/2 in. steel compression fitting on the terminal detector bracket. See Figure 15.

CAUTION

Make certain control head is in the "SET" position with ring pin in place before installing onto cylinder valve. Failure to comply could result in an accidental cylinder actuation.

COMPRESSION FITTING NUT 1/2 IN. STEEL COMPRESSION FITTING

Make certain control head is in the “SET” position and ring pin is inserted through manual release lever and secured with visual inspection seal. 2. Remove actuation shipping cap from top threads of cylinder valve. 3. Thread the control head onto top threads of cylinder valve. Do not exceed 10 ft.lb. (13.6 Nm) torque. Mechanical ANSUL AUTOMAN Release With Fusible Link When the system design allows for unsupervised, mechanical detection with pneumatic actuation, the mechanical ANSUL AUTOMAN release can be used. The fusible link detection operates the release mechanism which in turn pneumatically operates the cylinder valve. To properly install the mechanical detection system: 1. Based on the requirements listed in the System Design Section, mount the detectors in their predetermined locations. 2. Run 1/2 in. conduit from the release mechanism trip hammer assembly knockout hole to locations selected for mounting the detectors. When changing the direction of conduit, use only Ansul approved pulley elbows. Ansul offers two styles of detector bracket assemblies. Part No. 56837 and 56838 are the "clip on" style series and terminal detector assemblies. These detector assemblies use a "clip on" style linkage assembly and do not require the wire rope to be threaded through the linkage assembly while it is being fed through the detection system. Part No. 15373 and 15375 are the "hinged" style series and terminal detector assemblies. These detector assemblies use a detector linkage assembly which requires the wire rope to be threaded through each linkage assembly while the rope is being fed through the detection system.

7-10

FIGURE 15 000306

NOTICE Do not use zinc die cast compression connectors on the detection conduit lines as these will not withstand the normally high temperatures experienced in the hazard area. 2. For a terminal detector located in a duct or header opening, secure both sides of the detector bracket with conduit, as shown in Figure 16.

FIGURE 16 000307

Section 7 – Installation 6-19-98 REV. 1 2-3 IN. (5–8 cm)

INSTALLING DETECTION/ACTUATION SYSTEM (Continued) Mechanical ANSUL AUTOMAN Release With Fusible Link (Continued) “CLIP-ON” STYLE LINKAGE INSTALLATION (Continued) 3. Starting at the release assembly, feed the wire rope through the hole in the release mechanism locking clamp, allowing the excess wire rope to hang down. Do not tighten set screws in locking clamp at this time. See Figure 17. LOCKING CLAMP

FIGURE 20 000312

6. To give a constant tension on the wire rope during installation of the detector linkage, hang a vise grip or other weighted device on the excess stainless steel wire rope, leaving an adequate length of spare wire rope between the locking clamp and the weighted device. NOTICE When attaching the weighted device to the excess wire rope, allow approximately 3 in. (8 cm) of wire rope for each detector linkage for proper installation.

FIGURE 17 000309

4. From the release assembly, run the stainless steel wire rope through the conduit, pulley elbows and detector brackets to the terminal detector. NOTICE If wire rope requires splicing, make certain splice is at least 12 in. (30.5 cm) away from any pulley elbow or conduit adaptor to avoid interference.

Example: If the system has six detectors, there should be approximately 18 in. (46 cm) of excess wire rope between the locking clamp and the weighted device, which will be utilized when the linkage is put in place. 7. Start at the terminal detector, place the small tab of the detector linkage onto the wire rope. See Figure 21.

5. Feed the wire through the terminal detector bracket as shown in Figure 18 or as shown in Figure 19 if the terminal detector is mounted within a duct or header opening, and install the stop sleeve approximately 2 to 3 in. (5 to 8 cm) from the end of the wire rope. See Figure 20. Use the National Telephone Supply Company Nicopress Sleeve Tool (Stock No. 51-C887) or equal to properly crimp the stop sleeve.

FIGURE 21 000313

8. With the tab positioned on the wire rope, press and snap the detector linkage onto the wire rope. See Figure 22.

FIGURE 18 000310

FIGURE 22 000314

FIGURE 19 000311

7-11

Section 7– Installation 6-19-98 REV. 1 12. Position the assembled linkage onto the detector bracket. See Figure 26. For optimum detection, make certain the solder joint is in the down position.

INSTALLING DETECTION/ACTUATION SYSTEM (Continued) Mechanical ANSUL AUTOMAN Release With Fusible Link (Continued)

BRACKET LINKS

“CLIP-ON” STYLE LINKAGE INSTALLATION (Continued) 9. Place the tab of the other half of the detector linkage on the opposite side of the wire rope and press the linkage until it snaps onto the rope. See Figure 23.

FIGURE 26 000318

FIGURE 23 000315

NOTICE The hook portions of the detector linkage should now face away from each other. 10. Next, rotate both halves of the detector linkage upside down, with the detector linkage groove over the wire rope. See Figure 24.

NOTICE When positioning the linkage in the bracket, it is recommended to locate the linkage slightly off center, toward the terminal detector side. 13. Install the linkage and the correct Ansul approved fusible link in the remainder of the detector brackets. 14. Insert cocking lever, Part No. 14995, on the left side of the release mechanism, with the movable flange resting securely against the corner of the cartridge receiver and spring housing, and with the notched lever portion engaging the cocking pin on both sides of the release mechanism. See Figure 27.

COCKING PIN

FIGURE 24

COCKING LEVER

000316

11. After fitting the pivot point of the two detector linkage halves together, squeeze the two halves and place the correctly rated Ansul approved fusible link over both detector hooks. See Figure 25.

FIGURE 27 000319

FIGURE 25 000317

7-12

Section 7 – Installation 6-19-98 REV. 1 18. Verify each detector linkage assembly, with correct fusible link, is in the detector bracket, located slightly toward the terminal detector side.

INSTALLING DETECTION/ACTUATION SYSTEM (Continued) Mechanical ANSUL AUTOMAN Release With Fusible Link (Continued) “CLIP-ON” STYLE LINKAGE INSTALLATION (Continued) 15. With a downward motion of the cocking lever, raise cocking pin until the trip lever indented surface moves underneath the pin and locks the pin in the up position. See Figure 28.

FIGURE 28 001882

16. Remove cocking lever and insert lock bar, Part No. 14985, on left side of the cable lever, over the two shouldered projecting stud extensions, and slide bar forward into locking position. The release mechanism cannot be actuated, nor can enclosure cover be replaced until the lock bar is removed. See Figure 29.

NOTICE Due to the close adjustment between the triphammer and cable lever assemblies, use only the particular fusible link(s) selected for installation in each detector, to ensure correct adjustment when performing Steps 19 and 20. 19. Raise trip hammer 3/8 in. to 1/2 in. (9.5 to 12.7 mm), pull all slack out of wire rope, and tighten set screws on locking clamp. 20. Lower tension lever to “DOWN” position and inspect the base of the wire rope clamping device to make certain that there is a minimum of 1/4 in. (6.4 mm) to a maximum of 3/8 in. (9.5 mm) clearance between the base of the trip hammer assembly and the cable lever assembly. See Figure 31. If clearance is not 1/4 in. (6.4 mm) minimum to 3/8 in. (9.5 mm) maximum, raise tension lever, loosen set screws on locking clamp and repeat Steps 19 and 20. TRIP HAMMER ASSEMBLY 1/4 IN. MINIMUM (6.4 mm) 1/2 IN. (12.7 mm) MAXIMUM TRIP HAMMER BASE

LOCK BAR PROPERLY INSTALLED

FIGURE 31 000323

FIGURE 29 000321

17. Make certain tension lever is in the “UP” position. See Figure 30.

!

CAUTION

Do not install cartridge at this time as an accidental actuation could cause system discharge. 21. Test detection system in accordance with the Testing and Placing in Service Section of this manual. 22. When testing has been completed, cut off excess wire rope in the release assembly, leaving approximately 2 in. (5.1 cm) of wire rope below the clamping device.

TENSION LEVER IN “UP” POSITION

FIGURE 30 000322

7-13

Section 7 – Installation 6-19-98 REV. 1 INSTALLING DETECTION/ACTUATION SYSTEM (Continued) Mechanical ANSUL AUTOMAN Release With Fusible Link (Continued) “HINGED” STYLE LINKAGE INSTALLATION 1. Secure the conduit to the detector bracket using 1/2 in. steel compression fittings. Thread the compression fitting into the detector bracket and then secure by using the lock nut supplied with the fitting. See Figure 32. 1/2 IN. STEEL COMPRESSION FITTINGS

1/2 IN. COMPRESSION FITTING NUT

FIGURE 32 000330

NOTICE Do not use zinc die cast compression connectors on the detection conduit lines as zinc will not withstand the normally high temperatures experienced in the hazard area.

6. At the terminal detector, feed wire rope through the terminal detector clamping device. Allow 2-3 in. (5-8 cm) of wire rope to extend beyond the clamping device and wrench tighten the set screws. See Figure 34. 2–3 IN. (5–8 cm)

FIGURE 34 000332

7. To give a constant tension on the wire rope during positioning of the detector linkage(s), hang a vise grip or other weighted device on the excess stainless steel wire rope, leaving an adequate length of spare wire rope between the locking clamp and the weighted device. NOTICE When attaching the weighted device to the excess wire rope, allow approximately 3 in. (8 cm) of wire rope for each detector linkage for proper installation.

2. Starting at the release assembly, feed wire rope up through hole in release mechanism locking clamp, allowing excess wire rope to hang down. Do not tighten set screws in locking clamp at this time. See Figure 33. LOCKING CLAMP

Example: If the system has six detectors, there should be approximately 18 in. (46 cm) of excess wire rope between the locking clamp and the weighted device, which will be utilized when the linkage is put in place. 8. Starting at the terminal detector, squeeze the linkage together and place the correctly rated Ansul approved fusible link over both detector hooks. For optimum detection, make certain the solder joint is in the down position. Locate the linkage in the center of the detector bracket. See Figure 35.

FIGURE 33 000309

3. From the release assembly, run the stainless steel wire rope through the conduit, pulley elbows, and to the first detector. 4. Before continuing on past the detector bracket, feed the wire rope through the detector linkage assembly. See Figure 34. 5. Continue running the wire rope through the conduit and pulley elbows and feed it through each detector linkage assembly at each additional bracket.

7-14

FIGURE 35 000333

Section 7 – Installation 6-19-98 REV. 1 INSTALLING DETECTION/ACTUATION (Continued) Mechanical ANSUL AUTOMAN Release With Fusible Link (Continued) “HINGED” STYLE LINKAGE INSTALLATION (Continued) 9. Proceed to install the remainder of the Ansul approved fusible links on the detector hooks and position the linkage in the center of each bracket.

12. Remove the cocking lever and insert lock bar, Part No. 14985, on the left side of the cable lever, over the two shouldered projecting stud extensions, and slide the bar forward into the locking position. The release mechanism cannot be actuated, nor can enclosure cover be replaced until the lock bar is removed. See Figure 38.

10. Insert cocking lever, Part No. 14995, on left side of release mechanism with the movable flange resting securely against the corner of cartridge receiver and spring housing, with the notched lever portion engaging the cocking pin on both sides of the release. See Figure 36. LOCK BAR PROPERLY INSTALLED

FIGURE 38

COCKING PIN

000321

13. Make certain tension lever is in the “UP” position. See Figure 39.

COCKING LEVER

FIGURE 36 000319

11. With a downward motion of the cocking lever, raise the cocking pin until trip hammer indented surface moves underneath the pin. See Figure 37.


FIGURE 39 000322

14. Verify each detector linkage assembly, with correct fusible link, is approximately centered in the detector bracket.

FIGURE 37 001882

NOTICE Due to the close adjustment between the trip hammer and cable lever assemblies, use only the particular fusible link(s) selected for the installation in each detector, including the terminal detector, to ensure correct adjustment when performing Steps 15 and 16. 15. Raise trip hammer 3/8 in. to 1/2 in. (9.5 to 12.7 mm), pull all slack out of wire rope, and tighten set screw on locking clamp.

7-15

Section 7 – Installation 6-19-98 REV. 1 INSTALLING DETECTION/ACTUATION SYSTEM (Continued)

Quartzoid Bulb Actuator (QBA-5)

Mechanical ANSUL AUTOMAN Release With Fusible Link (Continued) “HINGED” STYLE LINKAGE INSTALLATION (Continued) 16. Lower tension lever to “DOWN” position and inspect the base of wire rope clamping device to make certain that there is a minimum of 1/4 in. (6.4 mm) to 3/8 in. (9.5 mm) maximum clearance between the base of the trip hammer assembly and cable lever assembly. See Figure 40. If clearance is not 1/4 in. (6.4 mm) minimum to 3/8 in. (9.5 mm) maximum, raise tension lever, loosen set screws on locking clamp and repeat Steps 15 and 16. TRIP HAMMER ASSEMBLY

The Quartzoid Bulb Actuator (QBA-5) release actuates the carbon dioxide system pilot cylinder by releasing the carbon dioxide in its cylinder through 1/8 in. pipe. The QBA-5 is available in three temperature ratings. The unit should be mounted directly above the hazard. The unit is equipped with a mounting bracket. See Figure 41. 1/4 – 18 NPT OUTLET RELEASE MECHANISM 1/4 IN. X 1/8 IN. REDUCER (NOT SUPPLIED)

SAFETY RELIEF BURSTING DISC

BRACKET

TEMPERATURE RATING STAMPED HERE

NAMEPLATE

QUARTZOID BULB 1/4 IN. (6.4 mm) MINIMUM 3/8 in. (9.5 mm) MAXIMUM

NAMEPLATE CARBON DIOXIDE CYLINDER

TRIP HAMMER BASE

FIGURE 41 001400

The maximum length of 1/8 in. pipe between the Quartzoid Bulb Actuator and the carbon dioxide pilot cylinders is 100 ft. (30.5 m). FIGURE 40 000323

17. Test detection system in accordance with the Testing and Placing in Service Section of this manual. 18. When all testing has been completed in the Testing and Placing in Service Section, cut off excess wire rope in the release assembly, leaving approximately 2 in. (5.1 cm) of wire rope below the clamping device. INSTALLING ACTUATORS When installing actuators on the carbon dioxide valve, different styles are available depending on the requirements of the system design or type of valve. Actuators can be stacked to get the options of manual, pneumatic, and electric actuation.

7-16

In order to determine the normal operating temperature at the QBA-5 location, utilize a maximum registering thermometer, Part No. 15240. Part No. Description 42267 QBA-5 Assembly with bracket 135 °F (57 °C) 42274 QBA-5 Assembly with bracket 175 °F (79 °C) 42276 QBA-5 Assembly with bracket 250 °F (121 °C) 41893 QBA-5 Assembly without bracket 135 °F (57 °C) 41894 QBA-5 Assembly without bracket 175 °F (79 °C) 41895 QBA-5 Assembly without bracket 250 °F (121 °C)

Section 7 – Installation 6-19-98 REV. 1 INSTALLING ACTUATORS (Continued) Pneumatic – CV-90 Valve

Pneumatic Actuation – CV-98 Valve

The manual/pneumatic actuator, Part No. 32094, is used where a system design requires manual-local override at the cylinder. The manual actuator can be mounted directly to the release attachment port of the cylinder valve. Operation is accomplished by either removing the ring pin and depressing the red palm button or by supplying a minimum of 100 psi (690 kPa) from an ANSUL AUTOMAN II-C Release to the inlet port. A swivel connection is provided to facilitate orientation of the inlet port. See Figure 42.

To install pneumatic actuation, complete the following steps: 1. Remove the 1/4 in. pipe plug from the 1/4 in. actuation port. See Figure 44. 2. Attach 1/4 in. high pressure hose to 1/4 in. actuation port. See Figure 44. Securely tighten. REMOVE 1/4 IN. PLUG

INLET PORT 1/4 IN. NPT FEMALE PIPE THREAD

FROM ANSUL AUTOMAN II-C OR PRESSURE SOURCE 100 PSI (6.9 Bar) MINIMUM

SWIVEL NUT

FIGURE 44

CYLINDER VALVE

002349

FIGURE 42 002261

The other pneumatic actuator, Part No. 32096, is used where a system design requires only pneumatic actuation at the cylinder. The pneumatic actuator can be mounted directly to the release attachment port of the valve. Operation is accomplished by supplying a minimum of 100 psi (690 kPa) from an ANSUL AUTOMAN II-C Release to the inlet port. A swivel fitting is provided for orientation of the piping. See Figure 43.

3. Connect high pressure actuation piping to ANSUL AUTOMAN II-C outlet port. 4. When utilizing multiple cylinder pneumatic actuation, a maximum of 15 CO2 secondary pilot cylinders can be actuated through the 1/4 in. actuation port. See Figure 44a.

INLET PORT 1/4 IN. NPT FEMALE PIPE THREAD

SWIVEL NUT

CYLINDER VALVE

ADAPTOR, PART NO. 73236 (TYP.)

FIGURE 43 001884

TEE, PART NO. 418359 (TYP.) MALE ELBOW, PART NO. 832334 (TYP.)

16 IN. STAINLESS STEEL HOSE, PART NO. 31809 (TYP.)

FIGURE 44a 002714

7-17

Section 7 – Installation 6-19-98 REV. 1 INSTALLING ACTUATORS (Continued) Manual Along with the manual means of actuation on the manual/ pneumatic actuator, three styles of lever actuators are available which offer manual actuation at the cylinder and can be connected to a remote manual pull station. Manual actuation is accomplished by pulling the valve hand lever. The lever design contains a forged mechanical detent which secures the lever in the open position when actuated. !

CAUTION

Before mounting the lever actuator(s) on the cylinder valves, make certain the lever actuator is in the “SET” position. If the lever actuator is not in the “SET” position, cylinder will discharge when lever actuator is installed. See Figure 45 for installation details.

MUST BE IN THE SET POSITION BEFORE INSTALLING

Two styles of actuators are available for the CV-98 valve: – Part No. 423309, manual cable-pull actuator (handle and pin; for local control) – Part No. 423311, manual cable-pull actuator (no handle, no pin; for remote control) Electric – CV-90 Valve Electric actuation of a carbon dioxide cylinder is accomplished by either an HF electric actuator or a solenoid actuator interfaced through an AUTOPULSE Control System. A maximum of two HF electric actuators can be used on a single AUTOPULSE release circuit. The HF actuator, Part No. 73327, mounts directly to the release attachment port of the carbon dioxide valve. See Figure 47. Connect electrical circuit for the HF actuator to the control system by following wiring instructions in the “HF” Electric Actuator Application and Installation Sheet, Part No. 73330.

SWIVEL NUT

CYLINDER VALVE

FIGURE 45 001849

If the system requires two lever actuators, use connecting link, Part No. 42514, to tie the two together. See Figure 46.

CONNECTING LINK

FIGURE 46 001885

7-18

Three styles of actuators are available for the CV-90 valve: – Part No. 70846, Manual cable-pull actuator (handle and pin; for local control) – Part No. 70847, Manual cable-pull actuator (handle, no pin; for remote control with three or more cylinders) – Part No. 32098, Manual cable-pull actuator (no handle, no pin; for use with three or more cylinders)

Section 7 – Installation 6-19-98 REV. 1 INSTALLING ACTUATORS (Continued)

Stacking Actuators

Electric Actuator – CV-98 Valve

Some system designs require more than one type of actuation means. Actuators can be stacked, one on top of the other, to accomplish this. Figure 48 shows the different ways the actuators can be arranged.

A maximum of two CV-98 electric actuators can be installed on a single AUTOPULSE release circuit. !

CAUTION

Before installing electric actuator to top of CV-98 valve, make certain piston in bottom of actuator is free to move up and down. If piston is in the down position, DO NOT INSTALL.

CV-90 OR CV-98 VALVE

1. Attach actuator to top thread of CV-98 valve. Securely tighten. !

CV-90 VALVE

CAUTION

Make certain all electric power from the panel to the actuator has been disconnected. Failure to disconnect power may cause system to accidentally discharge.

ELECTRIC (NO OVERRIDE) 001847

2. Connect electric circuit for actuator to Control System. Refer to appropriate AUTOPULSE Manual and CV-98 Electric Actuator Application and Installation Sheet, Part No. 426003 for detailed wiring.


ELECTRIC WITH MANUAL/CABLE OVERRIDE 001887

ELECTRIC WITH MANUAL-LOCAL OVERRIDE (PNEUMATIC CAPABILITY)

001886

CV-90 VALVE

MANUAL LOCAL OVERRIDE (PNEUMATIC CAPABILITY)

001888

HF ELECTRIC ACTUATOR OR CV-98 ELECTRIC ACTUATOR

CV-90 VALVE


CO2 CYLINDER

FIGURE 47

PNEUMATIC SLAVE 001889

001851

CV-90 VALVE

RATE OF RISE CONTROL HEAD 001890

MANUAL CABLE PULL (OR LOCAL OVERRIDE)

001848

CV-90 VALVE

RATE OF RISE CONTROL HEAD WITH REMOTE CABLE RELEASE 001891

FIGURE 48 7-19

Section 7 – Installation 6-19-98 REV. 1 INSTALLING ACCESSORIES Manual Pull Station Depending on the type of actuation being used, there are a number of different pull stations available. Remote pull stations can be either mechanical, pneumatic, or electric. MECHANICAL PULL STATION TO ANSUL AUTOMAN RELEASE – To install a mechanical pull station complete the following steps: 1. Make certain the release assembly enclosure cover is detached and lock bar is properly inserted within the release mechanism.

If a pulley tee is used, it must be installed between the release assembly and first pulley elbow. The ambient temperature range of the pulley tee is between 32 °F to 130 °F (0 °C to 54 °C). REMOTE MANUAL PULL STATION SINGLE APPLICATION PULLEY ELBOW

RELEASE MECHANISM CABLE LEVER WIRE ROPE

NOTICE Failure to follow these instructions may lead to system actuation. 2. Verify that cartridge has been removed from release assembly and that the release assembly is in the cocked position. 3. Select a convenient location in the path of exit for mounting the pull station(s) to the wall. Height and location of pull station should be determined in accordance with authority having jurisdiction. The total length of the wire rope used for each manual pull station within a system must not exceed 125 ft. (38 m). The maximum number of pulley elbows that may be used per system is 18 of Part No. 423250 and 415670. 4. If junction box(es) is used, fasten a 4 in. (10 cm) junction box to wall or in wall where pull station is to be mounted, with mounting screws positioned so that when pull station cover is positioned in place, the printing will appear right side up and readable. ALTERNATE METHOD OF CONNECTION: a. Thread 3/4 x 1/2 in. reducing coupling to bushing on back of each cover assembly. b. Mount pull station cover(s) directly to wall at selected location so that printing is right side up and readable. 5. Install and secure 1/2 in. conduit, pulley tee (if required), and pulley elbows from each pull station to release assembly as necessary. See Figures 49 and 50.

OVAL SLEEVE

BREAK ROD LOCK BAR SIDE STUD

JUNCTION BOX (NOT SUPPLIED BY ANSUL)

RING HANDLE

REMOTE MANUAL PULL STATION

FIGURE 49 001892

REMOTE MANUAL PULL STATION DUAL APPLICATION PULLEY TEE

WIRE ROPE

PULLEY ELBOW RELEASE MECHANISM JUNCTION BOX (NOT SUPPLIED BY ANSUL)

OVAL SLEEVE CABLE LEVER

COCKED

LOCK BAR



FIGURE 50 001893

6. Feed wire rope from each pull station through conduit and each pulley elbow to cable lever located at release assembly. NOTICE Make certain that wire rope rides on top and in center of pulley sheave. If the wire rope has been spliced to accommodate a longer run, do not allow the spliced ends to be within 12 in. (30 cm) of any pulley elbow or conduit adaptor. 7. Fasten pull station assembly to each junction box (if junction box is used). 8. Slide oval crimp sleeve onto wire rope. Loop wire rope through cable lever guide holes and back through the oval crimp sleeve. See Figure 49.

7-20

Section 7 – Installation 6-19-98 REV. 1 INSTALLING ACCESSORIES (Continued) Manual Pull Station (Continued) 9. Pull slack out of each wire rope and crimp sleeve. (Use the National Telephone Supply Company Nicopress Sleeve tool Stock No. 51-C-887 or equal to properly crimp stop sleeve.) See Figure 49. MECHANICAL PULL STATION TO ANSUL AUTOMAN II-C RELEASE – To install a mechanical pull station complete the following steps: 1. Insert ring pin in ANSUL AUTOMAN II-C release. See Figure 51.

RESET LEVER RING PIN

FIGURE 51 001894

2. If necessary, remove cartridge and install safety shipping cap on cartridge. 3. Select a convenient location in the path of exit for mounting the pull station(s) to the wall. Height and location of pull station should be determined in accordance with authority having jurisdiction. The total length of the wire rope used for each manual pull station within a system must not exceed 125 ft. (38 m). The maximum number of pulley elbows that may be used per system is 18 of Part No. 423250 and 415670. 4. If junction box(es) is used, fasten a 4 in. (10 cm) junction box to wall or in wall where pull station is to be mounted, with mounting screws positioned so that when pull station cover is positioned in place, the printing will appear right side up and readable. ALTERNATE METHOD OF CONNECTION: a. Thread 3/4 x 1/2 in. reducing coupling to bushing on back of each cover assembly. b. Mount pull station cover(s) directly to wall at selected location so that printing is right side up and readable. 5. Install and secure 1/2 in. conduit, pulley tee (if required), and pulley elbows from each pull station to release assembly as necessary. See Figures 49 and 50.

If a pulley tee is used, it must be installed between the release assembly and first pulley elbow. The ambient temperature range of the pulley tee is between 32 °F to 130 °F (0 °C to 54 °C). 6. Feed wire rope from each pull station through conduit and each pulley elbow to cable lever located at release assembly. NOTICE Make certain that wire rope rides on top and in center of pulley sheave. If the wire rope has been spliced to accommodate a longer run, do not allow the spliced ends to be within 12 in. (30 cm) of any pulley elbow or conduit adaptor. 7. Fasten pull station assembly to each junction box (if junction box is used). 8. Thread wire rope through rear guide hole in manual trip lever on release. See Figure 49. 9. Pull all slack out of wire rope and thread end through sleeve, Part No. 4596. 10. Loop the wire rope back up around and through top of sleeve. 11. Position sleeve approximately 1/2 in. (1.3 cm) and crimp to secure wire rope. (Use the National Telephone Supply Company Nicopress Sleeve tool Stock No. 51-C-887 or equal to properly crimp stop sleeve.) See Figure 52. MECHANICAL PULL STATION TO LEVER RELEASE – To install a mechanical pull station complete the following steps: 1. Select a convenient location in the path of exit for mounting the pull station(s) to the wall. Height and location of pull station should be determined in accordance with authority having jurisdiction. The total length of the wire rope used for each manual pull station within a system must not exceed 125 ft. (38 m). The maximum number of pulley elbows that may be used per system is 18 of Part No. 423250 and 415670. 2. If junction box(es) is used, fasten a 4 in. (10 cm) junction box to wall or in wall where pull station is to be mounted, with mounting screws positioned so that when pull station cover is positioned in place, the printing will appear right side up and readable.

7-21

Section 7 – Installation 6-19-98 REV. 1 INSTALLING ACCESSORIES (Continued) Manual Station (Continued) ALTERNATE METHOD OF CONNECTION: a. Thread 3/4 x 1/2 in. reducing coupling to bushing on back of each cover assembly. b. Mount pull station cover(s) directly to wall at selected location so that printing is right side up and readable. 3. Install and secure 1/2 in. conduit, dual/triple junction box, and pulley elbows from each pull station to release assembly as necessary. 4. Feed wire rope from pull station through conduit and each pulley elbow to cable lever located at release assembly. NOTICE Make certain that wire rope rides on top and in center of pulley sheave. If the wire rope has been spliced to accommodate a longer run, do not allow the spliced ends to be within 12 in. (30 cm) of any pulley elbow or conduit adaptor. 5. Fasten pull station assembly to each junction box (if junction box is used). !

CAUTION

Wire or pin the actuator lever in the “SET” position before connecting the cable to the lever. Failure to comply could result in accidental agent discharge. 6. Wire or pin the actuator lever in the “SET” position to prevent accidental discharge when installing the cable. See Figure 52. 7. Feed cable through hole in actuator lever and fasten with cable clamp. See Figure 52.

7-22

8. When installing, make certain there is at least 7 in. (17.8 cm) of free cable between the cable clamp and the flared end fitting for proper operation of lever. See Figure 52. CABLE CLAMP TEMPORARILY PIN OR WIRE LEVER IN “SET” POSITION WHILE INSTALLING CABLE

PULL CABLE 7 IN. (17.8 cm) MINIMUM

PULL CABLE

CONDUIT

FLARED END FITTING

CORNER PULLEY

FIGURE 52 001895

9. Remove wire or pin that was used to hold the lever in place during cable installation. MECHANICAL PULL STATION TO H.A.D. MECHANICAL HEAD – CV-90 VALVE ONLY – To install a mechanical pull station complete the following steps: 1. Select a convenient location in the path of exit for mounting the pull station(s) to the wall. Height and location of pull station should be determined in accordance with authority having jurisdiction. The total length of the wire rope used for each manual pull station within a system must not exceed 125 ft. (38 m). The maximum number of pulley elbows that may be used per system is 18 of Part No. 423250 or 415670. 2. If junction box(es) is used, fasten a 4 in. (10 cm) junction box to wall or in wall where pull station is to be mounted, with mounting screws positioned so that when pull station cover is positioned in place, the printing will appear right side up and readable. ALTERNATE METHOD OF CONNECTION: a. Thread 3/4 x 1/2 in. reducing coupling to bushing on back of each cover assembly. b. Mount pull station cover(s) directly to wall at selected location so that printing is right side up and readable.

Section 7 – Installation 6-19-98 REV. 1 INSTALLING ACCESSORIES (Continued) Manual Pull Station (Continued) 3. Install and secure 1/2 in. conduit, dual/triple junction box, and pulley elbows from each pull station to release assembly as necessary. See Figures 49 and 50. 4. Feed wire rope from pull station through conduit and each pulley elbow to cable lever located at release assembly. NOTICE Make certain that wire rope rides on top and in center of pulley sheave. If the wire rope has been spliced to accommodate a longer run, do not allow the spliced ends to be within 12 in. (30 cm) of any pulley elbow or conduit adaptor. 5. Fasten pull station assembly to each junction box (if junction box is used).

!

8. Remove pipe plug and install flexible conduit, Ansul Part No. 42788, from control head to conduit run. See Figure 53. PULL CABLE VENTED CONTROL HEAD

LOCAL MANUAL RELEASE

6. Remove nameplate cover from front of control head. 7. Place control head adjacent to valve actuation connection so that the length of the cable and the flexible conduit will be the same as if the control head was actually installed on the valve.

CORNER PULLEY

FLEXIBLE CONDUIT

(1–2 CYLINDER SYSTEMS)

001896a

CONTROL HEAD WITHOUT VENT

VENTED CONTROL HEAD

LOCAL MANUAL RELEASE LONG FLEXIBLE CONDUIT

FLEXIBLE CONDUIT PART NO. 45500

CAUTION

Do not attempt to install control cable when control head is attached to cylinder valve. Failure to comply could result in accidental agent discharge.

CONDUIT

3 OR MORE CYLINDER SYSTEMS

FIGURE 53 001896b

9. Pull on end of cable to take up slack in conduit. 10. Insert cable into mounting block and secure with set screws. On systems requiring two control heads (3 or more cylinders), run cable completely through to second control head. Make certain to secure both set screws in both control heads. See Figure 54. 11. Cut cable not more than 1/2 in. (13mm) beyond the cable mounting block. See Figure 54.

CABLE BLOCK

RATE-OF-RISE CONTROL HEAD

CABLE PULL

CONDUIT SET SCREWS CORNER PULLEY LONG FLEXIBLE CONDUIT 1/2 IN. (1.3 cm)

SWIVEL NUT

NAMEPLATE REMOVED

(1–2 CYLINDER SYSTEMS)

SHORT FLEXIBLE CONDUIT

1/2 IN. (1.3 cm)

LONG FLEXIBLE CONDUIT (3 OR MORE CYLINDER SYSTEMS)

FIGURE 54 001897

7-23

Section 7 – Installation 6-19-98 REV. 1 INSTALLING ACCESSORIES (Continued) Manual Pull Station (Continued) 12. Reinstall nameplate cover onto front of control head. !

CAUTION

Make certain that control head is in the "SET" position with ring pin in place before installing onto discharge valve. Failure to comply could result in accidental agent discharge. 13. Make certain control head is in the “SET” position. Indicator arrow on reset control must point to “SET.” 14. Make certain ring pin is inserted through manual release lever and is secured with visual inspection seal. 15. Remove actuation shipping cap from top thread of carbon dioxide cylinder valve. 16. Thread the control head onto top thread of carbon dioxide cylinder valve. Do not exceed 10 ft. lb. (13.6 Nm) torque. ELECTRIC PULL STATION TO AUTOPULSE CONTROL PANEL – The electric pull station must be mounted in an area where it will not be exposed to physical abuse or a corrosive environment. The pull station should be mounted no higher than 60 in. (153 cm) from the floor, or what the authority having jurisdiction requires. See AUTOPULSE Installation, Operation, and Maintenance Manuals, Part No. 74255, 77498, 77513, or 69970 for detailed wiring instructions. PNEUMATIC STATION TO PNEUMATIC CYLINDER VALVE – To install a manual pneumatic actuator complete the following steps: 1. Select a convenient location in the path of exit for mounting the pull station(s) to the wall. Height and location of pull station should be determined in accordance with authority having jurisdiction. The total length of 1/4 in. piping used for each manual pull station within a system must not exceed 125 ft. (38 m).

2. Weld or bolt mounting bracket to the selected surface. See Figure 55. NOTICE Where bolting the mounting bracket is preferred, use 3/8 in. (corrosionresistant) bolts of appropriate length, with lockwashers and nuts.

MOUNTING BRACKET 3/8 IN. CORROSIONRESISTANT TYPE

WELD

FIGURE 55 001898

3. Unscrew the RED actuator button from the actuator stem and slide actuator body through mounting hole on bracket. See Figure 56. 4. Rotate actuator body for desired location of actuation piping outlet connection. Screw locknut firmly onto actuator body and insert ring pin. Reassemble button onto the stem. See Figure 56. RED ACTUATOR BUTTON

LOCK NUT

MOUNTING BRACKET ACTUATOR BODY

RING PIN AND CHAIN

FIGURE 56 001899

7-24

Section 7 – Installation 6-1-98 REV. 1 INSTALLING ACCESSORIES (Continued) Manual Pull Station (Continued) 5. Affix the appropriate operating nameplate adjacent to the manual actuator so that it is visible to attending personnel. See Figure 57. 6. Make certain ring pin is inserted through the RED actuator button to ensure safe cartridge installation. See Figure 57.

24 VDC ALARMS – All alarms used with the AUTOPULSE Control System require 24 VDC power. See the Component Index in the appropriate AUTOPULSE Installation, Operation, and Maintenance Manual for description of available alarms. 120 VAC ALARMS – This type of alarm bell can only be utilized with an ANSUL AUTOMAN II-C Release or a mechanical ANSUL AUTOMAN Release. It can not be used on an AUTOPULSE Control System. To properly install the 120 VAC alarm, complete the following:

NAMEPLATE

NOTICE All wiring installations must comply with local, state, and federal codes and must be completed by a licensed electrician.

FIGURE 57 001900

7. Seal ring pin to actuator stem with visual inspection seal, Part No. 197. Make certain visual inspection seal is looped through ring pin and around actuator stem. Do not wrap seal around the boot cover. See Figure 58. RED ACTUATOR BUTTON

PLACE WIRE BETWEEN RED ACTUATOR BUTTON AND BOOT COVER

BOOT COVER WIRE

RING PIN

1. Install the alarm by first selecting a mounting location and installing a 4 in. octagon or 4 in. square junction box. 2. Run 1/2 in. conduit from the releasing device to the junction box. 3. Feed lead-in wires from release and power supply junction box. 4. Refer to appropriate wiring diagrams and connect wires in release junction box. 5. Disassemble alarm by removing bolt from face of bell housing. 6. Connect lead-in wires to leads from rear of alarm plunger mechanism. 7. Secure alarm plunger mechanism mounting plate to junction box. 8. Reassemble bell housing to alarm mechanism. Selector Valves

NOTE: DO NOT APPLY WIRE AROUND BODY COVER

FIGURE 58 1901

8. Install 1/4 in. actuation piping from manual actuator to pneumatic actuator(s) on cylinder valve(s). Make certain safety vent plug, Part No. 42175, is installed in actuation line. 9. Install nitrogen cartridge in actuator body.

Before installing the selector valves, it is necessary to determine the required size. This must be calculated in the Design Section by the Ansul ANSCALC Computer program. The location of the selector valve should have been determined on the piping sketch and approved by the authority having jurisdiction.

Alarms Several types of alarms are available for use with the carbon dioxide system. Some require 24 VDC power and others require 120 VAC. Make certain that the alarm chosen is compatible with the detection system control panel used.

7-25

Section 7 – Installation 6-19-98 REV. 1 INSTALLING ACCESSORIES (Continued) Selector Valves (Continued) For installing selector valves, complete the following: 1/2 IN. THRU 1 1/2 IN. SIZE VALVES – These size valves are equipped with a threaded body. The valves are normally supplied for local pressure operation but can be ordered special for remote pressure operation. 1. At the location where the valve(s) are to be mounted, make certain they will not be subject to damage or corrosion.

2 IN. THRU 4 IN. SIZE VALVES – These selector valves are flanged and require carbon dioxide pressure for actuation. Depending on the location of the top plate, the carbon dioxide pressure is received either locally (from the valve inlet through a specially machined port in the valve) or remotely (piped into the remote inlet from a remote pressure source). It is important to determine the type of valve needed in the installation (local or remote) and to identify which type of valve it is. !

!

CAUTION

Make certain directional arrow on valve body points in the direction of agent flow. If valve is incorrectly installed, system will not discharge. 2. Install valve(s) in the distribution piping making certain there is enough room above the valve to install the required actuation component. Also, make certain flow direction arrow on valve body is in the correct orientation. NOTICE If valve is very heavy, precautions must be taken to properly support the weight of the valve in the distribution piping network. 3. With valve properly installed and supported, attach actuation component to top threads of valve and pipe or wire back to detection panel, releasing device, or discharge manifold. See Figure 59. 4. If required, run 1/4 in. piping from the auxiliary outlet on the valve flange to remote pressure operated devices, such as remote discharge indicator, pressure trip, or pressure switch. (OPEN POSITION)

(CLOSED POSITION)

(OPEN POSITION)

The incorrect selection of a valve in a installation will result in valve malfunction during actuation.

To determine which type of valve you have, carefully examine the location of the top cover plate and its position on the valve body casting. The body casting has a 1/4 in. pipe port labeled “Remote Inlet” on the top flange casting directly above the valve outlet flange. The top cover plate has a 1/4 in. pipe port labeled “Auxiliary Outlet” on the side of the plate. If the “Auxiliary Outlet” port is directly above the "Remote Inlet" port, the valve is a LOCAL type. If the “Auxiliary Outlet” port is 180 opposite the “Remote Inlet” port, the valve is a REMOTE type. NOTICE The top plate has an unmarked 1/4 in. plug which should never be used. Connection of any piping to this port will result in valve malfunction.

(CLOSED POSITION)

HAND LEVER LOCKING PIN AND CHAIN ACTUATOR NAMEPLATE

HAND LEVER

RESET KNOB

AIR VENT

CAUTION

(OPEN POSITION)

(CLOSED POSITION) HAND LEVER LOCKING PIN AND CHAIN ACTUATOR NAMEPLATE RESET KNOB

PIPE

SOLENOID VALVE

AIR VENT

AIR VENT

FIGURE 59 001902a

7-26

001902b

001902c

Section 7 – Installation 2-22-01 REV. 2 INSTALLING ACCESSORIES (Continued) Selector Valves (Continued) Complete the following steps to ensure that the valve will function as required: 1. Identify valve as previously indicated (local or remote). 2. Install valve in carbon dioxide distribution piping. The 2, 2 1/2, 3, and 4 in. valves require 3 in. x 2 in., 3 in. x 2 1/2 in., 3 in. x 3 in., or 3 in. x 4 in. flanges respectively to mate with the valve bolting circle. Flanges must be ASA 600 lb. class only.

!

CAUTION

The use of any flange other than specified in Step 2 will cause a mismatch of bolting circles. This will result in a hazardous application which could cause personal injury due to the high pressures involved in the carbon dioxide system. 3. If valve is a REMOTE type, connect the remote pressure piping to the valve “Remote Inlet” port. 4. If auxiliary piping is required, connect piping to the 1/4 in. “Auxiliary Outlet” port on the valve top cover plate. This port becomes pressurized when the valve is actuated. (A typical use for this is pressure switch connection to activate a discharge alarm.)

!

CAUTION

Pre-discharge alarms, which warn personnel of an impending carbon dioxide discharge, must not be connected to this port. This port only become pressurized when the valve is activated.

5. With valve properly installed and supported, attach actuation component to top threads of valve and pipe or wire back to detection panel of releasing device. See Figure 59. NOTICE When using an electric solenoid valve for selector valve actuation, only one solenoid valve is allowed per AUTOPULSE circuit. See “Solenoid Valve RetroFit Instructions For Selection Valves,” Part No. 415846, for detailed installation instructions. Lock Handle Stop Valves The lock handle stop valves are threaded ball valves. The valve must be installed in the direction of the flow label. When installing the valve, make certain the threads on the mating pipe are free from grit, dirt, or burrs. Care must be taken to assure that any pipe sealants used are not so excessively applied to the pipe threads that the valve cavity becomes obstructed. The valves are equipped with a monitoring switch to provide constant supervision of the valve at the control panel. Each valve shipping assembly includes detailed wiring instructions. Direction/Stop Valves Directional valves can be manually actuated in two ways; either at the valve with the hand lever or remotely with a manual cable pull station attached to a sector located on the directional valve. Before installing the valve in the carbon dioxide discharge piping, make certain there is enough clearance for either the hand lever to swing freely or the sector to rotate properly. See Figure 60 for dimension information. NOTICE Maximum distance a manual cable pull station can be located from the sector on the directional valve is 125 ft. (38.1 m). Operating force must be a maximum of 40# and require no more than 14 in. (35 cm) of travel to open valve.

7-27

Section 7 – Installation 6-19-98 REV. 1 INSTALLING ACCESSORIES (Continued) Detection/Stop Valves (Continued)

C D PIPE HANDLE IN NORMALLY CLOSED POSITION

HANDLE IN OPEN POSITION

B

E

“THIS DIMENSION WITH VALVE IN OPEN POSITION” A 001871

Valve Size

A in.

(cm)

B in.

(cm)

C in.

(cm)

D in.

(cm)

E in.

(cm)

1/2 in. 3/4 in. 1 in. 1 1/4 in. 1 1/2 in.

10 14 14 17 17

(25.4) (35.5) (35.5) (43.1) (43.1)

9 3/8 12 3/4 12 3/4 15 5/8 15 5/8

(23.8) (32.3) (32.3) (39.6) (39.6)

4 3/4 5 5/8 6 3/8 7 7/8 8 1/4

(12) (14.2) (16.1) (20) (20.9)

7/8 1 1/8 1 7/16 1 11/16 1 7/8

(2.2) (2.8) (3.6) (4.2) (4.7)

215/16 3 5/8 41/8 5 5 1/2

(7.4) (9.2) (10.4) (12.7) (13.9)

4 3/4 IN. (12 cm)

1/8 IN. STAINLESS STEEL OR MONEL CABLE TO PULL BOX

A IN OPEN POSITION

3/8 IN. FLARED END FITTING CABLE TO HAVE A SLIGHT SLACK WHEN VALVE IS IN CLOSED POSITION 3 3/8 IN. (8.5 cm)

B

ATTACH CABLE IN “FIGURE 8 (LOOP)” BEFORE FASTENING CLAMP D

IN. 7 11/16 ) m (19.5 c

CABLE CLAMP 6 13/16 IN. (17.3 cm)

30°

PROVIDE A STOP FOR SECTOR A THIS POINT

001872

Valve Size

A in.

(cm)

B in.

(cm)

C in

(cm)

D in

(cm)

1/2 in. 3/4 in. 1 in. 1 1/4 in. 1 1/2 in.

4 3/4 5 5/8 6 5/16 8 1/8 8 1/4

(12) (14.2) (16) (20.6) (20.9)

3 3 5/8 4 1/8 5 1/4 5 3/8

(7.6) (9.3) (10.4) (13.3) (13.6)

7/8 1 1/8 1 7/16 1 11/16 1 7/8

(2.2) (2.8) (3.6) (4.2) (4.7)

2 15/16 3 5/8 4 1/8 5 5 1/2

(7.4) (9.2) (10.4) (12.7) (13.9) FIGURE 60

7-28

Section 7 – Installation 6-19-98 REV. 2 INSTALLING ACCESSORIES (Continued) Pressure Trip Pressure trips are used to actuate spring loaded or weighted mechanisms generally used to close doors or windows. The pressure trip should be securely mounted in the appropriate location and piped with 1/4 in. actuation piping back to the release device. Pressure trips can be piped off the carbon dioxide discharge piping, which is the preferred method, or if the system is utilizing an ANSUL AUTOMAN II-C or mechanical ANSUL AUTOMAN release device, the pressure trip can be piped off the actuation line. See Figure 61. Pressure trips can be piped in series and the last pressure trip must contain a 1/4 in. plug in the outlet port. See Figure 61. Maximum of two pressure trips in a single actuation line. Operating pressure must be a minimum of 75 psi (517 kPa) with a maximum load of 70 lbs. (31.8 kg).

Wire each pressure switch to other compatible components in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. A QUALIFIED ELECTRICIAN should connect all electrical components in accordance with the authority having jurisdiction. Time Delay The time delay is available in settings of 10, 30, and 60 second delays. The time delay should be installed in the carbon dioxide system distribution piping. On one or two cylinder systems, the time delay should be mounted as close to the cylinder as conveniently possible. On multiple cylinder systems, the time delay should be mounted in the discharge manifold, between the pilot cylinders and the slave cylinders. See Figure 62. The time delay can be mounted in any position, vertical, horizontal, or any angle in between. The time delay has 3/4 in. NPT inlet and outlet threads which will require reducing couplings if the manifold is smaller than 3/4 in. pipe.

PRESSURE TRIP, PART NO. 805156

PRESSURE TRIP INSTALLATION

PLUG LAST PRESSURE TRIP

PRESSURE SWITCH (SEE COMPONENT SECTION) 1/4 IN. VENT PLUG, PART NO. 842175

FIGURE 62 001867

FIGURE 61 001903

Pressure Switch Pressure switches are used to pneumatically operate electrical circuits which, in turn, will operate alarms, lights, or turn on or turn off equipment. Pressure switches can be piped off the carbon dioxide discharge manifold, which is the preferred method, or if the system is utilizing an ANSUL AUTOMAN II-C or mechanical ANSUL AUTOMAN release device, the pressure switch can be piped off the actuation line. See Figure 64. 1. Mount pressure switch(es) in desired location(s) with appropriate fasteners. 2. Install piping from main actuation line or from the carbon dioxide distribution manifold to pressure switch fitting. Piping to be 1/4 in. Schedule 40, black or galvanized steel pipe. The piping must be reduced from 3/8 in. NPT to 1/8 in. NPT to assemble to pressure switch (3/8 in. to 1/8 in. reducing coupling not furnished).

Pressure Operated Siren The pressure operated siren operates off the carbon dioxide of the system. The siren should be piped with 1/4 in. Schedule 40 piping coming off the system discharge manifold. A maximum of four sirens are allowed on a single system. The maximum pipe length is 200 ft. (61 m) minus 1 ft. (0.3 m) for every elbow used. Sirens and piping should be securely mounted with the proper fasteners.

7-29


NOTES:

7-30

ANSUL

Section 8



Testing and Placing in Service TESTING H.A.D. SYSTEM After H.A.D. system has been properly installed, the system must be tested to ensure safe and reliable operation. To test the H.A.D. system, complete the following steps: 1. Remove automatic control head(s) from cylinder(s). In the case of three or more cylinders on the system, make certain to remove both control heads. 2. Submerge H.A.D. in container of boiling water and check control head to see that it has operated. NOTICE Make certain control head is reset prior to reinstalling on cylinder. Indicator arrow must be in “SET” position. Failure to reset will cause accidental discharge of the system. (Allow H.A.D. to cool for at least five minutes before resetting control head(s).) 3. Reset control head(s) and reinstall on cylinder(s). Do not exceed 10 ft. lb. (13.6 Nm) torque.

If the release assembly does not trip, remove pulley tee (if provided) and each pulley elbow cover to make certain wire rope is resting on the pulley sheave. If this does not correct the problem, there is too much slack in the cable and it must be retightened. 4. If retightening or realignment was necessary, retry pull station. If release assembly operates properly, cut off any excess wire rope 3/4 in. (2 cm) above oval sleeve. 5. Recock release assembly using cocking lever, Part No. 14995, and reinstall lock bar, Part No. 14985. 6. Slide glass break rod through stud and ring handle. Tighten set screw into stud. To test a remote cable pull station to cylinder lever release(s), complete the following steps:

!

CAUTION

Make certain lever actuator(s) are removed from cylinder valves prior to testing pull station. Failure to do so will cause cylinder discharge.

TESTING PULL STATION To test a remote electric pull station, refer to appropriate AUTOPULSE system installation, operation, and maintenance manual. To test a remote cable pull station to ANSUL AUTOMAN release, complete the following steps:

!

CAUTION

When testing pull station, make certain cartridge is not installed in ANSUL AUTOMAN release. Failure to remove cartridge will cause system actuation. Make certain shipping cap is installed on cartridge. 1. With the gas cartridge removed, remove lock bar from release assembly cable lever. 2. Remove glass break rod from pull station by removing set screw on side of stud and slide glass break rod out. 3. Pull ring handle on pull station. If the release assembly is tripped easily, the remote cable pull station is properly installed.

1. Remove lever actuator(s) from cylinder valve. NOTICE After removing actuator(s) from cylinder valve, securely support actuator(s) in order for it to operate when pull station is pulled. 2. Pull remote cable pull station. Lever actuator should move to the tripped position. If lever actuator does not trip, remove each pulley elbow cover to make certain wire rope is resting on the pulley sheave. If this does not correct the problem, there is too much slack in the cable and it must be retightened. 3. If retightening or realignment was necessary, retry pull station.

8-1

Section 8 – Testing and Placing in Service 6-19-98 REV. 1 TESTING PULL STATION (Continued)] 4. If pull station operated properly, reset lever actuator.

!

CAUTION

Make certain lever actuator is in the “SET” position before reinstalling on cylinder valve. Failure to do so will cause actuation when reinstalling. 5. Reinstall lever actuator on cylinder valve. Wrench tighten. To test a remote cable pull station to H.A.D. control head, complete the following steps: !

!

CAUTION

Electric HF actuators, Part No. 73327, must not be installed on carbon dioxide CV-90 cylinder valve during test. If installed, testing of the electric detection system will cause actuation and discharge of the fire suppression system. In order to properly test the electric detection and actuation system, refer to the appropriate AUTOPULSE Installation, Operation, and Maintenance Manual, and the HF Electric Actuator Application and Installation Sheet, Part No. 73330.

CAUTION

Make certain control head(s) are removed from cylinder valve(s) prior to testing pull station. Failure to do so will cause cylinder discharge. 1. Remove control head from cylinder valve. NOTICE After removing control head from cylinder valve, securely support control head in order for it to operate when pull station is pulled. 2. Pull remote cable pull station. Check control head(s) to see that they have operated. If control head(s) do not operate, remove each pulley elbow cover to make certain wire rope is resting on the pulley sheave. If this does not correct the problem, there is too much slack in the cable and it must be retightened. 3. If retightening or realignment was necessary, retry pull station. 4. If pull station operated properly, reset control head.

!

CAUTION

Make certain control head is reset before reinstalling on cylinder valve. Indicator arrow must be in “SET” position. Failure to reset will cause accidental system discharge. 5. Reinstall control head on cylinder valve. Wrench tighten.

8-2

TESTING ELECTRIC DETECTION SYSTEM – AUTOPULSE CONTROL SYSTEM – CV-90 VALVE

TESTING CV-98 ELECTRIC DETECTION/ACTUATION SYSTEM – AUTOPULSE CONTROL SYSTEM !

CAUTION

Electric CV-98 actuator, Part No. 423684, must not be installed on carbon dioxide CV-98 cylinder valve during test. If installed, testing of the electric detection system will cause actuation and discharge of the fire suppression system. In order to properly test the electric detection and actuation system, refer to the appropriate AUTOPULSE Control System Installation, Operation, and Maintenance Manual, and the CV-98 Electric Actuation Application and Installation Sheet, Part No. 426003. When CV-98 electric actuator is actuated correctly, the piston in the bottom of the actuator will be locked in the down position. It will be locked in that position by the internal discharged METRON PROTRACTOR. The METRON PROTRACTOR must be replaced before reinstalling actuator to valve. See Recharge Section for replacement instructions. TESTING ELECTRIC DETECTION SYSTEM – ANSUL AUTOMAN II-C RELEASE When utilizing an ANSUL AUTOMAN II-C release for electric detection or in combination with an AUTOPULSE Control System, refer to ANSUL AUTOMAN II-C Releasing Device Installation, Operation, and Maintenance Manual, Part No. 17788, or for explosion-proof version, Part No. 31496, for detailed information.

Section 8 – Testing and Placing in Service 6-19-98 REV. 1 TESTING MECHANICAL – ANSUL AUTOMAN RELEASE WITH FUSIBLE LINK !

CAUTION

Do not install cartridge at this time. If installed, testing of the mechanical detection system will cause actuation and discharge of the fire suppression system. 1. If installed, remove cartridge. 2. Test detection system by completing the following steps: a. Raise release mechanism tension lever to the “UP” position. See Figure 1.


FIGURE 1 000322

b. Remove fusible link from terminal detector and install a test link, Part No. 15751. See Figure 2.

3. If release mechanism does not actuate, check the following components and remedy any disorder: a. Check the detector linkage for correct positioning. b. Check the wire rope for knotting or jamming. c. Check pulley elbows to see that wire rope is free and centered in pulley sheaves. If any evidence of pulley elbow deformation is found, replace the pulley elbow. d. Make certain the lock bar is removed. e. Make certain that release mechanism is cocked. f. Make certain that tension lever is in “DOWN” position. 4. Re-test the system by completing the following steps: a. Make certain release is cocked and lock bar is inserted. b. Raise the release mechanism tension lever to the “UP” position. c. Install a new test link, Part No. 15751, on the terminal detector. d. Lower the release mechanism tension lever to the “DOWN” position. e. Check for 1/4 in. (6.4 mm) minimum to 3/8 in. (9.5 mm) maximum clearance between the trip hammer assembly and the cable lever assembly. See Figure 3. TRIP HAMMER ASSEMBLY

1/4 IN. (6.4 mm) MINIMUM 3/8 IN. (9.5 mm) MAXIMUM

TEST LINK

FIGURE 2 000363

c. Locate detector linkage and center in each bracket. For “clip on” style linkage, locate linkage slightly toward terminal detector side. d. Lower mechanism tension lever to “DOWN” position and remove lock bar. e. Using a wire cutter, cut the test link at the terminal detector to simulate automatic actuation. f. If system actuates successfully, go to Step 5.

TRIP HAMMER BASE

FIGURE 3 000323

f. Remove the lock bar. g. Using a wire cutter, cut the test link at the terminal detector to simulate automatic actuation.

8-3

Section 8 – Testing and Placing in Service 6-19-98 REV. 1 TESTING MECHANICAL – ANSUL AUTOMAN RELEASE WITH FUSIBLE LINK (Continued) 5. Upon successful actuation of the system, complete the following steps: a. Raise tension lever to “UP” position and install a properly-rated fusible link in the terminal detector. b. Cock release mechanism using cocking lever, Part No. 14995, and insert lock bar, Part No. 14985. c. Lower tension lever to “DOWN” position. d. Locate detector linkage and center in each bracket. For “clip on” style linkage, locate linkage slightly toward terminal detector side. e. Make certain the 1/4 in. (6.4 mm) minimum to 3/8 in. (9.5 mm) maximum clearance was maintained between the base of the trip hammer assembly and the cable lever assembly. See Figure 3.

NOTICE The test cylinder should be adequately sized to allow for a minimum of 50 lbs. for the delay plus an additional 11 lbs./min. for each siren in the system plus the additional carbon dioxide needed for the expected delay at the test cylinder temperature. 2. Install a pressure gauge between the test cylinder and the time delay device. The gauge should be calibrated with a capability of at least 1500 psi with increments of 10 psi. 3. Disconnect the piping from the outlet of the time delay and install another pressure gauge, similar to the type specified in Step 2. See Figure 4. SIREN

NOTICE Reset any electrical equipment that may have been affected by the system actuation.

f. g. h. i.

If no additional components are installed, proceed with Step f. through i. If additional components require testing, test per instructions listed. Install LT-30-R cartridge into the release mechanism receiver. Hand tighten firmly. Remove lock bar. Install cover on release assembly, insert visual seal, Part No. 197, and secure. Record installation date on tag attached to unit and/or in a permanent file.

TEST CYLINDER

FIGURE 4 000927

TESTING 60 SECOND TIME DELAY To determine if the time delay is functioning properly, test per the following steps: !

CAUTION

Disconnect all system cylinders from actuation and distribution piping before running time delay test. Failure to disconnect system cylinders could cause cylinder actuation during time delay test. 1. Fill the test cylinder and allow it to stabilize for a minimum of 48 hours for cylinders of 50 lb. capacity and 72 hours for larger cylinders. The test cylinder must be equipped with a siphon tube.

8-4

NOTICE The timing cycle should begin when carbon dioxide is introduced into the time delay device inlet and should end when the pressure gauge in the outlet of the time delay reads 50 psi. 4. Open the test cylinder to allow flow into the inlet of the time delay and simultaneously begin timing. 5. Observe the pressure gauge approximately 2-3 seconds after opening the test cylinder and record the pressure reading. 6. Observe the pressure gauge on the outlet of the time delay. When the gauge reads 50 psi, stop timing. Record the time delay period measured.

Section 8 – Testing and Placing in Service 6-19-98 REV. 1 TESTING 60 SECOND TIME DELAY (Continued) 7. Referring to Figure 5, relate the pressure recorded in Step 5 to the actual temperature of the carbon dioxide test cylinder. For example, if the recorded pressure is 600 psi, the carbon dioxide test cylinder temperature is approximately 48 °F. THIS CURVE SHOWS THE PRESSURE IN CARBON DIOXIDE CYLINDERS WHEN FILLED TO 60% OF THEIR WATER CAPACITY

°F

9. If the actual delay period falls within the range determined in Step 8, the time delay is acceptable.

THIS CURVE SHOWS THE PRESSURE IN CARBON DIOXIDE CYLINDERS WHEN FILLED TO 68% OF THEIR WATER CAPACITY

180 170 160 150 140 130 120 110 100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 0 -10 -20 -30 -40 0

200

400

600

800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000

2200 2400 2600 2800 3000 3200 3400 3600 3800

PRESSURE – LBS. PER SQ. IN. PER CENT FILLING = LB. CO2 IN CYLINDER LB. H2O IN CYLINDER

x 100

FIGURE 5 000928

8. Refer to the Time vs Temperature Chart in Figure 6, and record the acceptable time delay range for the temperature determined in Step 7. For example, at 48 °F, the acceptable range is 57.0 to 77.5 seconds. 130

TEMPERATURE CORRECTION FOR 60 SECOND TIME DELAY ANSUL PART NO. 54168

120

TIME (SECONDS)

110 100 90 80 70 60 50

0

10

20

30 40 50 60 70 80 TEMPERATURE (DEGREES °F)

90

100

FIGURE 6 000929

8-5

Section 8 – Testing and Placing in Service

NOTES:

8-6

ANSUL

Section 9



REV. 1

Resetting and Recharge CLEAR ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT Refer to AUTOPULSE installation, operation, and maintenance manuals for detailed instructions on resetting the electric detection system.

2. Cock release mechanism using cocking lever, Part No. 14995, and install lock bar, Part No. 14985. See Figure 2.

NOTICE If AUTOPULSE Control System is utilizing an ANSUL AUTOMAN II-C releasing device for pneumatic actuation, AUTOPULSE panel will remain in trouble condition until ANSUL AUTOMAN II-C is recocked. LOCK BAR PROPERLY INSTALLED

If utilizing an ANSUL AUTOMAN II-C release with thermal detectors, detectors must be cooled down, below their set point, before release can be reset. Refer to ANSUL AUTOMAN II-C Installation, Operation, and Maintenance Manuals, Part No. 17788 and 31496, for detailed instructions. CHECK ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT

FIGURE 2 000321

3. Remove empty cartridge from release assembly.

Piping and Nozzles

!

A fire condition could cause damage to the piping and nozzles and possibly support members. Check all rigid pipe supports and all fitting connections. Take the nozzles off the piping, inspect for damage, corrosion, or obstructions, clean and reinstall, making certain they are aimed correctly.

Do not install replacement cartridge at this time or system may be actuated. 4. Install properly-rated fusible links in all detectors except the terminal detector.

Mechanical Detection System Mechanical ANSUL AUTOMAN Release: 1. Raise tension lever to “UP” position. See Figure 1.

5. 6. 7. 8. 9.


CAUTION

10. 11. 12.

NOTICE If actuation was caused by a fire situation, all fusible links must be replaced. Install test link, Part No. 15751, in terminal detector. Lower tension lever to “DOWN” position. Remove lock bar. Using wire cutter, cut test link at the terminal detector to simulate automatic actuation. After successful actuation, raise the tension lever to “UP” position. Install properly-rated, Ansul approved, fusible link in terminal detector. Cock release mechanism and install lock bar, Part No. 14985. Locate detector linkage and correctly position in each bracket.

FIGURE 1 000322

9-1

Section 9 – Resetting and Recharge 6-19-98 REV. 1 CHECK ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT (Continued) Mechanical Detection System (Continued) 13. Lower tension lever to “DOWN” position. See Figure 3. 14. Inspect base of wire rope clamping device to make certain there is a minimum of 1/4 in. (6.4 mm) to 3/8 in. (9.5 mm) maximum clearance between the base of the trip hammer assembly and the cable lever assembly. See Figure 3. TRIP HAMMER ASSEMBLY 1/4 IN. (6.4 mm) MINIMUM 3/8 IN. (9.5 mm) MAXIMUM

TRIP HAMMER BASE

H.A.D. Detection System To properly reset the H.A.D. system, complete the following: 1. Check the condition of all H.A.D. heads and all tubing runs in the hazard area. Make certain no damage has been caused to them from the fire. 2. Remove the control head from the discharged carbon dioxide cylinder. 3. The carbon dioxide cylinder can now be removed for recharge. 4. Reset the control head by moving the control head indicator to the “SET” position. Indicator arrow on reset control must point to “SET.” 5. If H.A.D. control head was actuated manually, reset manual release lever, insert ring pin, and secure with visual inspection seal. Pressure Switch

FIGURE 3 000323

15. 16. 17. 18.

NOTICE If clearance is not 1/4 in. (6.4 mm) minimum, raise tension lever to “UP” position, raise trip hammer 3/8 to 1/2 in. (9.5 to 12.7 mm), loosen and retighten set screws, and repeat Steps 13 and 14. Remove lock bar. Manually test release mechanism by operating the remote manual pull station. Recock release mechanism and insert lock bar. Reset all devices which were affected by system actuation.

Electric Detection System ANSUL AUTOMAN II-C RELEASING DEVICE – For complete resetting instructions, refer to Installation, Operation, and Maintenance Manuals, Part No. 17788 and 31496. ANSUL AUTOPULSE CONTROL SYSTEM – For complete resetting instructions, refer to the appropriate installation, operation, and maintenance manual, and HF Electric Actuator Application and Installation Sheet, Part No. 73330.

9-2

Reset the pressure switch by completing the following steps: 1. Make certain all pressure in the line to the switch has been properly relieved. 2. Push in red knob on end of pressure switch plunger. 3. Make certain electrical function has been correctly reset. PLACE SYSTEM BACK IN SERVICE Recharge CO2 Cylinder Because of the number of different style valves existing in older systems, this manual will address recharging for the current CV90 valve and also two other styles, the MAX valve and the AP8 valve. CV90 VALVE NOTICE If maintenance is performed on the valve before recharging, use Mobil 1 oil on all O-Rings. Mobil 1 oil is the ONLY approved lubricant for the CV90 valve. The following steps must be followed when recharging the CV90 valve: 1. Remove shipping cap and weigh cylinder. Compare actual cylinder weight with weight stamped on cylinder shoulder. Also check the last date stamped on the cylinder. Refer to NFPA 12 (Standard on Carbon Dioxide Extinguishing Systems) for hydrostatic test guidelines.

Section 9 – Resetting and Recharge

PLACE SYSTEM BACK IN SERVICE (Continued) Recharge CO2 Cylinder (Continued) CV90 VALVE (Continued) 2. If pressure and/or weight must be relieved, perform the following: a. Secure cylinder. b. Make certain discharge outlet cap IS NOT in place on valve outlet. See Figure 4.

3. With cylinder completely empty, once again, depress actuation plunger down until it bottoms out (approximately 3/8 in. (.9 cm)) and quickly release. This will cause the plunger stem to pop up flush or within .010 in. (.2 mm) below the top of the actuation attachment port. This is the correct position for proper seating.

!

NOTICE When depressing the actuation plunger, the anti-recoil will close on the valve outlet, but a small amount of CO2 will discharge out of the outlet, around the anti-recoil device.

CAUTION

Failure to use proper fill adaptor may cause the valve to actuate due to back pressure build-up.

DISCHARGE OUTLET CAP MUST NOT BE INSTALLED WHILE BLEEDING DOWN CYLINDER.

FIGURE 4 001515

c. Depress actuation plunger stem, located on top of valve, and relieve all cylinder pressure. See Figure 5. It may be necessary to repeat this step a number of times until all pressure is relieved.

NOTICE For recharging the CV90 cylinder valve, it is necessary to have a special fill adaptor assembly, Part No. 45389. The assembly consists of a fill adaptor, having a 1/2-14 straight male thread for hose attachment and a discharge outlet cap. 4. Attach the fill adaptor to the side filling inlet of the valve. See Figure 6. The side filling inlet is the lower of the two large threaded ports. Make certain the washer is in place in the fill adaptor. Screw the adaptor on the valve filling inlet, wrench tighten. 5. Screw the knurled discharge outlet cap on the discharge outlet, the highest large threaded port on the side of the valve. See Figure 6. This should be hand tight only as the pin inside the cap acts to open the anti-recoil. By holding the anti-recoil open, the residual pressure under the main valve seat is relieved, allowing the valve to properly close.

FILL ADAPTOR

DISCHARGE OUTLET CAP

1/2-14 STRAIGHT THREAD

FIGURE 5 001516

FILLING ADAPTOR ASSEMBLY, PART NO. 45389

FIGURE 6 001517

9-3

Section 9 – Resetting and Recharge 6-19-98 REV. 2 PLACE SYSTEM BACK IN SERVICE (Continued) Recharge CO2 Cylinder (Continued) CV90 VALVE(Continued) 6. Place the cylinder on scale and secure with bracket or chain to prevent movement during filling. !

CAUTION

To prevent injury or damage, take proper safety precautions when filling carbon dioxide cylinders. 7. Attach filling hose to fill adaptor and begin filling by slowly opening the fill valve. Gradually open the fill valve until it is completely open. NOTICE If the top actuation plunger drops during recharge, the valve has opened. Stop filling and refer to instructions in O-Ring Reconditioning Kit, Part No. 415250. You may see a slight amount of residual CO2 coming out the discharge outlet during recharging. This is acceptable and will stop when the cylinder pressure increases high enough to completely seat the valve main seal. 8. Fill to cylinder capacity. NOTICE If CO2 continues to discharge out the valve outlet after recharge is complete, the main seal is leaking. Reclaim CO2 an replace main seal, using Main Seal Reconditioning Kit, Part No. 415251. 9. Check cylinder valve for leaks. 10. Mark the date and weight on the record card attached to the neck of the cylinder. Replace valve shipping cap to prevent damage during shipping and handling. CV-98 VALVE Recharge procedures for cylinder assemblies utilizing the CV-98 valve with a CV-98 electric actuator requires normal cylinder recharging along with replacing the discharged METRON PROTRACTOR located within the electric actuator.

RECHARGE CYLINDER The following steps must be followed when removing discharged cylinders from the system: 1. Disconnect the flex bend from the cylinder(s) outlet. 2. Remove all actuators from the cylinder valves. 3. If necessary, remove 1/4 in. actuation hose from pneumatic actuation port. 4. If necessary, install plug, Part No. 42410, into pneumatic actuation port and wrench tighten. 5. With cylinder secured in bracket, relieve any remaining pressure in the cylinder by completing the following: a. Make certain discharge cap IS NOT on valve outlet. See Figure 7.

DISCHARGE OUTLET CAP MUST NOT BE INSTALLED WHILE BLEEDING DOWN CYLINDER

FIGURE 7 001515

!

CAUTION

Attach bleed down device, Part No. 426028, to fill inlet of discharged cylinders only. Never attach this device to fully charged cylinders as this will cause high pressure to discharge out of the fill inlet. Also, install device hand tight only. Do not wrench tighten. NOTE: Bleed-down device, Part No. 416656, CANNOT be used on CV-98 valve. b. Attach bleed down device, Part No. 426028, to valve fill inlet. See Figure 9.

PIN IN BLEED DOWN DEVICE WILL DEPRESS CHECK VALVE IN FILL INLET

FIGURE 8 001853

9-4

Section 9 – Resetting and Recharge 6-19-98 REV. 2 PLACE SYSTEM BACK IN SERVICE (Continued) Recharge CO2 Cylinder (Continued) c. Bleed residue pressure from cylinder. Make certain cylinder is completely empty before removing bleed down device. d. With cylinder completely empty, remove bleed down device and install safety shipping cap. e. Complete Steps a. through d. on all discharged cylinders, both pilot and slave.

5. Discard used METRON PROTRACTOR assembly. A discharged METRON PROTRACTOR will have the stainless steel pin extending approximately 1/8 – 3/16 in. out of the bottom. On a new METRON PROTRACTOR, the pin will not be visible. See Figure 10.

FILLING ADAPTORS The CV-98 valve utilizes filling adaptors different from those used for the CV-90 valve. When filling the CV-98 cylinder assemblies, use the following components: CV-98 Fill Adaptor for CO2 Cylinders

Part No. 423659

CV-98 Conversion Adaptor (Converts CV-90 Fill Adaptor for use on CV-98 valves)

Part No. 423657

PIN EXTENDING APPROXIMATELY 1/8 – 3/16 IN. (.3 – .5 cm) OUT OF BODY INDICATES METRON PROTRACTOR HAS BEEN ACTUATED

PIN NOT VISIBLE INDICATES METRON PROTRACTOR HAS NOT BEEN ACTUATED

FIGURE 10

REPLACE METRON PROTRACTOR IN CV-98 ELECTRIC ACTUATOR To replace the METRON PROTRACTOR in the electric actuator, complete the following steps: 1. Remove power from electric actuator circuit. 2. If equipped, remove manual actuator. 3. Remove electric actuator from cylinder valve. 4. Unscrew actuator cap. See Figure 9.

ACTUATOR CAP

PLUNGER

METRON PROTRACTOR ASSEMBLY

001855

6. Before positioning new METRON PROTRACTOR housing assembly, Part No. 423958, into electric actuator body, remove the piston. Thoroughly clean piston and inside bottom surface of actuator body of any dirt or foreign material. As the pin is emitted from a METRON PROTRACTOR when it operates, a small metal disc is ejected. This metal disc may be found resting on the piston inside the actuator body. Before replacing the actuated METRON PROTRACTOR assembly with a new one, make certain this metal disc is removed from the piston area. Replace piston back into body. When replacing piston, make certain pin end is facing down. Red dot on bottom of stem must be facing down. See Figure 9. 7. Position METRON PROTRACTOR housing assembly back into electric actuator body, making certain METRON PROTRACTOR housing assembly and spring are properly seated in bottom of actuator body. See Figure 9 CAUTION ! Before completing Step No. 8, make certain the control panel is reset and the release circuit is not in an actuated mode.

SPRING PISTON (PIN END MUST BE DOWN) – RED DOT ON BOTTOM OF STEM MUST FACE DOWN ACTUATOR BODY

FIGURE 9 001854

4. Lift actuated METRON PROTRACTOR assembly housing out of actuator body and disconnect wire plug. See Figure 9.

8. Plug wire connector together. See Figure 9. 9. Carefully tuck wire connector at an approximately 45° angle down along the inside of METRON PROTRACTOR housing assembly between the spring and the inside of the actuator body. NOTE: Make certain wires are not located over top of housing. 10. Make certain plunger moves freely up and down. See Figure 9.

9-5

Section 9 – Resetting and Recharge 6-19-98 REV. 1 PLACE SYSTEM BACK IN SERVICE (Continued)

MAX VALVE

Recharge CO2 Cylinder (Continued)

The MAX valve requires a supply of high pressure nitrogen to close the valve as part of the CO2 recharge procedure. Because of the additional equipment required to properly fill the cylinder, Ansul suggests setting up the filling station as shown in Figure 12. Also listed below is a recommended tool and equipment list.

Replace METRON PROTRACTOR In Electric Actuator (Continued) 11. Screw actuator cap back on actuator body. Securely tighten. 12. Make certain piston on bottom of actuator is free to move up and down. See Figure 11. NOTE: If pin is not visible in bottom hole of actuator, the piston has been re-installed incorrectly. Red dot on bottom of piston stem must be visible from bottom of actuator. Disassemble and correct.

CO2 VENT TO ATMOSPHERE NITROGEN VENT TO ATMOSPHERE (OUTSIDE) SAFETY (OUTSIDE) CO2 VENT RELIEF VALVE VALVE CO2 PRESSURE GAUGE REGULATOR W/GAUGES

FROM CO2 SUPPLY

NITROGEN VENT VALVE CO2 SUPPLY VALVE

CO2 FILL HOSE

QUICK CONNECT QUICK CONNECT

PISTON MUST BE FREE TO MOVE UP AND DOWN. RED DOT ON BOTTOM OF PISTON STEM MUST BE VISIBLE.

BOTTOM OF ACTUATOR BODY

001857

After the cylinder(s) has been secured back in the bracket and discharge hose(s) have been reconnected, attach the actuator(s) by completing the following: CAUTION

!

Make certain all electric power from the panel to the actuator has been disconnected. Failure to disconnect power may cause system to accidentally discharge. 1. Make certain CV-98 actuator has been recharged with a new METRON PROTRACTOR assembly. !

CAUTION

Before installing electric actuator to top of CV-98 valve, make certain piston in bottom of actuator is free to move up and down. Refer to Figure 11. 2. Attach CV-98 actuator to top thread of CV-98 valve. Securely tighten. 3. If the manual actuator was used, apply a small amount of lubricant, such as WD-40, to the pin between the handle and the body. 4. Attach manual actuator to CV-98 electric actuator.

9-6

FILL ADAPTOR (PART NO. 70396)

NITROGEN HOSE

FIGURE 11

CO2 FILL VALVE

MAX VALVE

NITROGEN SUPPLY VALVE NITROGEN CYLINDER VALVE CLOSING ADAPTOR (PART NO. 70384)

CO2 CYLINDER

FIGURE 12 001905

Special Tools and Equipment – Torque Wrench, 1/2 in. Drive, Capable of up to 60 ft. lb. (81.3 Nm) – Crowfoot Wrench Attachment, 1 3/8 in., 1/2 in. Drive – Socket, 1 1/2 in., 1/2 in. Drive – Silicone Grease, Dow Corning No.4 – Torque Drive, Capable of up to 30 in. lb. (3.4 Nm) – Automotive Valve Core Tool (Steel) – Socket Adaptor (Valve Core Tool to Torque Drive) – Recharge Kit (Part No. 78764) Includes: Piston O-Ring–Part No. 68656 Piston Gasket–Part No. 68661 Valve Cap O-Ring–Part No. 22604 Valve Actuator Seal–Part No. 77423 Valve Core (2)–Part No. 31712 Safety Wire–Part No. 75828 Lead Seal–Part No. 45220

Section 9 – Resetting and Recharge 6-19-98 REV. 1 PLACE SYSTEM BACK IN SERVICE (Continued) Recharge CO2 Cylinder (Continued) MAX VALVE (Continued) Recommended Fill System Equipment – Ball Valves and 2000 WOG minimum Pipe – Pipe (if used) Schedule 80 – Hoses (if used) 4000 psi (27576 kPa) minimum – Pressure Relief 1200 psi (8273 kPa) Valve maximum Suitable for use with CO2 – Nitrogen Cylinder 0-4000 psi (0-27576 kPa) inlet Regulator 0-1500 psi (0-10341 kPa) outlet with compatible gauges – CO2 Manifold 0-2000 psi (0-13788 kPa), Pressure gauge calibrated !

CAUTION

Make certain cylinder is secured with a bracket or chain during filling and whenever shipping cap is removed. Failure to comply could result in personal injury due to violent cylinder movement if cylinder is actuated. 1. Place CO2 cylinder on a weigh scale and secure with chain or bracket. Then, remove safety shipping cap. 2. Remove valve outlet safety plug and attach fill adaptor (with valve and quick connect) to valve outlet. See Figure 13. !

CAUTION

For safety, do not remove back-pressure actuator at this time as cylinder may contain high CO2 pressure. 3. Close CO2 fill valve. 4. Attach CO2 fill hose to fill adaptor assembly.

5.Remove slave back-pressure actuator from MAX valve actuation cap. Then, remove and discard actuator seal. See Figure 13. CO2 FILL HOSE FILL ADAPTOR ASSEMBLY VALVE ACTUATION CAP REMOVE AND DISCARD ACTUATOR SEAL SLAVE BACK-PRESSURE ACTUATOR REMOVED

FIGURE 13 001906

!

CAUTION

Do not remove valve actuation cap from MAX valve. If cap is removed from a pressurized CO2 cylinder valve, velocity of unrestricted escaping gas is forceful enough to cause injury, especially about the face and head. 6. Make certain CO2 supply valve is closed and open CO2 vent valve. !

CAUTION

The vent must be open to outside atmosphere. The release of CO2 into an enclosed area will displace the oxygen which could result it unconsciousness or suffocation. 7. Check seals, Part No. 70386 and 76804, on valve closing adaptor; replace if deteriorated or separated from body. Then, attach valve actuation cap. See Figure 14. VALVE CLOSING ADAPTOR (PART NO. 70384)

PART NO. 70386

PART NO. 76804

FIGURE 14 001907

!

CAUTION

Carbon dioxide can cause freeze burns if it contacts the skin. A face shield and protective gloves should always be worn when servicing a cylinder that has been disconnected from discharge hose and piping. 9-7

Section 9 – Resetting and Recharge 6-19-98 REV. 1 PLACE SYSTEM BACK IN SERVICE (Continued)

13. Using valve core tool (steel automotive type), remove and discard valve core. See Figure 18.

Recharge CO2 Cylinder (Continued)

REMOVE AND DISCARD VALVE CORE

MAX VALVE (Continued) 8. Open MAX valve by inserting a 3/32 in. (.2 cm) diameter rod (not supplied) through valve closing adaptor to depress valve core in actuation cap. See Figure 15.

VALVE ACTUATION CAP

PISTON 3/32 IN. DIAMETER ROD

FIGURE 18 001911

VALVE CLOSING ADAPTOR WITH QUICK CONNECT

14. Carefully insert 3/32 in. (.2 cm) diameter rod through valve core port and push out valve piston. See Figure 19. Be careful not to damage internal valve core seat and threads. 3/32 IN. DIAMETER ROD

FIGURE 15 001908

9. Open CO2 fill valve to allow any residual pressure to be relieved from cylinder through CO2 vent. 10. Remove rod and valve closing adaptor from actuation cap. 11. Cut and remove safety wire to allow removal of valve actuation cap. See Figure 16.

3/32 IN. DIAMETER ROD

FIGURE 19 001912

CUT AND REMOVE SAFETY WIRE

FIGURE 16 001909

12. Using 1 1/2 in. socket, unscrew valve actuation cap, with piston assembly, from MAX valve. See Figure 17.

15. Remove O-Ring from groove in upper portion of piston. See Figure 20. Be careful not to scratch piston groove. Discard O-Ring. 16. Lubricate new O-Ring, Part No. 68656, with Dow Corning No. 4 silicone grease. Insert O-Ring into piston groove. 17. Without removing check housing assembly from piston, visually inspect exposed portion of gasket at bottom of piston. See Figure 20. If damaged, remove check housing and replace gasket, Part No. 68661; then reinstall check housing.

O-RING (PART NO. 68656) REMOVE VALVE ACTUATION CAP WITH PISTON

GASKET (PART NO. 68661)

FIGURE 20 001913

FIGURE 17 001910

9-8

Section 9 – Resetting and Recharge 6-19-98 REV. 1 PLACE SYSTEM BACK IN SERVICE (Continued) Recharge CO2 Cylinder (Continued) MAX VALVE (Continued) 18. Make certain check housing assembly is tightened into bottom of piston to 30 in. lb. (3.4 Nm) torque. If spool is secured in vise, make certain spool body is protected. 19. Using a vise, press piston into valve actuation cap as shown in Figure 21. Be careful not to damage piston O-Ring. Use vise jaw protection to prevent damage to piston and cap. VALVE ACTUATION CAP VISE JAW

PISTON

22. Visually inspect cap-to-body O-Ring. Replace if damaged. Use O-Ring, Part No. 22604. See Figure 23. 23. Apply a thin film of Dow Corning No. 4 silicone grease to valve-to-cap O-Ring. 24. Using 1/2 in. drive torque wrench and 1 1/2 in. socket, screw valve actuation cap, with piston assembly, into MAX valve as shown in Figure 23. Use 60 ft. lb. (81.3 Nm) torque. Thread locking compound MUST NOT BE USED. LUBRICATE O-RING REINSTALL VALVE ACTUATION CAP WITH PISTON

VISE JAW

FIGURE 21 001914

20. Using torque drive, install valve core into actuation cap. Tighten to 3 in. lb. (.34 Nm) torque. Do not lubricate valve core seal. 21. Measure depth of valve core using dial depth indicator: – Proper depth range is .007 to .020 in. (1.7 to 5.2 mm). See Figure 22. – If valve core depth is greater than .020 in. (5.2 mm), replace valve core and measure again. – If valve core depth is less than .007, retighten until depth is between .007 and .020 in. (1.7 and 5.2 mm) using a maximum 6 in. lb. (.68 Nm) torque. – If valve core depth of .007 to .020 in. (1.7 to 5.2 mm) cannot be obtained with 6 in. (.68 Nm) maximum torque, replace valve core and measure again.

FIGURE 23 001916

25. Install new safety wire, Part No.75828, through holes provided in valve actuation cap hex and MAX valve body flat. Secure safety wire using crimp-type lead seal, Part No. 45220. See Figure 24. LEAD SEAL (PART NO. 45220)

SAFETY WIRE (PART NO. 75828)

FIGURE 24 001917

.007 – .020 (1.7 – 5.1 mm)

FIGURE 22 001915

26. Check seals, Part No. 70386 and 76804, on valve closing adaptor; replace if deteriorated or separated from body. See Figure 14. Then, attach valve closing adaptor, with quick connect, to MAX valve actuation cap. 27. Make certain nitrogen supply valve and nitrogen vent valve are closed. 28. With nitrogen cylinder valve closed, attach nitrogen hose to valve closing adaptor. 29. Close CO2 vent valve and open CO2 supply valve until cylinder is filled to rated capacity. Then, close CO2 supply valve. 9-9

Section 9 – Resetting and Recharge 6-19-98 REV. 1 PLACE SYSTEM BACK IN SERVICE (Continued) Recharge CO2 Cylinder (Continued) MAX VALVE (Continued) 30. Open nitrogen cylinder valve and adjust nitrogen regulator until pressure reading is 250 to 300 psi (1724 to 2068 kPa) higher than CO2 pressure indicated on CO2 pressure gauge. NOTICE Pressure in nitrogen cylinder must be 1000 psi (6894 kPa) minimum to assure that adequate pressure is available for closing MAX valve.

37. Inspect sealing edges on slave back-pressure actuator, Part No. 68713, for nicks, gouges, etc. Replace if damaged. See Figure 26.

BACK-PRESSURE ACTUATOR (PART NO. 68713)

INSPECT SEALING EDGES

FIGURE 26 001919

Wait until frost clears from MAX valve body (approximately 1 to 2 minutes) before continuing to Step 31. 31. Open nitrogen supply valve for 5 seconds to close MAX valve. Then, close nitrogen supply valve. 32. Open nitrogen vent valve to relieve pressure from nitrogen manifold. 33. Slowly open CO2 vent valve. With valve fully open, venting should continue for only a short time to allow CO2 manifold to relieve. If venting continues, close CO2 vent valve, increase nitrogen regulator setting by 50 psi (345 kPa), and repeat Steps 31 and 32. Excessive nitrogen closing pressure, 1100 psi (7584 kPa) maximum, indicates a need for valve teardown, cleaning, and lubricating. 34. Remove nitrogen hose and valve closing adaptor. 35. Using soap solution or water bath, check valve core for leakage. If leakage is detected, repeat Steps 6 through 34. 36. Install new actuator seal, Part No. 77423, so that seal ridge rests in cap recess as shown in Figure 25. ACTUATOR SEAL (PART NO. 77423)

38. Reset back-pressure actuator to its fully retracted (set) position. See Figure 27.

PISTON IN FULLY RETRACTED (SET) POSITION

FIGURE 27 001920

39. Install slave back-pressure actuator into valve actuation cap. After cylinders have been reinstalled in system, torque all back-pressure actuators to 40 ft. lb. (54.2 Nm) using 1/2 in. drive torque wrench and 1 3/8 in. crowfoot wrench attachment. 40. Remove CO2 hose and CO2 fill adaptor. Immediately reinstall safety plug in MAX valve outlet. 41. Check MAX valve for leaks and note recharge information on record tag. 42. Reinstall safety shipping cap, Part No. 70209, on cylinder collar. !

RIDGE IN DOWN POSITION

Never leave CO2 cylinder unguarded or unsecured without the safety plug in place. If plug is not in place and cylinder is discharged, escaping CO2 or cylinder movement could cause injury or property damage.

FIGURE 25 001918

9-10

CAUTION

Section 9 – Resetting and Recharge 6-19-98 REV. 1 PLACE SYSTEM BACK IN SERVICE (Continued) Recharge CO2 Cylinder (Continued) AP-8 VALVE For recharging the AP-8 cylinder valve, it is necessary to have a special filling adaptor assembly. The assembly, Part No. 45389, is composed of a hose adaptor, having a 1/2-14 male thread for hose attachment and a discharge outlet cap. The hose adaptor is attached to the side filling inlet, normally covered with a knurled cap with four holes in it. See Figure 28. Be sure that the O-Ring is in place around the charging hole in the adaptor before attaching adaptor. Install adaptor wrench tight. The knurled discharge outlet cap should be attached onto the discharge outlet, the lowest outlet on the side of the valve. See Figure 28. This should be attached hand tight only as the pin inside the cap acts to hold open the outlet check. By holding the outlet check open, the residual pressure under the main valve seat is relieved, allowing the valve to close properly.

Any leak at the valve outlet indicates leakage past the main check. This could be caused by: a. Nick on the main seat. b. Foreign material on or damage to the main seal of the main check. c. The main check is not seating properly due to distortion of the valve bore. Such distortion is usually evident in the area of the safety disc due to overtorquing of the safety disc nut. A maximum torque of 23 ft. lbs. (31.2 Nm) is to be used when installing the safety disc nut. Leakage out of the top of the valve (with the bonnet cap removed), usually also indicates leakage past the main check. Leakage out the vent may be due to a number of reasons: a. Leakage past the pressure release check, Part No. 42394, due to foreign material on the seat, damage to its seal, or a scored release check seat, Part No. 42413. b. Leakage past the copper washer, Part No. 42255, below the release check seat.

HOSE ADAPTOR

!

1/2-14 STR. THREAD DISCHARGE OUTLET CAP

FIGURE 28

CAUTION

When removing the piston assembly, Part No. 42416, make certain piston is not forced down before taking it from the valve body. If piston is forced down, either by hand or by the tool used to remove it, it could cause the valve to open and the cylinder to discharge.

001921

!

CAUTION

To prevent injury or damage, take proper safety precautions when filling carbon dioxide cylinders. To recharge cylinder, place cylinder on scale and secure with bracket or chain to prevent movement during filling. Attach filling adaptor as described above. Attach filling hose to adaptor and fill with dry CO2 to proper weight. The total full weight of the cylinder and valve is stamped on the side of the valve. When the charging hose and adaptor are detached, the check in the filling inlet will seat under pressure and no further sealing is necessary. The knurled cap should be replaced on the filling inlet for protection. Check valve for possible leaks. Should a leak be discovered, the following information may help in determining what the cause is.

Whether leakage is due to a. or b. above, it can be determined by removing the bonnet cap and the piston assembly, Part No. 42416, and observing whether the leak is at the periphery of the release check seat (indicating leakage past the copper washer) or past the check stem (indicating leakage past the check). c. Leakage out of the vent may also be caused by leakage past the copper washer, Part No. 42387, under the valve bonnet. Leakage at the filling inlet can be caused by: a. Ice forming in the inlet or attachments b. Leakage past the filling check due to foreign material on the seat, damage to its seal, or scoring of the seat. Be sure to mark the date and weight on the record card attached to the neck of the cylinder. Replace valve shipping cap to prevent damage during handling and shipping.

9-11

Section 9 – Resetting and Recharge 6-19-98 REV. 1 PLACE SYSTEM BACK IN SERVICE (Continued) Pneumatic Valve Actuator Reinstall each pneumatic valve actuator by completing the following steps: 1. Ensure that pneumatic valve actuator internal piston is in the full “UP” position by forcing the piston up, by hand or with a short length of 1/8 in. to 1/4 in. pipe. See Figure 29. PISTON

INCORRECT

PISTON MUST BE “UP” BEFORE INSTALLING

Before reinstalling HF electric actuator, check to see if the actuator is armed or fired. 1. Check to see if the actuator is armed or fired by referring to steps a. and b. respectively. a. The actuator is armed if the following conditions exist: See Figure 30. – When the plunger is pushed, the actuator pin will move freely up and down approximately 1/8 in. (3.2 mm). – When the actuator is held upright, the plunger will be approximately flush with the top surface of the actuator. – The pin is retracted .010 to .015 in. (.25 to .38 mm) inside the reference surface at the bottom of the actuator. ACTUATION IN ARMED POSITION

FIGURE 29

PLUNGER (FLUSH WITH TOP SURFACE)

001883

2. Remove the actuation safety shipping cap from the top of the valve and wrench-tighten the pneumatic actuator to the slave assembly. 3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 for each additional pneumatic valve actuator. HF Electric Valve Actuator Note: HF Electric Actuator cannot be used to actuate an AP-8 valve or a CV-98 valve. !

ACTUATION PIN

FREE PIN TRAVEL

PIN

ARMED .010 – .015 IN. .(25 – .38 MM)

REFERENCE SURFACE 1/8 IN. REFERENCE SURFACE (3.2 CM)

CAUTION

FIGURE 30 001922

The carbon dioxide system will actuate if the HF electric actuator pin is down, in the fired position. Before each installation, make certain all actuators are in the armed condition.

b. The actuator is in the fired position if the following conditions exist: See Figure 31. ACTUATION IN FIRED POSITION

TOP OF PLUNGER APPROXIMATELY 1/8 IN. (.3 cm) BELOW TOP SURFACE

ACTUATOR PIN

REFERENCE SURFACE

PIN OUTSIDE REFERENCE SURFACE

FIGURE 31 001923

– When pushed, the actuator pin will have no movement. – When the actuator is held upright, the plunger will be below the top surface of the actuator.

9-12

Section 9 – Resetting and Recharge 6-19-98

PLACE SYSTEM BACK IN SERVICE (Continued) Electric Valve Actuator (Continued) 2. To arm the actuator, use arming tool, Part No. 75433, to force the pin inside the reference surface until a distinct “click” is heard. See Figure 32. To verify that the actuator is properly armed, repeat Step 1.

7. Feed lead and wire seal, Part No. 75568, through hole in actuator swivel hex. Wrap around actuator body, over conduit connection, and back to swivel hex. Then, crimp seal to wire. DO NOT REMOVE CAP UNLESS INSTALLING ADDITIONAL ACTUATOR

HF ELECTRIC ACTUATOR

NOTICE Considerable force, 45-50 lbs. (13-23 kg) is required to arm the HF electric actuator.

LEAD AND WIRE SEAL (PART NO. 75568)

CV90 VALVE ACTUATOR PIN

CO2 CYLINDER

REFERENCE SURFACE

PUSH UP UNTIL "CLICK" IS HEARD

FIGURE 33 001851

ARMING TOOL (PART NO. 75433)

Manual Valve Actuator

FIGURE 32 001924

3. If no other actuators are to be installed on top of the HF electric actuator, reinstall black safety cap after arming. 4. To install HF actuator to cylinder valve, remove actuation shipping cap from top threads of CV90 cylinder valve. 5. Make certain HF electric actuator is properly armed. See Step 2. 6. Thread the HF electric actuator onto top threads of cylinder valve. Do not exceed 10 ft. lb. torque. See Figure 33.

Before installing manual actuator back unto cylinder valve or electric actuator, make certain manual actuator is in the “SET” position. On manual actuator with ring pins, make certain ring pin is in position and secured with a visual inspection seal. Manual Pull Station Reset remote manual pull station by completing the following steps: 1. If necessary, remove set screw that is retaining the break glass rod. 2. If necessary, carefully remove any remaining broken glass from station. 3. Press and position handle in proper location against cover and slide the replacement glass break rod, Part No. 4834, through stud and handle. 4. Tighten set screw into stud. Replace ANSUL AUTOMAN Cartridge Install new cartridge by completing the following steps: 1. Remove shipping cap and weigh replacement cartridge. Replace if weight is 1/2 ounce (14.2 g), or more, below weight stamped on cartridge. 2. Make certain release mechanism is cocked and lock bar is installed. Then, install replacement cartridge into release assembly and hand tighten. 3. Remove lock bar. 4. Secure cover on ANSUL AUTOMAN and seal with visual inspection seal. 5. Record recharge date on tag attached to unit and/or in a permanent file. 9-13

Section 9 – Resetting and Recharge

NOTES:

9-14

ANSUL

Section 10



Inspection Inspection is a “quick check” that a system is operable. It is intended to give reasonable assurance that the system is fully charged and will operate. This is done by seeing that the system has not been tampered with and there is no obvious physical damage, or condition, to prevent operation. The value of an inspection lies in the frequency, and thoroughness, with which it is conducted. Systems should be inspected at regular monthly intervals, or at more frequent intervals when circumstances require.

DISTRIBUTION PIPING AND NOZZLES

The following visual checks should be performed during a CO2 system inspection:

MISCELLANEOUS

MANUAL PULL STATION Check that it has not been tampered with and is ready for operation. Lead and wire seal or break rod must be in place.

Check that the piping is secure and nozzles are in place. Make certain the nozzles are not covered with dirt, grease, or paint. Make certain nozzles are aimed in the proper direction. ALARMS AND SIRENS Check that they are in place and are not damaged.

Make a check list of details that are important to the system which are not discussed above, i.e., has the hazard size or configuration been changed? Are dampers or doors jarred open where they shouldn’t be? Are special signs in place? Are nozzles obstructed by equipment moved in the area? Are there any conditions that would hinder the operation of the system?

DETECTORS Check that they are in place, not damaged or coated with dirt, grease, paint, or any contaminating substance. CONTROL SYSTEM Make certain the panel has not been tampered with and that the green “power on” light is illuminated. No other system lights should be on. ANSUL AUTOMAN RELEASING DEVICE Make certain the releasing device has not been tampered with, and that the visual inspection seal is not broken or missing. CYLINDER Check that the mounting brackets are secure. Visually check cylinder for any dents or signs of corrosion. CYLINDER ACTUATOR Make certain the electric, pneumatic, or manual actuator(s) are in place. Check that the actuation piping and/or wiring has not been tampered with or disconnected.

10-1

Section 10 – Inspection

NOTES:

10-2

ANSUL

Section 11



6-19-98 REV. 1

Maintenance SEMI-ANNUAL MAINTENANCE EXAMINATION Systems shall be maintained at regular intervals, not more than six-months apart, or when specifically indicated by an inspection. Maintenance is a “thorough check” of the system. It is intended to give maximum assurance that a system will operate effectively and safely. It includes a thorough examination and any necessary repair, recharge, or replacement. It will reveal if there is a need for hydrostatic testing of the cylinder. NOTICE Before proceeding with semi-annual maintenance examination, insert lock bar in ANSUL AUTOMAN release and ANSUL AUTOMAN II-C release and remove nitrogen cartridge. Install safety shipping cap on cartridge. 1. Note appearance of the system and component parts, checking for mechanical damage or corrosion. 2. Remove HF or CV-98 electric valve actuator or H.A.D. actuator (if provided) from each cylinder and reinstall actuation safety shipping cap on the valve. 3. Remove pneumatic valve actuator or lever actuator (if provided) from each tank and reinstall safety shipping cap on the valve assembly. 4. Remove cylinder(s) from distribution piping by disconnecting flexible hose at the valve outlet. Install safety shipping cap on cylinder valve. 5. Check nameplate(s) for readability, corrosion, or looseness. 6. Check distribution piping for mechanical damage or corrosion. Make certain piping connections are tight and hangers are secured to prevent excessive pipe movement during a discharge. 7. Examine each discharge nozzle for mechanical damage, corrosion, or obstructions. Make certain discharge nozzle orifices are clear and aimed correctly at the hazard. 8. Check actuation piping for mechanical damage or corrosion. Make certain the piping connections are tight and hangers are secure. 9. Check each pull station for mechanical damage. Make certain each pull station is unobstructed, that operating instructions are visible and (if provided), break glass rod is in place.

10. If provided, make certain each electric, pneumatic, or fusible link detector is unobstructed and not damaged. Inspect each detector for dirt and dust accumulation. Fusible links should be replaced every six months or sooner depending on conditions. 11. Weigh each cylinder by completing the following: a. Loosen the mounting bracket on the cylinder. b. Attach the weigh scale, Part No. 74241, to the weigh rail above the cylinder. Thread lifting yoke, Part No. 69877, on cylinder collar threads and lift cylinder from floor. Record weight while cylinder is suspended. See Figure 1. 21 IN. BEAM (53.3 cm) BEAM MUST BE HORIZONTAL FOR CORRECT WEIGHT READING

ANGLE IRON WEIGHING RAIL

SCALE ROTATED 90° FOR CLEARNESS, PART NO. 74241

LIFTING YOKE, PART NO. 69877

SCALE EYE CARBON DIOXIDE CYLINDER CYLINDER SADDLE

FLOOR

FIGURE 1 001925

c. Compare actual weight with weight stamped on the cylinder collar. If cylinder weight loss exceeds 10 percent of weight stamped on cylinder collar, cylinder must be recharged or replaced. d. Check hydrostatic date stamped on cylinder collar. Cylinder may require hydrostatic testing. Refer to NFPA 12, Standard on Carbon Dioxide Extinguishing Systems, for detailed instructions concerning hydrostatic test requirements. !

CAUTION

DO NOT reinstall any actuator to cylinder valve at this time. Actuators must remain off valve until they have been tested. If actuators are mounted on cylinder valve at this time, accidental actuation and discharge will result when actuators are tested.

11-1

Section 11 – Maintenance

SEMI-ANNUAL MAINTENANCE EXAMINATION (Continued) 12. Reattach flex bend to cylinder valve outlet and reclamp cylinder in bracket.

7. Cock ANSUL AUTOMAN mechanism using cocking lever, Part No. 14995. See Figure 3.

Fusible Link Detection/Mechanical ANSUL AUTOMAN Release 1. Make certain lock bar, Part No. 14985, is in place in ANSUL AUTOMAN release mechanism. See Figure 2.

FIGURE 3 001882

LOCK BAR PROPERLY INSTALLED

8. Remove empty nitrogen cartridge and reset all auxiliary devices. !

FIGURE 2 000321

2. Make certain no pneumatic actuators are installed to any cylinder valves.

!

CAUTION

During this maintenance test, if any pneumatic actuators are installed to cylinder valves, the testing of the system will cause cylinder discharge. 3. Remove gasket from cartridge receiver in ANSUL AUTOMAN release mechanism. Check gasket for elasticity or cuts and replace if necessary. Clean and coat gasket lightly with a good grade of extreme temperature grease. Reinstall gasket into cartridge receiver. 4. Install LT-30-R cartridge in ANSUL AUTOMAN release. Hand tighten. 5. Remove lock bar and manually test system by operating the remote manual pull station or push “strike” button on ANSUL AUTOMAN release. 6. After operating manually, check that functions have been accomplished and the pneumatic tank actuator(s) have actuated.

CAUTION

Pneumatic cylinder actuator(s) must be reset prior to installing on cylinder valve or system will actuate.

9. Reset pneumatic tank actuator(s). See Figure 4. NOTICE Piston should move up and down with little resistance. If not, a small amount of Dow Corning 4 Silicone grease should be placed into the piston bore when the piston is up. Operate the piston up and down 2 or 3 times. If the piston is still hard to move, the actuator should be replaced. Make certain actuator is left in the reset (piston up) position.

PISTON


INCORRECT

FIGURE 4 001883

11-2

Section 11 – Maintenance 6-19-98 REV. 1 SEMI-ANNUAL MAINTENANCE EXAMINATION (Continued) Fusible Link Detection/Mechanical ANSUL AUTOMAN Release (Continued) 10. Make certain release mechanism is cocked. 11. Raise tension lever to “UP” position. See Figure 5.

18. Lower the tension lever to “DOWN” position. See Figure 6. 19. Recock the release mechanism and insert the lock bar. 20. Inspect the base of the wire rope clamping device to make certain that there is a minimum of 1/4 in. (6.4 mm) to 3/8 in. (9.5 mm) maximum clearance between the base of the trip hammer assembly and the cable lever assembly. See Figure 7. TRIP HAMMER ASSEMBLY


1/4 IN. (6.4 mm) MINIMUM 3/8 IN. (9.5 mm) MAXIMUM

TRIP HAMMER BASE

FIGURE 5 000322

12. Install test link, Part No. 15751, in terminal detector. 13. Lower tension lever to “DOWN” position. See Figure 6.

FIGURE 7 000323

TENSION LEVER IN “DOWN” POSITION

FIGURE 6 001926

14. Using wire cutter, cut test link at terminal detector to simulate automatic actuation. 15. After successful actuation, raise the tension lever to “UP” position. 16. Clean and return properly-rated, Ansul approved, fusible link to terminal detector. NOTICE Fusible links installed in system for six months or more must be replaced.

21. Locate detector linkage and properly position in each bracket. 22. Make certain additional devices have operated as intended. 23. Before reinstalling cartridge, reset all additional equipment by referring to appropriate section of Resetting and Recharge, Section 9. 24. Remove shipping cap and weigh each nitrogen cartridge. Replace if weight is 1/2 ounce (14.2 g) or more, below weight stamped on cartridge. 25. Make certain release mechanism is cocked and lock bar is installed, screw cartridge into release mechanism and hand tighten. 26. Remove lock bar. 27. Install cover on enclosure, install ring pin through “STRIKE” button, and secure with visual seal, Part No. 197. 28. Reinstall pneumatic actuator(s) on cylinder valves. 29. Record semi-annual maintenance date on tag attached to unit and/or in a permanent file.

17. Remove, clean, and return additional fusible links to series detector linkage(s). Fusible links loaded with extraneous material can result in excessive delays in actuation.

11-3


SEMI-ANNUAL MAINTENANCE EXAMINATION (Continued) Thermal Detection/Electric ANSUL AUTOMAN II-C Release 1. Make certain ring pin is in place in ANSUL AUTOMAN II-C release mechanism. See Figure 8.

8. Remove gasket from cartridge receiver in ANSUL AUTOMAN II-C release mechanism. Check gasket for elasticity or cuts and replace if necessary. Clean and coat gasket lightly with a good grade of extreme temperature grease. Reinstall gasket into cartridge receiver.

!

RESET LEVER

CAUTION

Pneumatic cylinder actuator must be reset prior to installing on cylinder valve or system will actuate.

RING PIN

9. Reset pneumatic cylinder actuator(s). See Figure 9.

FIGURE 8 001894

2. Make certain no pneumatic actuator(s) are installed on any cylinder valves. !

CAUTION

During this maintenance test, if any pneumatic actuators are installed to cylinder valves, the testing of the system will cause cylinder discharge.

NOTICE Piston should move up and down with little resistance. If not, a small amount of Dow Corning 4 Silicone grease should be placed into the piston bore when the piston is up. Operate the piston up and down 2 or 3 times. If the piston is still hard to move, the actuator should be replaced. Make certain actuator is left in the reset (piston up) position.

PISTON

3. If necessary, install LT-30-R cartridge in ANSUL AUTOMAN II-C release. Hand tighten. 4. Remove ring pin and manually test system by operating the remote manual pull station or push “STRIKE” button on ANSUL AUTOMAN II-C release. 5. After operating manually, check that all functions have been accomplished and the pneumatic cylinder actuator(s) have actuated. 6. Cock ANSUL AUTOMAN II-C release mechanism using cocking lever, Part No. 26310, and install ring pin. 7. Remove empty nitrogen cartridge and reset all auxiliary devices.

11-4


INCORRECT

FIGURE 9 001883

10. Make certain the release mechanism is cocked and ring pin is removed.


SEMI-ANNUAL MAINTENANCE EXAMINATION (Continued) Thermal Detection/Electric ANSUL AUTOMAN II-C Release (Continued) 11. Test each thermal detector by submerging in a pan of hot or boiling water or by using an approved heat lamp. Test each detector individually and recock release mechanism after each test. NOTICE If system does not fire, check the integrity of the solenoid by using an ohmmeter and measure the resistance of the solenoid coil. If it is not within the resistance range, replace solenoid. There are two different solenoids used in the ANSUL AUTOMAN II-C release and their resistance is as follows: Number Stamped on Solenoid P4-2025 TBX16-C-12 VDC

Resistance Measurement 12-18 ohms 21-32 ohms

12. With release mechanism cocked, install ring pin. See Figure 8. 13. Before installing cartridge, reset all additional equipment by referring to appropriate section of Resetting and Recharge, Section 9. 14. Remove shipping cap and weigh each nitrogen cartridge. Replace if weight is 1/2 ounce (14.2 g), or more, below weight stamped on cartridge. 15. Make certain release mechanism is cocked and ring pin is installed, screw replacement cartridge into release mechanism and hand tighten. 16. Remove ring pin. 17. Install cover on enclosure, install ring pin through "STRIKE" button, and secure with visual seal, Part No. 197. 18. Reinstall pneumatic actuator(s) on cylinder valves. Make certain actuator(s) have been reset before installing on cylinder valve. 19. Record semi-annual maintenance date on tag attached to unit and/or in a permanent file.

H.A.D. Detection/Mechanical Control Head !

CAUTION

For systems with dual control heads, remove both heads before testing. 1. With mechanical control head disconnected from cylinder, remove locking pin and operate local manual control to test proper operation of head. 2. Replace locking pin and reset control head. DO NOT attach control head to cylinder valve. 3. Inspect H.A.D. detectors and clean off all foreign substances. Failure to clean detecting device will seriously impair the efficiency of the automatic feature of the system which may result in a failure to detect the fire. 4. To test the H.A.D. detector, make certain the control head is not mounted on the cylinder valve. Submerge H.A.D. detector in container of hot water, 180 °F to 200 °F, (82 °C to 93 °C). It is not advisable to use torch on detectors since they are very sensitive to heat. Check control heads to see that they have operated.

!

CAUTION

Be sure head is reset. Indicator arrow must be in “SET” position. Failure to reset will cause accidental discharge of the system. Allow detectors to cool for at least five minutes before resetting control heads. 5. Reset control head, reinstall on cylinder valve, and wrench tighten swivel nut. Do not exceed 10 ft. lb. (13.6 Nm) torque. 6. Install new seal wire on control head(s). 7. Record semi-annual maintenance date on tag attached to unit and/or in a permanent file.

11-5


SEMI-ANNUAL MAINTENANCE EXAMINATION (Continued) Electric Detection/AUTOPULSE Control System NOTICE Remove the HF electric valve actuator and any additional actuators from the cylinder valve prior to testing the AUTOPULSE Control System. Failure to do so will cause accidental system discharge. Perform system semi-annual maintenance by following the instructions listed in the appropriate AUTOPULSE Control System Installation, Operation, and Maintenance Manual and the HF Electric Actuator Application and Installation Sheet, Part No. 73330.

11-6

ANSUL



Section 12

Typical Applications In order to help understand the design process, twelve example hazards are covered in this section. There may be different design approaches that can be taken for each hazard. The examples are only intended to show what has to be done to complete the design and hydraulic calculations. An outline of each of the example hazards is provided and each item is listed in the numerical order in which it should be performed.

12-1

Section 12 – Typical Applications

EXAMPLE NO. 1 – DIP TANKS A dip tank operation may consist of a simple hand held basket of parts or may be a more complex operation with material being conveyed to the tank by an overhead monorail conveyor, or parts dipped by an overhead hoist. The tank may or may not be enclosed by a hinged lid and often has a drain board or drip area which may or may not be enclosed. The hazard to be protected would be the liquid surface of the tank, any hanging material above the drip area, the drain board/drip area, and any associated pumps within the area. If an exhaust system is utilized, this must also be protected. It is essential that all pumps, motorized conveyor, heaters, and ventilation fans be stopped. The exhaust duct, if any, must be dampered to close upon system actuation. In paint and varnish operations, it is common practice for the dipped parts to be dried in a bake oven. The authority having jurisdiction may require that the oven also be protected. Hazard The dip tank is 8 ft. 10 1/2 in. x 4 ft. 5 in. with a 6 in. free board. The drainboard is 7 ft. x 4 ft. 5 in. Nozzles are not to be closer than 30 in. from the surface. Hanging parts are within 1 ft. 6 in. from the surface. Factory Mutual is the insurance authority. ITEM NO. 1 – Calculation Sheet.Fill out the calculation sheet with the information required to determine flow rate and total quantity of agent. ITEM NO. 2 – Drawing. Complete a drawing or sketch as accurate as possible to determine pipe lengths and number of fittings. Locate and number all node points and nozzles. ITEM NO. 3 – Hydraulic Input Form.With the information on pipe lengths,fittings, node points, and nozzles, fill in the input form. ITEM NO. 4 – Print Out No.1.The first print out that the computer program runs will indicate nozzle codes, discharge times, and pipe sizes. Notice that on the first print out, the nozzle codes generated by the computer are given in exact, fractional orifice sizes. It is necessary at this point to choose the nearest nominal orifice size available and reinput the hydraulic calculations data (nozzle codes and pipe sizes) to make certain the discharge time and nozzle pressures do not fall below the approved minimums. ITEM NO. 5 – Print Out No. 2.After the nozzle orifices and pipe sizes have been chosen, the second computer print out will verify that the system will function properly. ITEM NO. 6 – Bill Of Material.A bill of material should be generated to show the complete list of all required hardware.

12-2


EXAMPLE NO. 1 – DIP TANKS Item No. 1 – Calculation Sheet

001927

12-3


EXAMPLE NO. 1 – DIP TANKS Item No. 2 – Drawing

001928

12-4


EXAMPLE NO. 1 – DIP TANKS Item No. 3 – Hydraulic Input Form/1

001929

12-5


EXAMPLE NO. 1 – DIP TANKS Item No. 3 – Hydraulic Input Form/2

001930

12-6


EXAMPLE NO. 1 – DIP TANKS Item No. 4 – Print Out No. 1/1

001931

12-7



001932

12-8



001933

12-9



001934

12-10



001935

12-11



001936

12-12


EXAMPLE NO. 1 – DIP TANKS Item No. 6 – Bill Of Material

001937

12-13


EXAMPLE NO. 2 – COMPUTER ROOM AND SUBFLOOR Electronic data processing involves storage, recall and use of information via electronic equipment. Due to the extremely high dollar value of equipment and data contained within the computer facility, the necessity for fire protection in combination with a fast responding detection system is readily apparent. The computer room and subfloor space can be protected with a total flood carbon dioxide system, especially when the computer room is normally unoccupied. Fires can occur as deep seated fires within the computer electrical insulation and in the cable bundles in the subfloor. Paper debris that has been allowed to accumulate in the subfloor is also a source for ignition. The CO2 system is designed in accordance with NFPA 12, which states that a 30%concentration must be achieved within two minutes and a design concentration of 50% must be reached within seven minutes. Design concentration must be maintained for a period of not less than twenty minutes. Factory Mutual (FM) requires a 65% design concentration if the subfloor is constructed of combustible material, or has contents other than cable. FM also requires the design concentration of 65% then be held for a minimum of thirty minutes. Occasionally, drainage is installed in the subfloor area. Provisions must be made for making the drain piping a closed system unless water is present to assist in assuring the necessary concentration. When the computer room is normally occupied, personnel safety is of first concern. Alarms must be located in the room and a mechanical time delay must be incorporated in the system to allow sufficient time for personnel to evacuate the room prior to discharge. Smoke detection is generally used. The authority having jurisdiction may have additional requirements. Hazard A computer room having dimensions of 70 ft. x 50 ft. x 8 ft. A subfloor having dimensions of 70 ft. x 50 ft. x 1 ft. No unclosable openings. Ventilation to be shut down at system actuation. ITEM NO. 1 – Calculation Sheet.Fill out the calculation sheet with the information required to determine flow rate and total quantity of agent. ITEM NO. 2 – Drawing. Complete a drawing or sketch as accurate as possible to determine pipe lengths and number of fittings. Locate and number all node points and nozzles.

12-14

ITEM NO. 3 – Hydraulic Input Form.With the information on pipe lengths, fittings, node points, and nozzles, fill in the input form. ITEM NO. 4 – Print Out No. 1.The first print out that the computer program runs will indicate nozzle codes, discharge times, and pipe sizes. Notice that on the first print out, the nozzle codes generated by the computer are given in exact, fractional orifice sizes. It is necessary at this point to choose the nearest nominal size orifice available and reinput the hydraulic calculations to make certain the discharge time and nozzle pressures do not fall below the approved minimums. ITEM NO. 5 – Print Out No. 2.After the nozzle orifices and pipe sizes have been chosen, the second computer print out will verify that the system will function properly. ITEM NO. 6 – Bill Of Material.A bill of material should be generated to show the complete list of all required hardware.


EXAMPLE NO. 2 – COMPUTER ROOM AND SUBFLOOR Item No. 1 – Calculation Sheet/1

001938

12-15

Section 12 – Typical Applications REV. 1

EXAMPLE NO. 2 – COMPUTER ROOM AND SUBFLOOR Item No. 1 – Calculation Sheet/2

001939

12-16


EXAMPLE NO. 2 – COMPUTER ROOM AND SUBFLOOR Item No. 2 – Drawing/1

001940

12-17


EXAMPLE NO. 2 – COMPUTER ROOM AND SUBFLOOR Item No. 2 – Drawing/2

001941

12-18


EXAMPLE NO. 2 – COMPUTER ROOM AND SUBFLOOR Item No. 3 – Hydraulic Input Form/1

001942

12-19



001943

12-20



001944

12-21



001945

12-22



001946

12-23


EXAMPLE NO. 2 – COMPUTER ROOM AND SUBFLOOR Item No. 4 – Print Out No. 1/1

001947

12-24



001948

12-25



001949

12-26



001950

12-27



001951

12-28



001952

12-29



001953

12-30



001954

12-31



001955

12-32



001956

12-33



001957

12-34



001958

12-35


EXAMPLE NO. 2 – COMPUTER ROOM AND SUBFLOOR Item No. 6 – Bill Of Material

001959

12-36


EXAMPLE NO. 3 – WAVE SOLDER MACHINE A typical wave solder machine consists of an enclosure and fume exhaust system. The machine usually employs a motorized conveyor for transporting parts from flux tubs to a preheater and then to the solder pots, all of which are within the enclosure. Access doors may be installed on one or both sides of the enclosure. If these doors are always in the closed position, then the enclosure may be treated as a total flood hazard. In those cases where the doors are left open, the hazardous surface must be treated as a local application hazard. In any case, the exhaust system would be considered as a total flood hazard. A fire condition can exist when an excess amount of flux is applied to the parts and is then ignited by the preheater or the molten solder which can be at a temperature of 500 °F to 550 °F (260 °C to 288 °C). Shut down of all heating sources, pumps, conveyor and exhaust system must be automatically accomplished prior to the carbon dioxide system discharge. It is essential that the duct be dampered with the damper to close upon system actuation. Hazard Enclosure with dimensions of 16 ft. x 4 ft. x 3 ft. Two conveyor openings of 2 ft. x 6 in., down 3 ft. 6 in. from top of the enclosure. Exhaust duct is 9 in. diameter and 12 ft. long. A reserve system is required. Two design approaches: open sides and enclosed. ITEM NO. 1 – Calculation Sheet.Fill out the calculation sheet with the information required to determine flow rate and total quantity of agent. ITEM NO. 2 – Drawing. Complete a drawing or sketch as accurate as possible to determine pipe lengths and number of fittings. Locate and number all node points and nozzles. ITEM NO. 3 – Hydraulic Input Form.With the information on pipe lengths, fittings, node points, and nozzles, fill in the input form.

ITEM NO. 5 – Print Out No. 2.The second printout reflects the first hydraulic run using 3-100 lb. cylinders (total of 300 lbs.) instead of 3-75 lb. cylinders as first was used. Notice the nozzle orifices need to be rounded to a nominal size and then rerun to determine everything is still acceptable. ITEM NO. 6 – Print Out No. 3.This printout confirms that after the orifices sizes and pipe sizes were inputted, the resulting hydraulic calculations are acceptable. ITEM NO. 7 – Bill of Material.This should then be completed for the system protecting the open sided wave solder machine. ITEM NO. 8 – Calculation Sheet. Fill out the calculation sheet with the information required to determine flow rate and total quantity of agent for the enclosed wave solder machine. ITEM NO. 9 – Drawing. Complete a drawing or sketch as accurate as possible to determine pipe lengths and number of fittings. Locate and number all node points and nozzles. ITEM NO. 10 – Hydraulic Input Form.With the information on pipe lengths, fittings, node points, and nozzles, fill in the input form. ITEM NO. 11 – Print Out No. 1.The first print out that the computer program runs will indicate nozzle codes, discharge times, and pipe sizes. Notice that on the first print out, the nozzle codes generated by the computer are given in exact, fractional orifice sizes. It is necessary at this point to choose the nearest nominal size available orifice and reinput the hydraulic calculations to make certain the discharge time and nozzle pressures do not fall below the approved minimums. ITEM NO. 12 – Print Out No. 2.After the nozzle orifices and pipe sizes have been chosen, the second computer print out will verify that the system will function properly. ITEM NO. 13 – Bill Of Material.A bill of material should be generated to show the complete list of all required hardware.

ITEM NO. 4 – Print Out No. 1.The first print out that the computer program runs will indicate nozzle codes, discharge times, and pipe sizes. Notice that on the first print out, the computer printed out a warning stating the discharge time of 29.9 seconds was below the minimum local application time of 30 seconds. It is not possible on this example to lengthen the time by reducing the flow rate because the flow rate is already very close to the minimum. Therefore, it is necessary to add more agent.

12-37


EXAMPLE NO. 3 – WAVE SOLDER MACHINE Item No. 1 – Calculation Sheet

001960

12-38


EXAMPLE NO. 3 – WAVE SOLDER MACHINE Item No. 2 – Drawing

001961

12-39


EXAMPLE NO. 3 – WAVE SOLDER MACHINE Item No. 3 – Hydraulic Input Form/1

001962

12-40


EXAMPLE NO. 3 – WAVE SOLDER MACHINE Item No. 3 – Hydraulic Input Form/2

001963

12-41


EXAMPLE NO. 3 – WAVE SOLDER MACHINE Item No. 4 – Print Out No. 1/1

001964

12-42



001965

12-43



001966

12-44



001967

12-45



001968

12-46



001969

12-47


EXAMPLE NO. 3 – WAVE SOLDER MACHINE Item No.5 – Print Out No. 2/3

001970

12-48



001971

12-49



001972

12-50



001973

12-51


EXAMPLE NO. 3 – WAVE SOLDER MACHINE Item No. 7 – Bill Of Material

001974

12-52


EXAMPLE NO. 3 – WAVE SOLDER MACHINE Item No. 8 – Calculation Sheet

001975

12-53


EXAMPLE NO. 3 – WAVE SOLDER MACHINE Item No. 9 – Drawing

001976

12-54


EXAMPLE NO. 3 – WAVE SOLDER MACHINE Item No. 10 – Hydraulic Input Form

001977

12-55



001978

12-56



001979

12-57



001980

12-58



001981

12-59


EXAMPLE NO. 3 – WAVE SOLDER MACHINE Item No. 13 – The Bill Of Material

001982

12-60


EXAMPLE NO. 4 – ELECTRICAL CABINETS Electrical cabinets contain equipment and wiring subject to fire due to an electrical fault. Burning insulation soon becomes deep-seated in nature.The common approach to fire protection is to totally flood the enclosure. This is accomplished by injecting a sufficient quantity of carbon dioxide within the cabinet to suppress the fire and allow a “soaking’’ period.

ITEM NO. 5 – Print Out No. 2.After the nozzle orifices and pipe sizes have been chosen, the second computer print out will verify that the system will function properly. ITEM NO. 6 – Bill Of Material.A bill of material should be generated to show the complete list of all required hardware.

Electrical cabinets may have a completely open interior or be compartmentalized. If the cabinet construction consists of a series of compartments, a CO2 nozzle and detector must be installed in each compartment. Cabinets may be reasonably “tight’’ or may have loose fitting doors or louver openings. If leakage is appreciable, making it difficult to maintain the required CO2 concentration over a set period of time, then an extended discharge of CO2 will be required. NFPA 12 states that a 50% concentration of CO2 is required for dry electrical fires in general and that a 30% concentration shall be achieved within two minutes with the design concentration being achieved within seven minutes. In addition, the design concentration must be maintained for a minimum of twenty minutes. Electrical power and any ventilation must be shut down prior to the CO2 discharge. Hazard The room contains a series of five electrical cabinets, each measuring 5 ft. x 4 ft. x 7 ft. high. The room is 50 ft. x 40 ft. x 10 ft. Each cabinet has a louvered door. The louvers measure 3 ft. x 4 in. and the center of each louver is 5 ft. from the top of the cabinet. ITEM NO. 1 – Calculation Sheet.Fill out the calculation sheet with the information required to determine flow rate and total quantity of agent. ITEM NO. 2 – Drawing. Complete a drawing or sketch as accurate as possible to determine pipe lengths and number of fittings. Locate and number all node points and nozzles. ITEM NO. 3 – Hydraulic Input Form.With the information on pipe lengths, fittings, node points, and nozzles, fill in the input form. ITEM NO. 4 – Print Out No.1.The first print out that the computer program runs will indicate nozzle codes, discharge times, and pipe sizes. Notice that on the first print out, the nozzle codes generated by the computer are given in exact, fractional orifice sizes. It is necessary at this point to choose the nearest nominal size available orifice and reinput the hydraulic calculations to make certain the discharge time and nozzle pressures do not fall below the approved minimums. 12-61


EXAMPLE NO. 4 – ELECTRICAL CABINETS Item No. 1 – Calculation Sheet

001983

12-62


EXAMPLE NO. 4 – ELECTRICAL CABINETS Item No. 2 – Drawing

001984

12-63


EXAMPLE NO. 4 – ELECTRICAL CABINETS Item No. 3 – Hydraulic Input Form

001985

12-64


EXAMPLE NO. 4 – ELECTRICAL CABINETS Item No. 4 – Print Out No. 1/1

001986

12-65



001987

12-66



001988

12-67



001989

12-68



001990

12-69



001991

12-70


EXAMPLE NO. 4 – ELECTRICAL CABINETS Item No. 6 – Bill Of Material

001992

12-71


EXAMPLE NO. 5 – TRANSFORMERS

Items 7 through 12 are for deep-seated protection.

Transformers may be either set in the open or in vaults.

Items 13 through 19 are for open, local application protection.

Transformers in vaults are treated as surface type total flood hazards. If there is a possibility that a heated transformer core could produce a “deep-seated’’ fire in the insulation, then treating the vault as a “deep-seated’’ hazard may be justified. This should be determined by consulting with the owners and the authority having jurisdiction. Transformers located in the open, where it is impractical to flood the room, are protected by locally applying CO2 using the rate by area method. Discharge nozzles are located around the transformer in order to completely engulf the transformer with CO2. Discharge nozzles are located in accordance with UL listings regarding discharge rate, distance and area of coverage. If egress is difficult, install a time delay in the discharge piping. When the hazard cannot be reduced to equivalent surface areas, the rate by volume method of design should be employed, whereby the transformer is regarded to be within an assumed volume, with the amount of CO2 required being based on this volume. Electrical clearances should be maintained in accordance with NFPA 12. For vault protection, all openings must be sealed, doors must fit tightly and ventilation must be shut down. Any vault floor drains should be provided with a normally closed valve, which only opens by oil pressure during an oil spill. Thermal detection is recommended. Hazard Transformer vault surface type fire. A vault with dimensions of 10 ft. x 12 ft. x 15 ft. high. One unclosable opening 2 ft. x 1 ft., with its center line 3 ft. from ceiling. All equipment to be shut down at system discharge. Transformer vault deep-seated fire. A vault with dimensions of 10 ft. x 12 ft. x 15 ft. high. One unclosable opening 2 ft. x 1 ft., with its center line 3 ft. from ceiling. All equipment to be shut down at system discharge. Transformer in the open, indoor area. Transformer size is 4 ft. x 4 ft. x 5 ft. high. A diked area has been formed 2 ft. from all sides of the transformer. Fan in area to be shut down. Items 1 through 6 are for surface protection.

12-72

ITEM NO. 1– Calculation Sheet.Fill out the calculation sheet with the information required to determine flow rate and total quantity of agent. ITEM NO. 2 – Drawing. Complete a drawing or sketch as accurate as possible to determine pipe lengths and number of fittings. Locate and number all node points and nozzles. ITEM NO. 3 – Hydraulic Input Form.With the information on pipe lengths, fittings, node points, and nozzles, fill in the input form. ITEM NO. 4 – Print Out No. 1.The first print out that the computer program runs will indicate nozzle codes, discharge times, and pipe sizes. Notice that on the first print out, the nozzle codes generated by the computer are given in exact, fractional orifice sizes. It is necessary at this point to choose the nearest nominal size available orifice and reinput the hydraulic calculations to make certain the discharge time and nozzle pressures do not fall below the approved minimums. ITEM NO. 5 – Print Out No. 2.After the nozzle orifices and pipe sizes have been chosen, the second computer print out will verify that the system will function properly. ITEM NO. 6 – Bill Of Material.A bill of material should be generated to show the complete list of all required hardware. ITEM NO. 7 – Calculation Sheet.Fill out the calculation sheet with the information required to determine flow rate and total quantity of agent. ITEM NO. 8 – Drawing. Complete a drawing or sketch as accurate as possible to determine pipe lengths and number of fittings. Locate and number all node points and nozzles. ITEM NO. 9 – Hydraulic Input Form. With the information on pipe lengths, fittings, node points, and nozzles, fill in the input form. ITEM NO. 10 – Print Out No.1.The first print out that the computer program runs will indicate nozzle codes, discharge times, and pipe sizes. Notice that on the first print out, the nozzle codes generated by the computer are given in exact, fractional orifice sizes. It is necessary at this point to choose the nearest nominal size available orifice and reinput the hydraulic calculations to make certain the discharge time and nozzle pressures do not fall below the approved minimums. ITEM NO. 11 – Print Out No. 2.After the nozzle orifices and pipe sizes have been chosen, the second computer print out will verify that the system will function properly.


ITEM NO. 12 – Bill Of Material. A bill of material should be generated to show the complete list of all required hardware. ITEM NO. 13 – Calculation Sheet.Fill out the calculation sheet with the information required to determine flow rate and total quantity of agent. ITEM NO. 14 – Drawing.Complete a drawing or sketch as accurate as possible to determine pipe lengths and number of fittings. Locate and number all node points and nozzles. ITEM NO. 15 – Hydraulic Input Form.With the information on pipe lengths, fittings, node points, and nozzles, fill in the input form. ITEM NO. 16 – Print Out No. 1.The first print out that the computer program runs will indicate nozzle codes, discharge times, and pipe sizes. Notice that on the first print out, the nozzle codes generated by the computer are given in exact, fractional orifice sizes. It is necessary at this point to choose the nearest nominal size available orifice and reinput the hydraulic calculations to make certain the discharge time and nozzle pressures do not fall below the approved minimums. ITEM NO. 17 – Print Out No. 2.After the nozzle orifices and pipe sizes have been chosen, the second computer print out will verify that the system will function properly. This second print out shows that the nozzle orifices chosen caused the system flow rate to drop to 85 lbs. per minute which is below the required minimum of 90. ITEM NO. 18 – Print Out No. 3.The nozzle No. 102 was changed to a orifice code of 7.5 from the originally chosen code of 7.0 and the calculations were rerun. This print out shows that the system flow rate is now acceptable. ITEM NO. 19 – Bill Of Material.A bill of material should be generated to show the complete list of all required hardware.

12-73


EXAMPLE NO. 5 – TRANSFORMERS Item No. 1– Calculation Sheet

001993

12-74


EXAMPLE NO. 5 – TRANSFORMERS Item No. 2 – Drawing

001994

12-75


EXAMPLE NO. 5 – TRANSFORMERS Item No. 3 – Hydraulic Input Form

001995

12-76


EXAMPLE NO. 5 – TRANSFORMERS Item No. 4 – Print Out No. 1/1

001996

12-77



001997

12-78



001998

12-79



001999

12-80


EXAMPLE NO. 5 – TRANSFORMERS Item No. 6 – Bill Of Material

002000

12-81


EXAMPLE NO. 5 – TRANSFORMERS Item No. 7 – Calculation Sheet

002001

12-82



002002

12-83



002003

12-84



002004

12-85



002005

12-86



002006

12-87



002007

12-88



002008

12-89


EXAMPLE NO. 5 – TRANSFORMERS Item No. 13 – Calculation Sheet

002009

12-90



002010

12-91



002011

12-92



002012

12-93



002013

12-94



002014

12-95



002015

12-96



002016

12-97



002017

12-98



002018

12-99



002019

12-100



002020

12-101



002021

12-102


EXAMPLE NO. 6 – SUBFLOOR Subfloor fires can occur as deep-seated fires in electrical insulation, in combustible debris accumulated due to poor maintenance, or in the construction material of the subfloor itself. Protection of data processing subfloor spaces can be accomplished with a total flood system. The CO2 system is designed in accordance with NFPA 12. Some CO2 loss will occur through cable openings into the equipment and through perforated tile. Make a complete evaluation of possible leakage sources and add CO2 to compensate. If leakage is excessive, an extended discharge system must be considered. Subfloor airspaces are often used as a plenum for the air handling system. If the space is used as a plenum, the air handling system MUST be shut down, tightly dampered and the air handling equipment at full rest BEFORE CO2 system discharge or the CO2 will be rapidly exhausted. A 50% design concentration is required for dry electrical fires by NFPA 12. A 30% concentration must be achieved within two minutes and design concentration must be reached within seven minutes. Design concentration must be maintained for a minimum of twenty minutes. Factory Mutual (FM) requires a 65% design concentration if the subfloor is constructed of combustible material or has contents other than cable. FM requires the design concentration be held for a minimum of 30 minutes.

ITEM NO. 2 – Drawing. Complete a drawing or sketch as accurate as possible to determine pipe lengths and number of fittings. Locate and number all node points and nozzles. ITEM NO. 3 – Hydraulic Input Form.With the information on pipe lengths, fittings, node points, and nozzles, fill in the input form. ITEM NO. 4 – Print Out No. 1.The first print out that the computer program runs will indicate nozzle codes, discharge times, and pipe sizes. Notice that on the first print out, the nozzle codes generated by the computer are given in exact, fractional orifice sizes. It is necessary at this point to choose the nearest nominal size available orifice and reinput the hydraulic calculations to make certain the discharge time and nozzle pressures do not fall below the approved minimums. ITEM NO. 5 – Print Out No. 2.After the nozzle orifices and pipe sizes have been chosen, the second computer print out will verify that the system will function properly. ITEM NO. 6 – Bill Of Material. A bill of material should be generated to show the complete list of all required hardware.

Occasionally, drainage is installed in a subfloor area. Provisions must be made for making the drain piping a closed system unless water is present. This will assist in assuring the necessary CO2 concentrations. Smoke detectors are usually employed for early warning of fire to allow manual release of the CO2 system with thermal detectors used as a backup to allow automatic system release. When protecting a subfloor area, it is a good idea to reduce the spacing and increase the quantity of nozzles protecting this area. If a forceful discharge is used to expel the carbon dioxide, some of the agent will be lost through openings into the computers and other openings around the area. This can lead to problems meeting the concentrations required. The authority having jurisdiction may have additional requirements. Hazard A subfloor having dimensions of 70 ft. x 50 ft. x 1 ft. No unclosable openings. Ventilation to be shut down at system actuation. ITEM NO. 1 – Calculation Sheet.Fill out the calculation sheet with the information required to determine flow rate and total quantity of agent. 12-103


EXAMPLE NO. 6 – SUBFLOOR Item No. 1 – Calculation Sheet

002022

12-104


EXAMPLE NO. 6 – SUBFLOOR Item No. 2 – Drawing

002023

12-105


EXAMPLE NO. 6 – SUBFLOOR Item No. 3 – Hydraulic Input Form 1/1

002024

12-106



002025

12-107



002026

12-108


EXAMPLE NO. 6 – SUBFLOOR Item No. 4 – Print Out No. 1/1

002027

12-109



002028

12-110



002029

12-111



002030

12-112



002031

12-113



002032

12-114



002033

12-115



002034

12-116


EXAMPLE NO. 6 – SUBFLOOR Item No. 6 – Bill Of Material

002035

12-117


EXAMPLE NO. 7 – BATTERY STORAGE VAULTS Acid type batteries are normally stored and charged in rooms or vaults which have adequate ventilation, so that large amounts of hydrogen are unable to collect. Any small hydrogen fires that result in the vault can be successfully suppressed by injecting a concentration of 75% carbon dioxide. It should be noted that the carbon dioxide system is not an explosion suppression system. The carbon dioxide system must be properly grounded to eliminate any possibility of a spark in an explosive atmosphere. Objects exposed to the CO2 discharge must be grounded to dissipate possible electrostatic charges (NFPA 77). Any openings which cannot be closed, or ventilating systems which cannot be shut down, shall be compensated for by additional carbon dioxide (NFPA 12). If egress is difficult, install time delay in discharge piping. Photoelectric smoke detection is recommended. The need for a time delay device should also be addressed. Hazard A battery storage vault has dimensions of 9 ft. x 15 ft. x 8 ft. high. No unclosable openings. Ventilation system must be shut down at discharge. ITEM NO. 1 – Calculation Sheet. Fill out the calculation sheet with the information required to determine flow rate and total quantity of agent. ITEM NO. 2 – Drawing. Complete a drawing or sketch as accurate as possible to determine pipe lengths and number of fittings. Locate and number all node points and nozzles. ITEM NO. 3 – Hydraulic Input Form.With the information on pipe lengths, fittings, node points, and nozzles, fill in the input form. ITEM NO. 4 – Print Out No.1.The first print out that the computer program runs will indicate nozzle codes, discharge times, and pipe sizes. Notice that on the first print out, the nozzle codes generated by the computer are given in exact, fractional orifice sizes. It is necessary at this point to choose the nearest nominal size available orifice and reinput the hydraulic calculations to make certain discharge time and nozzle pressures do not fall below approved minimums. ITEM NO. 5 – Print Out No. 2.After the nozzle orifices and pipe sizes have been chosen, the second computer print out will verify that the system will function properly. ITEM NO. 6 – Bill Of Material.A bill of material should be generated to show the complete list of all required hardware. 12-118


EXAMPLE NO. 7 – BATTERY STORAGE VAULTS Item No. 1 – Calculation Sheet

002036

12-119


EXAMPLE NO. 7 – BATTERY STORAGE VAULTS Item No. 2 – Drawing

002037

12-120


EXAMPLE NO. 7 – BATTERY STORAGE VAULTS Item No. 3 – Hydraulic Input Form

002038

12-121


EXAMPLE NO. 7 – BATTERY STORAGE VAULTS Item No. 4 – Print Out No. 1/1

002039

12-122



002040

12-123



002041

12-124



002042

12-125


EXAMPLE NO. 7 – BATTERY STORAGE VAULTS Item No. 6 – Bill Of Material

002043

12-126


EXAMPLE NO. 8 – DOCUMENT STORAGE The typical document storage room may consist of shelves containing stacks of records and documents, or the documents may be in file cabinets or cartons. A fire could result in surface burning and internal burning and therefore is considered a “deep-seated” type hazard.

ITEM NO. 6 – Bill Of Material.A bill of material should be generated to show the complete list of all required hardware.

Fire suppression is accomplished by totally flooding the room with a 65% concentration of CO2, using a flooding factor of 8 cu. ft. per lb. of CO2 (NFPA 12). Additional compensating CO2 must be provided for all unclosable openings (NFPA 12). NFPA 12 states that the design concentration shall be achieved within seven minutes, but that the discharge rate shall not be less than that required to develop a concentration of 30% in two minutes. The design concentration must be held for a minimum of twenty minutes, which necessitates a fairly tight enclosure. (Per I.R.I. the minimum is thirty minutes.) For personnel safety, a time delay device should be included in the system design. Smoke detection is recommended. Hazard A record storage room having dimensions of 15 ft. x 30 ft. x 11 ft. high. No unclosable openings. Ventilation to shut down at system discharge. ITEM NO. 1 – Calculation Sheet.Fill out the calculation sheet with the information required to determine flow rate and total quantity of agent. ITEM NO. 2 – Drawing. Complete a drawing or sketch as accurate as possible to determine pipe lengths and number of fittings. Locate and number all node points and nozzles. ITEM NO. 3 – Hydraulic Input Form.With the information on pipe lengths, fittings, node points, and nozzles, fill in the input form. ITEM NO. 4 – Print Out No. 1.The first print out that the computer program runs will indicate nozzle codes, discharge times, and pipe sizes. Notice that on the first print out, the nozzle codes generated by the computer are given in exact, fractional orifice sizes. It is necessary at this point to choose the nearest nominal size available orifice and reinput the hydraulic calculations to make certain the discharge time and nozzle pressures do not fall below the approved minimums. ITEM NO. 5 – Print Out No. 2.After the nozzle orifices and pipe sizes have been chosen, the second computer print out will verify that the system will function properly.

12-127


EXAMPLE NO. 8 – DOCUMENT STORAGE Item No. 1 – Calculation Sheet

002044

12-128


EXAMPLE NO. 8 – DOCUMENT STORAGE Item No. 2 – Drawing

002045

12-129


EXAMPLE NO. 8 – DOCUMENT STORAGE Item No. 3 – Hydraulic Input Form 1/1

002046

12-130


EXAMPLE NO. 8 – DOCUMENT STORAGE Item No. 3 – Hydraulic Input Form 1/2

002047

12-131


EXAMPLE NO. 8 – DOCUMENT STORAGE Item No. 4 – Print Out No.1/1

002048

12-132



002049

12-133



002050

12-134


EXAMPLE NO. 8 – DOCUMENT STORAGE Item No. 5 – Print Out No. 2/1

002051

12-135



002052

12-136



002053

12-137


EXAMPLE NO. 8 – DOCUMENT STORAGE Item No. 6 – Bill Of Material

002054

12-138


EXAMPLE NO. 9 – CONTROL ROOMS As a typical control room may have most of the room volume taken up with electrical equipment and wiring, it is therefore considered a “deep-seated’’ type hazard. In accordance with NFPA 12, the room is flooded with a 50% concentration of carbon dioxide. The volume of the room determines the NFPA 12 flooding factor to be used. For spaces containing a volume up to and including 2000 cu. ft., a flooding factor of 10 cu. ft. per lb. of CO2 is to be used.

ITEM NO. 6 – Bill Of Material.A bill of material should be generated to show the complete list of all required hardware. ITEM NO. 7 – Application Drawing.This typical application drawing is an example of the type of drawing which is generated from Ansul Applications Engineering Department. This drawing is normally used to secure approval from the local authority.

For volumes greater than 2000 cu. ft., a flooding factor of 12 cu. ft. per lb. of CO2 is used. Additional compensating CO2 must be provided for all unclosable openings. NFPA states that the design concentration shall be achieved within seven minutes, but that the discharge rate shall not be less than that required to develop a concentration of 30% in two minutes. The design concentration must be held for a minimum of twenty minutes. For personnel safety, a time delay device should be incorporated in the system design. Smoke detection is recommended. Hazard A control room having dimensions of 20 ft. x 32 ft. x 10 ft. high. No unclosable openings. Ventilation to be shut down at system actuation. ITEM NO. 1 – Calculation Sheet.Fill out the calculation sheet with the information required to determine flow rate and total quantity of agent. ITEM NO. 2 – Drawing. Complete a drawing or sketch as accurate as possible to determine pipe lengths and number of fittings. Locate and number all node points and nozzles. ITEM NO. 3 – Hydraulic Input Form.With the information on pipe lengths, fittings, node points, and nozzles, fill in the input form. ITEM NO. 4 – Print Out No. 1.The first print out that the computer program runs will indicate nozzle codes, discharge times, and pipe sizes. Notice that on the first print out, the nozzle codes generated by the computer are given in exact, fractional orifice sizes. It is necessary at this point to choose the nearest nominal size available orifice and reinput the hydraulic calculations to make certain the discharge time and nozzle pressures do not fall below the approved minimums. ITEM NO. 5 – Print Out No. 2.After the nozzle orifices and pipe sizes have been chosen, the second computer print out will verify that the system will function properly. 12-139


EXAMPLE NO. 9 – CONTROL ROOMS Item No. 1 – Calculation Sheet

002055

12-140


EXAMPLE NO. 9 – CONTROL ROOMS Item No. 2 – Drawing

002056

12-141


EXAMPLE NO. 9 – CONTROL ROOMS Item No. 3 – Hydraulic Input Form

002057

12-142


EXAMPLE NO. 9 – CONTROL ROOMS Item No. 4 – Print Out No. 1/1

002058

12-143



002059

12-144



002060

12-145



002061

12-146



002062

12-147



002063

12-148


EXAMPLE NO. 9 – CONTROL ROOMS Item No. 6 – Bill Of Material

002064

12-149


NOTES:

12-150

12-150.1


EXAMPLE NO. 10 – LUBE OIL PITS Open top pits containing lube oil pumps and motors, up to a depth of 4 ft. (1.2 m) and not exceeding a depth equal to one quarter of the width, should be protected as a local application type hazard, using the rate by area method of calculation. The quantity of carbon dioxide required is determined by calculating the total floor area and utilizing UL listed nozzles. It may also be necessary to locate nozzles in the center of the pit to provide complete coverage. The discharge time must be a minimum of 30 seconds. Open pits greater than 4 ft. (1.2 m) in depth and with a depth not exceeding one quarter its width, may be protected on the basis of 4 lbs./min./sq.ft. of floor area and calculated for a minimum of a 30 second discharge. Open top pits should have nozzles located slightly above the two-thirds level above the pit floor, provided the nozzle listings are not exceeded, and that if liquid is present, there is no danger of splashing. If the pit has a partial covering of solid plate, so that the open area is less than 3% of the cubic foot volume expressed in square feet, then the quantity of CO2 required may be calculated on a total flood basis, using a factor of .25 lbs./cu.ft. (four solid walls). Any leakage from the open area should be compensated for by adding one pound per square foot of opening. Refer to NFPA-12 Appendix B for additional guidance on protection for lube oil pits. Thermal detection is recommended. The following designs are based on NFPA 12. Hazard Example A – Pit is 8 ft. wide x 12 ft. long x 3.9 ft. deep. System is to be local application. Example B – Pit is 10 ft. wide x 15 ft. long x 8 ft. deep. System is to be local application. Example C – Pit is 12 ft. wide x 20 ft. long x 8 ft. deep and partially covered. The area which is not covered is 6 ft. x 3 ft. The system is to be total flood. Items 1 through 6 are for local application protection for pit “A’’. Items 7 through 14 are for local application protection for pit “B”. Items 15 through 20 are for total flooding protection for pit “C”. ITEM NO. 1 – Calculation Sheet.Fill out the calculation sheet with the information required to determine flow rate and total quantity of agent. ITEM NO. 2 – Drawing. Complete a drawing or sketch as accurate as possible to determine pipe lengths and number of fittings. Locate and number all node points and nozzles.

ITEM NO. 3 – Hydraulic Input Form.With the information on pipe lengths, fittings, node points, and nozzles, fill in the input form. ITEM NO. 4 – Print Out No. 1.The first print out that the computer program runs will indicate nozzle codes, discharge times, and pipe sizes. Notice that on the first print out, the nozzle codes generated by the computer are given in exact, fractional orifice sizes. It is necessary at this point to choose the nearest nominal size available orifice and reinput the hydraulic calculations to make certain the discharge time and nozzle pressures do not fall below the approved minimums. ITEM NO. 5 – Print Out No. 2.After the nozzle orifices and pipe sizes have been chosen, the second computer print out will verify that the system will function properly. ITEM NO. 6 – Bill Of Material.A bill of material should be generated to show the complete list of all required hardware. ITEM NO. 7 – Calculation Sheet.Fill out the calculation sheet with the information required to determine flow rate and total quantity of agent. ITEM NO. 8 – Drawing. Complete a drawing or sketch as accurate as possible to determine pipe lengths and number of fittings. Locate and number all node points and nozzles. ITEM NO. 9 – Hydraulic Input Form. With the information on pipe lengths, fittings, node points, and nozzles, fill in the input form. ITEM NO. 10 – Print Out No.1.The first print out that the computer program runs will indicate nozzle codes, discharge times, and pipe sizes. Notice that on the first print out, the nozzle codes generated by the computer are given in exact, fractional orifice sizes. It is necessary at this point to choose the nearest nominal size available orifice and reinput the hydraulic calculations to make certain the discharge time and nozzle pressures do not fall below the approved minimums. ITEM NO. 11 – Hydraulic Input.After the nozzle orifices and pipe sizes have been chosen, the second computer print out will verify that the system will function properly. In this case though, after this input, an error message was shown on the computer screen stating that the pipe sizes are too small for the orifice codes chosen. It is now necessary to increase the pipe sizes and rerun the calculation. ITEM NO. 12 – Print Out No. 2.After the error message was received from the computer, the pipe sizes were increased and the computer was left to choose the nozzle codes again. ITEM NO. 13 – Print Out No. 3.After the second print out ran successfully, the nominal orifice codes were chosen and the final calculation was run to determine the system will function properly. 12-151


ITEM NO. 14 – Bill Of Material.A bill of material should be generated to show the complete list of all required hardware. ITEM NO. 15 – Calculation Sheet.Fill out the calculation sheet with the information required to determine flow rate and total quantity of agent. ITEM NO. 16 – Drawing.Complete a drawing or sketch as accurate as possible to determine pipe lengths and number of fittings. Locate and number all node points and nozzles. ITEM NO. 17 – Hydraulic Input Form.With the information on pipe lengths, fittings, node points, and nozzles, fill in the input form. ITEM NO. 18 – Print Out No. 1.The first print out that the computer program runs will indicate nozzle codes, discharge times, and pipe sizes. Notice that on the first print out, the nozzle codes generated by the computer are given in exact, fractional orifice sizes. It is necessary at this point to choose the nearest nominal size available orifice and reinput the hydraulic calculations to make certain the discharge time and nozzle pressures do not fall below the approved minimums. ITEM NO. 19 – Print Out No. 2.After the nozzle orifices and pipe sizes have been chosen, the second computer print out will verify that the system will function properly. ITEM NO. 20 – Bill Of Material. A bill of material should be generated to show the complete list of all required hardware.

12-152


EXAMPLE NO. 10 – LUBE OIL PITS Item No. 1 – Calculation Sheet

002066

12-153


EXAMPLE NO. 10 – LUBE OIL PITS Item No. 2 – Drawing

002067

12-154


EXAMPLE NO. 10 – LUBE OIL PITS Item No. 3 – Hydraulic Input Form/1

002068

12-155


EXAMPLE NO. 10 – LUBE OIL PITS Item No. 3 – Hydraulic Input Form/2

002069

12-156


EXAMPLE NO. 10 – LUBE OIL PITS Item No. 4 – Print Out No. 1/1

002070

12-157



002071

12-158



002072

12-159



002073

12-160



002074

12-161



002075

12-162


EXAMPLE NO. 10 – LUBE OIL PITS Item No. 6 – Bill Of Material

002076

12-163



002077

12-164



002078

12-165


EXAMPLE NO. 10 – LUBE OIL PITS Item No. 9 – Hydraulic Input Form

002079

12-166


EXAMPLE NO. 10 – LUBE OIL PITS Item No. 10 – Print Out No.1/1

0020780

12-167



002081

12-168



002082

12-169


EXAMPLE NO. 10 – LUBE OIL PITS Item No. 11 – Hydraulic Input

002083

12-170


EXAMPLE NO. 10 – LUBE OIL PITS Item No.12 – Print Out No. 2/1

002084

12-171



002085

12-172



002086

12-173



002087

12-174



002088

12-175



002089

12-176



002090

12-177



002091

12-178



002092

12-179


EXAMPLE NO. 10 – LUBE OIL PITS Item No.17 – Hydraulic Input Form

002093

12-180



002094

12-181



002095

12-182



002096

12-183



002097

12-184



002098

12-185


EXAMPLE NO. 11 – GENERATORS (RECIRCULATING AND NON-RECIRCULATING TYPE) RECIRCULATING TYPE – Turbine generators are generally of the enclosed recirculating type. If an electrical fault occurs which can cause a deep seated type fire in the electrical insulation, the resultant fire can be completely suppressed with carbon dioxide. This is accomplished by total flooding the enclosure with a carbon dioxide fixed fire suppression system. The CO2 system is designed in accordance with NFPA 12, which addresses the fire protection of rotating electrical equipment. The CO2 system normally consists of a two pipe system. One group of cylinders is piped to a set of nozzles to give an initial high rate of discharge. This discharge rate shall be such as to achieve a 30% concentration of CO2 within two minutes, with the design concentration to be achieved within seven minutes. (Note: Factory Mutual requires a 30% concentration in one minute.) A second group of cylinders is discharged simultaneously at a much slower rate through a separate network of pipe and nozzles. This cylinder group provides an extended discharge of CO2 for the generator deceleration period in order to maintain an inert atmosphere within the enclosure. A minimum concentration of 30% must be maintained throughout the deceleration period but for not less than twenty minutes. (Refer to NFPA 12.) Multiple generators can be protected with CO2 by use of selector valves in conjunction with a common bank of cylinders. A reserve bank of cylinders is normally required as a common back-up. NON-RECIRCULATING TYPE – These generators are protected in the same manner as the recirculating type except that 35% must be added to the gas requirement for the extended discharge as determined from NFPA 12. Hazard Generator housing having dimensions of 14 ft. x 8 ft. x 6 ft. 4 in. and a pit of 13 ft. x 7 ft. 6 in. x 8 ft. No unclosable openings. Generator is a recirculating type with a deceleration period of twenty minutes. Items 1 through 9 are for protection of the recirculating generator. Items 10 through 18 are for protection of the non-recirculating generator. ITEM NO. 1 – Calculation Sheet.Fill out the calculation sheet with the information required to determine flow rate and total quantity of agent.

12-186

ITEM NO. 2 – Drawing. Complete a drawing or sketch as accurate as possible to determine pipe lengths and number of fittings. Locate and number all node points and nozzles. ITEM NO. 3 – Hydraulic Input Form. With the information on pipe lengths, fittings, node points, and nozzles, fill in the input form. ITEM NO. 4 – Print Out No.1.The first print out that the computer program runs will indicate nozzle codes, discharge times, and pipe sizes. Notice that on the first print out, the nozzle codes generated by the computer are given in exact, fractional orifice sizes. It is necessary at this point to choose the nearest nominal size available orifice and reinput the hydraulic calculations to make certain the discharge time and nozzle pressures do not fall below the approved minimums. ITEM NO. 5 – Print Out No. 2.After the nozzle orifices and pipe sizes have been chosen, the second computer print out will verify that the system will function properly. ITEM NO. 6 – Hydraulic Input Form.This hydraulic input form is required to calculate the extended discharge portion of the system. ITEM NO. 7 – Print Out No.1.The first print out that the computer program runs will indicate nozzle codes, discharge times, and pipe sizes. Notice that on the first print out, the nozzle codes generated by the computer are given in exact, fractional orifice sizes. It is necessary at this point to choose the nearest nominal size available orifice and reinput the hydraulic calculations to make certain the discharge time and nozzle pressures do not fall below the approved minimums. ITEM NO. 8 – Print Out No. 2.After the nozzle orifices and pipe sizes have been chosen, the second computer print out will verify that the system will function properly. ITEM NO. 9 – Bill Of Material.A bill of material should be generated to show the complete list of all required hardware. ITEM NO. 10 – Calculation Sheet. Fill out the calculation sheet with the information required to determine flow rate and total quantity of agent. ITEM NO. 11 – Drawing.Complete a drawing or sketch as accurate as possible to determine pipe lengths and number of fittings. Locate and number all node points and nozzles. ITEM NO. 12– Hydraulic Input Form. With the information on pipe lengths, fittings, node points, and nozzles, fill in the input form.


ITEM NO. 13 – Print Out No.1.The first print out that the computer program runs will indicate nozzle codes, discharge times, and pipe sizes. Notice that on the first print out, the nozzle codes generated by the computer are given in exact, fractional orifice sizes. It is necessary at this point to choose the nearest nominal size available orifice and reinput the hydraulic calculations to make certain the discharge time and nozzle pressures do not fall below the approved minimums. ITEM NO. 14 – Print Out No. 2.After the nozzle orifices and pipe sizes have been chosen, the second computer print out will verify that the system will function properly. ITEM NO. 15 – Hydraulic Input Form.This hydraulic input form is required to calculate the extended discharge portion of the system. ITEM NO. 16 – Print Out No. 1.The first print out that the computer program runs will indicate nozzle codes, discharge times, and pipe sizes. Notice that on the first print out, the nozzle codes generated by the computer are given in exact, fractional orifice sizes. It is necessary at this point to choose the nearest nominal size available orifice and reinput the hydraulic calculations to make certain the discharge time and nozzle pressures do not fall below the approved minimums. ITEM NO. 17 – Print Out No. 2.After the nozzle orifices and pipe sizes have been chosen, the second computer print out will verify that the system will function properly. ITEM NO. 18 – Bill Of Material.A bill of material should be generated to show the complete list of all required hardware.

12-187


EXAMPLE NO. 11 – GENERATORS (RECIRCULATING AND NON-RECIRCULATING TYPE) Item No. 1 – Calculation Sheet

002099

12-188


EXAMPLE NO. 11 – GENERATORS (RECIRCULATING AND NON-RECIRCULATING TYPE) Item No. 2 – Drawing

002100

12-189


EXAMPLE NO. 11 – GENERATORS (RECIRCULATING AND NON-RECIRCULATING TYPE) Item No. 3 – Hydraulic Input Form

002101

12-190


EXAMPLE NO. 11 – GENERATORS (RECIRCULATING AND NON-RECIRCULATING TYPE) Item No. 4 – Print Out No. 1/1

002102

12-191



002103

12-192



002104

12-193



002105

12-194



002106

12-195



002107

12-196



002108

12-197



002109

12-198



002110

12-199


EXAMPLE NO. 11 – GENERATORS (RECIRCULATING AND NON-RECIRCULATING TYPE) Item No. 9 – Bill Of Material

002111

12-200


EXAMPLE NO. 11 – GENERATORS (RECIRCULATING AND NON-RECIRCULATING TYPE) Item No. 10 – Calculation Sheet

002112

12-201


EXAMPLE NO. 11 – GENERATORS (RECIRCULATING AND NON-RECIRCULATING TYPE) Item No. 11 – Drawing

002113

12-202



002114

12-203



002115

12-204



002115

12-205



002116

12-206



002117

12-207



002118

12-208



002119

12-209



002120

12-210



002121

12-211



002122

12-212


EXAMPLE NO. 11 – GENERATORS (RECIRCULATING AND NON-RECIRCULATING TYPE) Item No. 18 – Bill Of Material

002123

12-213


EXAMPLE NO. 12 – INDUSTRIAL FRYER Many types of foods are prepared by deep fat frying in oil contained in large industrial type fryers. The cooking oil is generally at a temperature of 350 °F to 400 °F (177 °C to 204 °C) and is maintained by thermostatic controls. A fire condition exists when these controls fail, allowing the temperature of the oil to rise above 700 °F (371 °C), which is the auto-ignition point of the oil. With a carbon dioxide system, an extended discharge of CO2 for a minimum period of three minutes is required to allow for sufficient cooling of the oil and heated metal surfaces. Several configurations of cooking fryers exist. This discussion will concern itself only with the rectangular type fryer with an elevating hood and exhaust system. The three types of design approaches to be considered are: 1. Total flooding with the hood in the down position. 2. Rate by volume local application with the hood up (entire volume will include fryer plus 2 ft. (.6m) above and on each side of the fryer). 3. A combination system from either hood up or hood down. (Total flooding if the hood is down, local application rate by area if the hood is up.) All three designs also include a local application system for the drainboard and pump. It is essential that prior to the CO2 discharge all fuel supplies, heaters, equipment, and exhaust fans be shut down and a damper in the exhaust dust be allowed to close. Since the hood and a section of the duct is capable of being raised or lowered, the interconnecting of the CO2 hood piping is by means of a looped section of high pressure CO2 hose. The first method of protection would consist of Total Flooding Protection of the hood only when it is in the down position. This is the least reliable method as it requires the hood to be in the down position to be effective. Many fires involving these cooking appliances start when the hood is in the up position for maintenance or when the operator opens the hood in the event of a fire. In these cases the system is useless. We would recommend this method be employed only if the owner and the Authority Having Jurisdiction are willing to sign a waiver stating that the fryer will only be protected when the hood is in the down position. The second method of protecting this hazard would be to design the system based upon Local Application Rate by Volume. This may be employed if the fryer is a relatively small hazard. This method will put all of the nozzles on the hood and is designed per NFPA 12 to cover an area approximately 2 ft. (.6 m) outside the fryer on all sides and the top. This will usually be the most costly method of protection. 12-214

The third method of protection is Local Application Rate by Area in conjunction with Total Flood protection. In this case the fryer is protected by the same Total Flooding system as utilized in the first method and is also protected by a Local Application system designed to cover the liquid surface when the hood is in the up position. The Local Application nozzles are positioned just outside of the hood and even with the bottom of the hood when it is in the up position. Both systems will discharge simultaneously so that the hazard is protected regardless of the position of the hood. Even though this system employs two separate systems it is usually more cost effective than the Local Application Rate by Volume system. Hazard A potato chip fryer has dimensions of 12 ft. x 3 ft. x 4 ft. when the hood is down during the frying operation. There are conveyor openings at both ends, each 2 ft. 6 in. x 9 in., with the centerline 2 ft. from the top of the hood. A drainboard is at the exit end having dimensions of 12 ft. x 3 ft. There is an adjacent cooking oil pump having a dimension of 3 ft. x 2 ft. A telescoping exhaust duct exits from the top of the hood, measuring 18 in. diameter x 40 ft. in total length. The roof fan housing measures 5 ft. x 4 ft. x 4 ft. Items 1 through 5 are protection for the hood in the down position only. Items 6 through 8 are protection for the drain board. Item 9 is a bill of materials for the hood down system and the drain board system. Items 10 through 17 are protection for hood up, rate by volume, including local application. Items 18 through 23 are protection for the hood in either the up or down position. ITEM NO. 1 – Calculation Sheet.Fill out the calculation sheet with the information required to determine flow rate and total quantity of agent. ITEM NO. 2 – Drawing. Complete a drawing or sketch as accurate as possible to determine pipe lengths and number of fittings. Locate and number all node points and nozzles. ITEM NO. 3 – Hydraulic Input Form.With the information on pipe lengths, fittings, node points, and nozzles, fill in the input form.


ITEM NO. 4 – Print Out No. 1.The first print out that the computer program runs will indicate nozzle codes, discharge times, and pipe sizes. Notice that on the first print out, the nozzle codes generated by the computer are given in exact, fractional orifice sizes. It is necessary at this point to choose the nearest nominal size available orifice and reinput the hydraulic calculations to make certain the discharge time and nozzle pressures do not fall below the approved minimums. ITEM NO. 5 – Print Out No. 2.After the nozzle orifices and pipe sizes have been chosen, the second computer print out will verify that the system will function properly. ITEM NO. 6 – Hydraulic Input Form.(Drain board) With the information on pipe lengths, fittings, node points, and nozzles, fill in the input form for the drain board system. ITEM NO. 7 – Print Out No. 1.(Drain board) The first print out that the computer program runs will indicate nozzle codes, discharge times, and pipe sizes. Notice that on the first print out, the nozzle codes generated by the computer are given in exact, fractional orifice sizes. It is necessary at this point to choose the nearest nominal size available orifice and re-input the hydraulic calculations to make certain the discharge time and nozzle pressures do not fall below the approved minimums. ITEM NO. 8 – Print Out No. 2. (Drain board) After the nozzle orifices and pipe sizes have been chosen, the second computer print out will verify that the system will function properly. ITEM NO. 9 – Bill Of Material. A bill of material should be generated to show the complete list of all required hardware. ITEM NO. 10 – Calculation Sheet.Fill out the calculation sheet with the information required to determine flow rate and total quantity of agent. ITEM NO. 11 – Drawing.Complete a drawing or sketch as accurate as possible to determine pipe lengths and number of fittings. Locate and number all node points and nozzles. ITEM NO. 12 – Hydraulic Input Form.With the information on pipe lengths, fittings, node points, and nozzles, fill in the input form. ITEM NO. 13 – Print Out No. 1.The first print out that the computer program runs will indicate nozzle codes, discharge times, and pipe sizes. Notice that on the first print out, the nozzle codes generated by the computer are given in exact, fractional orifice sizes. It is necessary at this point to choose the nearest nominal size available orifice and reinput the hydraulic calculations to make certain the discharge time and nozzle pressures do not fall below the approved minimums.

ITEM NO. 14 – Hydraulic Input.After the nozzle orifices and pipe sizes have been chosen, the second computer print out will verify that the system will function properly. In this case though, after this input, an error message was shown on the computer screen stating that the pipe sizes are too small for the orifice codes chosen. It is now necessary to increase the pipe sizes and rerun the calculation. ITEM NO. 15 – Print Out No. 2.After the error message was received from the computer, the pipe sizes were increased and the computer was left to choose the nozzle codes again. ITEM NO. 16 – Print Out No. 3.After the second print out ran successfully, the nominal orifice codes were chosen and the final calculation was run to determine the system will function properly. ITEM NO. 17 – Bill Of Material.A bill of material should be generated to show the complete list of all required hardware. ITEM NO. 18 – Calculation Sheet.Fill out the calculation sheet with the information required to determine flow rate and total quantity of agent. ITEM NO. 19 – Drawing.Complete a drawing or sketch as accurate as possible to determine pipe lengths and number of fittings. Locate and number all node points and nozzles. ITEM NO. 20 – Hydraulic Input Form. With the information on pipe lengths, fittings, node points, and nozzles, fill in the input form. ITEM NO. 21 – Print Out No.1.The first print out that the computer program runs will indicate nozzle codes, discharge times, and pipe sizes. Notice that on the first print out, the nozzle codes generated by the computer are given in exact, fractional orifice sizes. It is necessary at this point to choose the nearest nominal size available orifice and reinput the hydraulic calculations to make certain the discharge time and nozzle pressures do not fall below the approved minimums. ITEM NO. 22 – Print Out No. 2.After the nozzle orifices and pipe sizes have been chosen, the second computer print out will verify that the system will function properly. ITEM NO. 23 – Bill Of Material.A bill of material should be generated to show the complete list of all required hardware.

12-215


EXAMPLE NO. 12 – INDUSTRIAL FRYER Item No. 1 – Calculation Sheet/1

002124

12-216



002125

12-217


EXAMPLE NO. 12 – INDUSTRIAL FRYER Item No. 2 – Drawing

002126

12-218


EXAMPLE NO. 12 – INDUSTRIAL FRYER Item No. 3 – Hydraulic Input Form

002127

12-219


EXAMPLE NO. 12 – INDUSTRIAL FRYER Item No. 4 – Print Out No. 1/1

002128

12-220



002129

12-221



002130

12-222



002131

12-223


EXAMPLE NO. 12 – INDUSTRIAL FRYER Item No. 6 – Hydraulic Input Form/1

002132

12-224



002133

12-225



002134

12-226



002135

12-227



002136

12-228



002137

12-229



002138

12-230



002139

12-231


EXAMPLE NO. 12 – INDUSTRIAL FRYER Item No. 9 – Bill Of Material

002140

12-232



002141

12-233



002142

12-234



002143

12-235



002144

12-236



002145

12-237



002146

12-238



002147

12-239



002148

12-240



002149

12-241



002150

12-242



002151

12-243



002152

12-244


EXAMPLE NO. 12 – INDUSTRIAL FRYER Item No. 14 – Hydraulic Input/1

002153

12-245


EXAMPLE NO. 12 – INDUSTRIAL FRYER Item No. 14 – Hydraulic Input/2

002154

12-246



002155

12-247



002156

12-248



002157

12-249



002158

12-250



002159

12-251



002160

12-252



002161

12-253



002162

12-254



002163

12-255



002164

12-256


EXAMPLE NO. 12 – INDUSTRIAL FRYER Item No. 17 –Bill Of Material/1

002165

12-257


EXAMPLE NO. 12 – INDUSTRIAL FRYER Item No. 17 –Bill Of Material/2

002166

12-258



002167

12-259



002168

12-260



002169

12-261



002170

12-262



002171

12-263



002172

12-264



002173

12-265



002174

12-266



002175

12-267



002176

12-268



002177

12-269


EXAMPLE NO. 12 – INDUSTRIAL FRYER Item No. 23 – Bill Of Material/1

002178

12-270


EXAMPLE NO. 12 – INDUSTRIAL FRYER Item No. 23 – Bill Of Material/2

002179

12-271


NOTES:

12-272

ANSUL

®

PROPOSAL INFORMATION

CARBON DIOXIDE FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS

001061

Submitted by _______________________________________ Date __________________ Due Date ____________________ In order to expedite the processing of system proposals, it is necessary to give us ALL the information asked for in this form. Fill out the General Information first. Then fill out the section which pertains to the hazard under consideration. GENERAL INFORMATION PROSPECT’S NAME ______________________________________________________________________________________ ADDRESS ______________________________________________________________________________________________ PERSON CONTACTED ______________________________________________ TITLE ________________________________ QUOTATION ADDRESSED TO ________________________________________ TITLE ________________________________ DISTRIBUTOR ____________________________________________________ ADDRESS ____________________________ □ CUSTOMER

ORIGINAL TO BE MAILED TO: □ IRI

APPROVAL REQUIRED BY

□ DISTRIBUTOR

□ FM

□ Fire Dept.

□ SALESMAN Other __________________

HAZARD _______________________________________________________________________________________________ TYPE OF SYSTEM:

□ Manual

PREFERRED TYPE OF AUTOMATIC: □ IONIZATION

□ Automatic □ Rate of Rise

□ Fixed Temperature Electric

□ Photoelectric

□ Other Detection – Type_____________________________________________________________

TYPE OF MANUAL:

□ Local Control

CONNECTED RESERVE:

□ Yes

□ No

SPARE CYLINDERS:

□ Yes

□ No

□ Remote Control

ALARM REQUIRED:

□ Bell

□ Siren

Blueprints or sketch to scale showing size and detail of hazards must be sent with proposal. Show location of hazards with regard to their relation to each other if two or more are to be protected. Show space available for cylinders and specify distance from hazard. Show location of remote manual controls. Also answer applicable questions on “Check List for Total Flooding”, “Local Application”, “Rotating Electrical Equipment”, and “Hose Reels”. Use space provided for sketches. TOTAL FLOODING CHECKLIST 1. Name of space ______________________________________________________________________________________ 2. Contents of space ____________________________________________________________________________________ 3. Size of space: ________ ft. ________ in. Iong X ________ ft. ________ in. wide X ________ ft. ________ in. high. 4. Is ceiling

□ Flat

□ Sloped

□ Peaked

5. If ceiling has exposed beams, show size and arrangement on sketch. 6. Electrical equipment to be shut down: Name: ____________________________ Rating: _______________ Volts: _______________ Amps: ______________ Name: ____________________________ Rating: _______________ Volts: _______________ Amps: ______________ 7. Can all electric equipment be shut down with one switch?

□ Yes

□ No. If “no” how many switches are required?

___________________________________________________________________________________________________

2

TOTAL FLOODING CHECKLIST (Continued) 8. Method of ventilation: □ Forced, If “forced”, locate number, size and location of all intake and exhaust ducts on sketch. □ Natural. Are ducts equipped with dampers? □ Yes □ No. If “no”, can dampers be installed? □ Yes □ No. NOTE: It is Ansul policy to shut down or damper ventilation equipment prior to the discharge of carbon dioxide. 9. On sketch show number, size and location of all doors, windows, other openings. Indicate whether normally open or normally closed and indicate if they can be arranged for automatic closing. 10. Operating temperature: _________°F. Maximum _________°F. Minimum 11. If hazard is an oven, type of heating:

□ Gas

□ Electric

□ Steam

12. Are people working in hazard? □ Yes □ No LOCAL APPLICATION CHECKLIST Hazard to be protected – Check appropriate box. 1. □ Dip tank: ________ft. ________ in. Iong X ________ ft. ________ in. wide, with ________ in. freeboard. 2. □ Drainboard: ________ft. ________ in. Iong X ________ ft. ________ in. wide. 3. □ Quench tank: ________ft. ________ in. Iong X ________ ft. ________ in. wide, with ________ in. freeboard. 4. □ Spray booth: ________ft. ________ in. Iong X ________ ft. ________ in. wide X ________ ft. ________ in. high. Booth opening: ________ ft. ________ in. wide X ________ ft. ________ in. high. 5. □ Mixing tank: ________ ft. ________in. diameter ________ ft. ________ in. high. (See Question 12) 6. Coating machine: a. Number, diameter and width of coating rolls _______________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________________________________ b. Coated material is ________ft. ________ in. Iong X ________ ft. ________ in. wide. c. Material coated

□ One Side Only, or

□ Both Sides

d. Describe coating process: _____________________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________________________________ 7. Flammable material:

□ Lacquer

□ Paint

□ Varnish

□ Oil

□ Other

If lacquer, specify type ______________________________ If other, specify and provide MSDS _____________________ 8. Name and dimensions of equipment dipped or quenched: ______________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________________________________________________ 9. How is material dipped?

□ Hand

□ Conveyor

□ Hoist

□ Other Motor Driven

If other, specify: _____________________________________________________________________________________ 10. If material is dipped by conveyor or is drained over tank, what is the height of top of material above tank or drainboard. (Show on sketch.) 11. Are there baffles or structures across dip or quench tanks that will affect nozzle location? Describe: ____________________ ____________________________________________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________________________________________

3

LOCAL APPLICATION CHECKLIST (Continued) 12. If hazard is mixing or storage tank, answer the following questions: a. Are tanks closed?

□ Yes

□ No

b. Do tanks have

□ Bolted Covers, or

□ Hinged Covers

c. Size of cover _______________________________________________________________________________________ d. Indicate size and location of all openings (hatches, fill lines, vent lines, etc.) on sketch. 13. If heating equipment is involved: a. Type of heating equipment:

□ Gas

□ Steam

□ Electric

________Volts

________Amps

b. Maximum operating temperature ________ °F. 14. Electrical equipment to be shut down: Name: ____________________________ Rating: _______________ Volts: _______________ Amps: ________________ Name: ____________________________ Rating: _______________ Volts: _______________ Amps: ________________ □ Yes

15. Can all electrical equipment be shut down with one switch?

□ No

If “no”, how many switches are required?_______________________ 16. Method of ventilation:

□ Forced

□ Natural

If forced, locate number, size and location of all intake and exhaust ducts on sketch. Are ducts equipped with dampers? □ Yes

□ No. If “no”, can dampers be installed?

□ Yes

□ No

17. Ceiling height of room in which hazard is located: __________ ft. __________ in. 18. For range hoods, supply the following information: a. Fill in dimensions or make sketch.

DUCT

GIVE LOCATION AND DESIGNATIONS

b. Fryer size (container only)

L ____________

W ____________

L ____________

W ____________

If industrial fryer, does hood raise:

□ YES

□ NO

If yes, specify type of protection required

□ Total Flood Only

c. Auxiliary cooking surfaces sizes

4

FRYER LIQUID SURFACE

□ Total Flood and Local Application

L ____________

W ____________

L ____________

W ____________

L ____________

W ____________

001062

LOCAL APPLICATION CHECKLIST (Continued) d. If electric powered:

Volts ____________ Amps ____________

e. If gas powered:

Gas Iine size ____________

f. On overall sketch, show approximate locations of cylinders, remote actuator(s), exhaust fan(s), fire damper(s). 19. For protection of all hazards not covered by the above questions, complete drawings or dimensioned sketches must be furnished. ROTATING ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT CHECKLIST 1. Type of machine to be protected: □ Generator

□ Converter

□ Motor

2. Voltage available for electric system: ______________________

□ AC

□ DC

3. Is machine: a. □ Self-contained recirculating (i.e., no pits or ducts) b. □ Closed recirculating (i.e., sits over pit) c. □ Non-recirculating (i.e., air passes in and out) 4. Decelerating time for machine to stop without braking is ____________________ minutes. Static air volume of machine is ____________________ cubic feet. HOSE REEL CHECKLIST 1. Type hazard to be protected 2. Size and quantity of cylinders required Size ____________ lb. 3. Control type:

Quantity ____________

□ Local Manual

□ Remote Manual

□ Electric

4. Length of hose required ____________________

5

Scale:

6

1 square equals______________________

Scale:

1 square equals______________________

7

Form No. F-94148

1995 Ansul Incorporated

Litho in U.S.A.

Scale:


1 square equals______________________

ANSUL

Carbon Dioxide System Installation



Parts List for Single Row Cylinder Bracketing With Weigh Rail

Item No.

Part Description

No.

1

Weigh Rail Support

71683

2

Weigh Rail Two Cylinders Three Cylinders Four Cylinders Five Cylinders Six Cylinders

– 73266 73267 73268 73269 73270

3

Upright (For Either Right Or Left Side)

73257

4

Backframe Assembly Two Cylinders Three Cylinders Four Cylinders Five Cylinders Six Cylinders

– 79638 79639 79640 79641 79642

Carriage Bolt With Nut 10 in. (25 cm) Long – For 50 lb. (22.7 kg) Cylinders 10.5 in. (27 cm) Long – For 75 lb. (34 kg) Cylinders 12 in. (31 cm) Long – For 100 lb. (45.4 kg) Cylinders

– 73250 73251

Cylinder Clamp Two Cylinders Three Cylinders

– 73091 73092

7

Bracket Foot – Right Side

73554

8

Bracket Foot – Left Side

73553

9

Connector – Required For Attaching Back Frames Together For Seven Or More Cylinders

79413

10

Center Upright – Required With Weigh Rail Assembly Of Seven Or More Cylinders In A Row

73256

11

Center Upright Foot

418508

5

6

1

2 3 10

9

4 5

6

7

11 8

73252 002182

Note: • Some drilling required for assembly of feet, backframes, and weigh rails. • When bolting components together, use the following size bolts, nuts, flatwashers, and lockwashers: – Backframe to Upright – one 2 1/2 in. (6.4 cm) x 1/2 in. diameter bolt, nut, flatwasher, and lockwasher (9/16 in. (1.4 cm) clearance hole required). – Weigh Rail to Weigh Rail Support – one 1 1/2 in. (3.8 cm) x 7/16 in. diameter bolt, nut, flatwasher, and lockwasher (15/32 in. (1.2 cm) clearance hole required). – Weigh Rail Support to Upright – two 1 1/2 in. (3.8 cm) x 7/16 in. diameter bolts, nuts, flatwashers, and lockwashers (15/32 in. (1.2 cm) clearance holes required). – Bracket Foot to Upright – two 1 1/2 in. (3.8 cm) x 7/16 in. diameter bolts, nuts, flatwashers, and lockwashers (15/32 in. (1.2 cm) clearance holes required). – Backframe Connector to Backframe – two 1 1/2 in. (3.8 cm) x 7/16 diameter bolts, nuts, flatwashers, and lockwashers.



715-735-7411

Form No. F-9127-1


Litho in U.S.A.

ANSUL




Parts List for Double Row Cylinder Bracketing With Weigh Rail

Item No.

Part Description

No.

1

Weigh Rail Support

71682

2


– 73266 73267 73268 73269 73270

3


73257

4


– 79638 79639 79640 79641 79642


– 73253 73254


– 73091 73092

7


73556

8


73555

9


79413

10


73256

11

Center Upright Foot

418508

5

6

1

2

3

10

4 9 5 6

7

11 8

73255 002183




715-735-7411

Form No. F-9128-1


Litho in U.S.A.

ANSUL




Parts List for Back To Back Cylinder Bracketing With Weigh Rail

Item No.

Part Description

No.

1

Weigh Rail Support

71684

2


– 73266 73267 73268 73269 73270


73257

1

3 4

2

4 9


– 79638 79639 79640 79641 79642


– 73250 73251


– 73091 73092

7


73554

8


73553

9


79413

10


73256

11

Center Upright Foot

418508

5

6

3

10

5

6

7

11 8

73252 002184




715-735-7411

Form No. F-9129-1


Litho in U.S.A.

ANSUL

CARBON DIOXIDE SYSTEM PARTS LIST



CV90 CYLINDER VALVE 21

22 28 23 19 24 27 25 26 20 18 11 10 12

1

13

14

2* 3* 4 8

7

16

6

5

Note: Safety nut (Item No. 5) must be installed within 290-300 in. lbs. (32.8 – 33.9 Nm) of torque.

17

15 9

FIG. NO. – 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31

*Note: All valves manufactured after March 1995 do not have a removable ball and spring.

002185

PART NO. 79075 417511 40018 42409 42411 77366 45010 45011 415251 79972 79389 79133 79401 79390 79391 42412 42394 41447 79131 415250 79082 79627 79626 79625 11873 79623 79624 79392 79394 415252 77726 73066

DESCRIPTION CV90 Valve Shipping Assembly Body Ball Spring Pipe Plug Safety Nut Safety Disc Safety Washer Main Seal Kit Shipping Assembly Stem Assembly Spring Seal Set Screw Recoil Seat Valve Inlet Seat Pressure Release Plug Gasket Spring Stop Reconditioning Kit Shipping Assembly Spring O-Ring O-Ring O-Ring O-Ring O-Ring – .070 in. Cross Section O-Ring – .103 in. Cross Section Plunger Actuation Insert Spanner Wrench (not shown) Cap Shipping (Top and Fill Part) – Not Shown Safety Shipping Cap – Not Shown


715-735-7411

Form No. F-91122-2


Litho in U.S.A.

CO2 Engineering Manual-ANSUL

Recommend Documents